Home

Agilent Pulse Function Arbitrary Noise Generator

1. amp This command does not output the selected arbitrary waveform Use the FUNC USER command to output the selected waveform The names of the seven built in arbitrary waveforms are EXP_RISE EXP FALL HAVERSINE SINC CARDIAC VOLATILE GAUSSIAN NEG RAMP To select the waveform currently stored in volatile memory specify the VOLATILE parameter The keyword VOLATILE does not have a short form If you select a waveform name that is not currently downloaded a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Therefore ARB_1 and arb_1 are the same name All characters are converted to upper case Use the DATA CAT command to list the names of the seven built in waveforms non volatile VOLATILE if a waveform is currently downloaded to volatile memory and the names of any user defined waveforms non volatile FUNCI USER VOLATII 353 354 4 5 3 Introduction Burst Commands A burst is a certain number of cycles generated by the instrument on a single event The burst of a cycle can be triggered by an internal or external trigger signal When the gated burst mode is selected the last Burst of cycles will always be completed Burst Commands Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix
2. 209 0090 Rear panel of the 81150A USB Interface Connector Host type for external mass memory USB Interface Connector device type for remote programming LAN Interface Connector Channel 1 External Modulation Input Terminal Channel 2 External Modulation Input Terminal External 10 MHz Reference Input Terminal 10 MHz Reference output Terminal GPIB Interface Connector Power sao snr oor WN 28 Front Panel Menu Operation 29 a EE 2 E E c o S 28 e a E 0 co c 5 eS o eo GC Lr E c co z e oO oc E E X c gt OO xm Masi 200 4 eo EFF oO ze i us ye OC a uLo220c c e c c oc o pgp 5 2 P g co E2cctgsg cc o 2896 o b bI goss 3 Sake ek afg5oocococg gt 00015550 20229500902 2 gt o TLE Ece amp oraonwl f amp f amp 6 o PMmees SSO oto o c D rom trt R 00g 5 o x xXx oo O e 9 ui di qc dc c o o Ke u T N 8 eer non ttt amp D 3 Bue dd e o Igeg ttt 3 e ES OG C ea 5 Son anos Ss g e ceCx c uxcocc cuouo o ae e Lic Cc 2 c c e eo o 3 8 Ngt OOMOO 3 eo 2 6 Preparing the 81150
3. SOURCE AM 1 2 INTernal FREQuency CW FIXed NR3 MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected AM 1 2 SOUR INT command The AM 1 2 FREQ query returns the internal modulating frequency in Hertz It doesn t apply if INT2 is selected AMI INT FREO 8MHZ Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference AM 1 I2 INT FUNC SOURCI LH 1 AM 1 2 INTernal FUNCtion SHAPe SlNusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected AM 1 2 SOUR INT command You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform The default is SIN The AM 1 2 FUNC Query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRI NOIS USER e Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle e Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry e Select TRI for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry e Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform with 0 symmetry If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 16K 16384 points Ext
4. DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern TRANsition SELect name Use this command to select a named bit transition waveform The name can be a user defined pattern name that has been stored with DIG TRAN COPY before or the name VOLATILE to select the bit transition waveform that is currently in volatile memory DIG TRAN SEL MY WAVEFORM Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide DIG TRAN COPY DIGital 1 2 ST lt name gt VOLATILE Remote Programming Reference IMulus PATTern TRANsition COPY Use this command to store the volatile bit transition waveform into non volatile storage under a certain name amp The storage space for bit transition waveforms is shared with waveforms used for arbitrary waveform mode DIG TRAN COPY MY WAVEFORM 561 562 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG TRAN DEL DIGital 1 J2 STIMulus PATTern TRANsition DELete name Use this command to delete a particular bit transition waveform Built in waveforms can not be deleted DIG TRAN DEL MY WAVEFORM Remote Programming Reference Command DIG TRAN DEL ALL Long DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern TRANsition DELete ALL Parameters None Parameter Suffix Description Use this command to delete
5. Enter a new security code CALibration CODE Configure the FunGen s internal state for each of the calibration steps to be performed CALibration SETup Specify the value of the known calibration signal CALibration VALue Query the instrument to determine the number of times it has been calibrated CALibration COUNt Store a message in non volatile calibration memory CALibration STRing Trigger Model SCPI Commands Falling Raising edge of a trigger signal at the rear panel TRIGgger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig Out Connector OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig Out Connector OUTPut TRIGger ON OFF Phase Lock Commands Adjust the Phase Offset PHASe angel Set the Zero Phase Reference PHASe REFerence On Off of error reporting if phase lock is lost PHASe UNLOCk ERRor STATe ON OFF Appendix Introduction The following commands of the 81150A 81160A instrument are not available on the 33220A Arhitrary Command SCPI subsystem Download an arbitraty modulation waveform DATA 1 2 MOD VOLATILE value value DATA 1 2 MOD DAC VOLATILE lt binary block gt lt value gt value Select an arbitrary waveform for modulation FUNCtion 1 2 MODulation USER arb name gt VOLATILE 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 669
6. PULS TRAN 1 2 UNIT SOURCe PULSe TRANsition 1 2 UNIT S SEC PCT Use this command to set the default units for the pulse transition times The default unit is used when the parameter is programmed to a value without a unit suffix PULS TRAN2 UNIT PCT 465 466 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PULS WIDT 1I2 SOURce PULSe WIDTh 112 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the pulse width in seconds The pulse width represents the time from the start of rising edge of the pulse to the start of the next falling edge The PULS WIDT 1 2 query returns the pulse width in seconds amp This command is affected by the PULS HOLD 1 2 command which determines the value to be held constant as the period is adjusted the specified pulse width value or the specified pulse duty cycle value or the specifies trailing delay See the PULS HOLD 1 2 command for further information PULS WIDT2 98 7NS Remote Programming Reference 4 5 9 Reference Clock Commands Introduction This section describes the Reference clock related commands 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 467 468 Reference Clock Commands Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example ROSC SOUR SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal Select internal or external reference clock When set to
7. SOURCE VOLTage 1 2 LEVel IMMediate HIGH lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the high voltage level MIN selects the most negative voltage level for the selected function and MAX selects the largest voltage level VOLT2 HIGH 1 33 365 366 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example VOLT 1 2 LOW SOURCE VOLTage 1 2 LEVel IMMediate LOW lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the low voltage level MIN selects the most negative voltage level for the selected function and MAX selects the largest voltage level VOLT1 LOW 1 2 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference VOLT 1 2 UNIT SOURCE VOLTage 1 2 LEVel IMMediate UNIT VPP VRMS DBM Selects the unit for output amplitude does not affect offset voltage or high low levels The default is Vpp The VOLT UNIT Query returns VPP VRMS or DBM VOLT2 UNIT VPP 367 368 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example VOLT 1 2 LIM SOURCE VOLTage 1 2 LIMit HIGH lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum It S used to set read the high level voltage limit If you switch on voltage limiting the high level voltage cannot be set above the programmed lim
8. sss 624 1 6 Trigger Modes xd ddp tec teria n UR REESE 626 7 1 External In to Trigger Out Timing sse tette 629 7 8 Signal Imperfections essent tenerent tenete 631 7 9 Output Amplitude Control s5555222555959995099 90656905o soos E 633 7 10 Attributes of AC Signals tnter tenete tenente 636 7 11 GG SU i et 639 7 12 Frequency SWE D iss sne isda este Ade Bnd ma SRA a SASSER SAEs 646 ac cc ee ener eee 649 DNA EDI m m T 651 7 15 Coupling between Channels tenete tentent tenente 653 hil 655 A 1 Coupled Parameters when channel coupling is on se 655 A 2 Pulse Parameter Definitions issccncsatadasaniinantundinnsnamiiaaicaadsdaddics 658 A 3 Agilent 81150A 81160A in comparison with other Agilent instruments 665 A 3 1 Agilent 81110A 81104A 81101A instrument family sss 665 A 3 2 SI ees E 667 AA Preparing a USB Flash Drive using Windows Vista 670 Agilent Technologies 81150A 81160A Pulse Function Arbitrary Noise Generator Features and Benefits Benchtop Testing 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 1 Introduction The Agilent Technologies 81150A and 81160A is a Pulse Pattern and Function Arbitrary Noise Generator with built in arbitrary waveform and pulse capabilities Its combination of bench top and system featur
9. P Fall Time Width 2GHz S Rising Edge Computation Anti Aliasing Falling Edge m Computation Filter ey SAR Sample Waveform DAC Low Level Sample L 4 Pulse Section Evaluation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Pulse Generation Block Diagram 609 Fall Time M Period Pulse Width Pulse Waveform Parameters 610 Tutorial 7 4 Pattern Generation Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The 81150A 81160A s pattern functionality is implemented as an extension of the Pulse Mode In addition to RZ pulses it allows the generation of pattern sequences that are using either NRZ formatting with adjustable transition times as well as arbitrary transition definitions which are being refered as bit shapes The pattern generation itself allows the definition of pattern sequences with 2 3 or 4 different level settings which allows the emulation of electrical idle sequences as being required in several serial data protocols like USB 1 1 Flexray or CAN 611 612 1 4 1 Introduction 2 Level Patterns 3 Level Patterns 4 Level Pattern Multi Level Pattern Definitions Unlike most other pattern generators in the market the 81150A 81160A allows the generation of digital data streams with 2 3 or 4 diffe
10. UPPer SAMPling MMEMory LOAD PATTern TRANsition STORe PATTern TRANsition Remote Programming Reference nr3 567 nr3 568 nr3 569 nr3 569 AUTO FIXEd 570 Filename 571 Filename 572 Filename 573 Filename 574 4 3 Common Command Summary Command Parameter CAL CLS ESE lt NR1 gt ESR LRN OPC OPC OPT 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Description Internal self calibration Clear the Status Structure Standard Event Status Register Standard Event Status Event Register Instrument s Identification Complete Instrument Setting Operation Complete Return 1 Installed Options 317 318 Command Parameter PSC RCL 0 1 2 3 4 RST SAV 1121314 SRE STB TRG TST WAI Description Power On Status Recall Instrument Setting Reset Save Instrument Setting Service Request Enable Mask Status Byte Software Trigger Start Instrument s Selftests Wait until all pending actions are complete Remote Programming Reference 4 4 81150A 81160A SCPI Instrument Command List Format Introduction The following reference sections list the instrument commands in alphabetical order In addition to a command description the attributes of each command are described under the following headings Not all of these attributes are applicable to all commands The comman
11. E SIGNAL WEM Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide MMI MMI Remote Programming Reference EM STOR DATA 1 2 MOD EM STORe DATA 1 2 MODulation VOLATILE file name It is used to store a waveform to a file from VOLATILE memory MM ELOP E WEM EM STOR DATA MOD VOLATILE ENV 483 484 4 5 11 Introduction Status Reporting Commands The Questionable Data register group provides information about the quality or integrity of the instrument Any or all of these conditions can be reported to the Questionable Data summary bit through the enable register Remote Programming Reference Status Reporting Commands Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide STAT QUES STATus QUEStionable EVENt Reads the event register in the questionable status group It s a read only register Once a bit is set it remains set until cleared by this command or CLS command A query of the register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register STAT QUES Response 4 485 486 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example STAT QUES COND STATus QUEStionable CONDition Reads the condition register
12. NR3 MINimum MAXimum Set the output offset MIN selects the smallest offset MAX selects the largest possible offset VOLT2 0FFS 0 0 371 372 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example VOLT 1 2 RANG AUTO SOURCE VOLTage 12 LEVelj IMMediate RANGe AUTO ON OFF ONCE Disable or enable voltage autoranging for all functions In the default mode autoranging is enabled ON and the instrument automatically selects the optimal settings for the output amplifier and attenuators With autoranging disabled OFF the instrument uses the current amplifier and attenuator settings The AUTO Query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The APPLy command overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging ON The advantage of disabling autoranging is to eliminate momentary disruptions caused by switching of the attenuators while changing amplitude However the amplitude and offset accuracy and resolution as well as waveform fidelity may be adversely affected when reducing the amplitude below the expected range change The ONCE parameter has the same effect as turning autoranging ON and then OFF This parameter allows you to make a one time change to the amplifier attenuator setting before returning to the OFF setting VOLT RANG AUTO ONCE Remote Programming Reference 4 5 5 Modulation Commands Amplitude Modula
13. SWE2 1DLE EFR 497 498 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example SWE 1 2 SPAC SOURCe SWEep 1 2 SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Select linear or logarithmic spacing for the sweep The default is LINear The SW SWI E 1 2 SPAC query returns LIN or LOG For a linear sweep the instrument varies the output frequency in a linear fashion during the sweep For a logarithmic sweep instrument varies the output frequency in a logarithmic fashion during the sweep E2 SPAC LOG Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference SWE 1 2 STAT SOURCe SWEep 1 2 STATe ON OFF Disable or enable the sweep mode To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable the sweep mode after you have set up the other sweep parameters The default is OFF The SWE 1 2 STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The instrument will not allow the sweep mode to be enabled at the same time that burst or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable sweep the burst or modulation mode is turned off SWE2 STAT OFF 499 500 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example SWE 1 2 TIME SOURCe SWEep 1 2 TIME lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum S
14. Remote Programming Reference Command MMEM LOAD PATT Long MMEMory LOAD PATTern Parameters VOLATILE lt filename gt Parameter Suffix Description Loads a data pattern from external storage Example MMEM LOAD PATT VOLATILE mypattern pat 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 571 572 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example MMI MMI EM LOAD TRAN EMory LOAD TRANsition VOLATILE lt filename gt Loads a bit shape transition waveform from external storage MMI EM LOAD TRAN VOLATILE mybitshape wfm Remote Programming Reference Command MMEM STOR PATT Long MMEMory STORe PATTern Parameters VOLATILE lt filename gt Parameter Suffix Description Stores a data pattern to external storage Example MMEM STOR PATT VOLATILE mypattern pat 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 573 574 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example MMI MMI EM STOR TRAN EMory STORe TRANsition VOLATILE lt filename gt Stores a bit shape transition waveform to external storage MMI EM STOR TRAN VOLATILE mybitshape wfm Remote Programming Reference 4 6 Common Command List Command CAL CLS ESR IDN 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Description The Calibration query cause
15. Features and Functions Upper Threshold Voltage Introduction The upper threshold voltage defines the voltage level at which a sample is considered being a logical 1 If the voltage at MOD IN is above the upper threshold voltage then the external provided bit is considered being 1 If the voltage is above the lower threshold but less than or equal to the upper threshold then the bit is considered being an idle symbol will result in the programmed offset voltage at the output The upper threshold is only used for 3 level signals Sampling Points 1 Frequency Input Signal Upper Threshold Lower Threshold Lid a le Oa ja Derived Logical Levels Leading Edge on Pulse Screen NRZ M High Level Output i d Signal Pod deci Low Level User defined Bitshape Output Signal Example only Front Panel e On the pattern mode screen press the Ext Input Setup softkey Operation e Press the Upper Threshold softkey e Enter the threshold voltage using the numerical keypad or turn the rotary knob to adjust the upper threshold voltage Remote Interface DIGital 1 2 SOURce EXTernal THReshold UPPer lt volts gt MINimum MAXimum Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 159 160 3 5 4 Introduction Front Panel Operation Selecting a Pattern The Pattern Selection screen works similar to the arbitrary waveform selection screen except that the choice
16. Frequency 1 Delay 0 000 s Amplitude Offset 0 000 V p Load Imp 50 0 Q Outp Imp 90 Q Polarity Normal Continuous Continuous Amplitude Offset Frequency Delay Offset Load Imp Outp Imp Continuous Continuous Amplitude Offset Using the numeric keypad enter the desired value Select and press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units When you select the units the 81150A 81160A outputs a waveform with the displayed amplitude if the output is enabled For this example press mVrms Front Panel Menu Operation 2 13 1 Converting the amplitude from one unit to another Introduction You can easily convert the displayed amplitude from one unit to another For example the following steps show you how to convert the amplitude from Vrms to Vpp Enter the numeric To switch between different representations press the amplitude offset entry mode high level low level softkey and then choose the different representation You can choose between High Low Ampl Offs Select the new Steps units e Press Ampl softkey and then press the MORE softkey e This brings you to another menu layer where you can choose between Vpp Vdc Vrms Vdc dBm Vdc that will be used when Ampl Offs is selected The same softkey menu provides easy application of TTL and ECL level settings Frequency 50 nHz Delay Amplitude ap Width 50 0 ns Offset 0 000 V Lead Edge 5 0 Load Imp 50 62 Trail Edge 5 095 Outp Imp 90 Q Polarity
17. Wmin 81150A Where Wmin is either 4 1ns or 10ns depending on the selected amplifier See section Amplifier Type Selection 81160A Where Wmin is 1 5 ns After selecting the pulse function press the Width Duty Cycle Trailing Delay softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse width The absolute pulse width measured from the start of the leading edge to the start of the trailing edge In this format the pulse width is independent of changes in pulse period and delay The duty cycle is the pulse width measured from the start of the leading edge to the start of the trailing edge expressed as a percentage of the period In this format if you adjust the period the absolute width is adjusted to maintain the duty cycle Features and Functions Trail Delay The trailing delay is the absolute delay from the start of the pulse period to the start of the trailing edge In this format the trailing edge remains fixed relative to the start of the pulse period if you adjust the pulse delay leading edge delay or the pulse period Remote Interface The following function is used to configure the Pulse Width remotely Operation PULSe WIDTh 1 2 lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum PULSe DCYCle 1 2 percent MINimum MAXimum PULSe TDELay 1 2 seconds MINimum MAXimum PULSe HOLD 1 2 WIDTh DCYCle TDELay FU
18. value VOLATILE lt binary block value value destination arb name VOLATILE NORMal SWAPped arb name VOLATILE arb name VOLATILE See Page 332 334 335 336 337 338 339 341 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 305 Burst Commands Command Parameter BURST GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted BURSt 1 2 INTernal PERiod lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum MODE TRIGered GATed NCYCles lt cycles gt MINimum MAXimum PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum STATe ON OFF TRIGer 1 2 COUNt NR3 MINimum MAXimum UNIT ANGLe DEGree RADian Level Commands Command Parameter VOLTage 1 2 AMPLitude NR3 MINimum MAXimum HIGH NR3 MINimum MAXimum LOW NR3 MINimum MAXimum UNIT VPP VRMS DBM LIMit HIGH lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum LOW lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum STATe ON OFF OFFSet lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum RANGe AUTO ON OFF ONCE 306 See Page 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 See Page 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 Remote Programming Reference Amplitude Modulation Commands Command Parameter See Page AM 112 DEPTh NR3 MINimum MAXimum 374 DSSCarrier ON OFF 375 EXTernal IMPedan
19. DATA 1 2 MOD DAC DATA 1 2 MODulation DAC VOLATILE lt binary block value value value Addresses the internal 16K 16384 modulation memory It can be used to download an arbitrary waveform into the modulation memory which can be used as modulating waveform for a signal generated by the instrument It corresponds to the DATA 1 2 and DATA 1 2 DAC commands which loads the VOLATILE memory of the instrument For a more detailed description of the data format refer to DATA DAC VOLATILE SCPI command or Appendix of this document DATA MOD DAC VOLATILE DATA MOD DAC VOLATILE 801020304 87 4098 0 4096 8187 co Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DATA 1 2 MOD COPY DATA 1 2 MODulation COPY lt destination arb name gt VOLATILE Copies the waveform from VOLATILE memory to the specified name in non volatile memory The source for the copy is always VOLATILE You cannot copy from any other source and you cannot copy to VOLATILE The arb name may contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ Blank spaces are not allowed If you specify a name with more than 12 characters a Program mnemonic too long error i
20. Description Example ARM PER 1 2 ARM SEQuence 1 STARt LAYer 1 PERi10od 11 2 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum S SEC Specifies the period of the internal trigger period generator of the selected channel To select the internal trigger generator use ARM SOUR 1 2 INT2 ARM PER2 10uS Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference ARM SENS 11 2 ARM SEQuence 1 STARt LAYer 1 SENSe 1 2 EDGE LEVel Use this command to select triggered or gated mode by choosing whether the instrument arms on the edge s or level of the trigger signal To select the external input as trigger source use ARM SOUR 1 2 EXT ARM SENS2 LEV 533 534 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example ARM SLOP 1121 ARM SEQuence 1 STARt LAYer 1 SLOPe 1 2 POSitive NEGative EITHer Use this command to select the trigger slope for the triggering signal when triggering on edges Select EITHer to trigger on both the positive and negative edge of the triggering signal To select the external input as trigger source use ARM SOUR 1 2 EXT or gating level ARM SLOP1 POS Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide ARM
21. Power On Results No errors Continuous Continuous Power On _ Calibration Messages Press the Power On Messages softkey to review the result of the power on test Press the Selftest softkey to execute the standalone selftest Remove all cables from the instrument before starting the extended selftest Press the Extended Selftest softkey to reach this screen Press Yes to start Extended Selftest and No to exit Remove all cables from the instrument before starting the extended selftest Performing Calibration Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions Press the Calibration softkey to reach this screen Press Yes to start calibration and No to exit Remove all cables from the instrument before starting the calibration The following functions are used to execute the selftests TST SYSTem TEST PON NORM ALL To execute self calibration use CAL 293 3 20 Security Introduction Front Panel Operation Secure All Web Server Web Password 294 The 81150A 81160A provides security functionality Utility e Press E and then press the System softkey e Press the Security softkey Web Server Web Password AGT81150 Continuous Continuous Enabled Pressing this key deletes all user data and shuts down the machine This key helps you to enable disable the embedded web server Defines the password that is required to modif
22. TIME Parameter lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum NR3 MINimum MAXimum NR3 MINimum MAXimum NR3 MINimum MAXimum OFF ON frequency MINimum MAXimum SFRequency EFRequency DC LINear LOGarithmic ON OFF lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference See Page 485 486 487 488 489 See Page 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 313 System Related Commands Command Parameter SYSTem BEEPer STATe ON OFF DATE years month day COMMunicate RLSTate LOCal REMote RWLock ERROor HELP HEADer KLOCKk ON OFF EXCLude NONE LOCAL PRESet SECurity ON OFF IMMediate SET block data TEST PON NORMal ALL TIME lt hours gt lt minutes gt lt seconds gt VERSion WARNing BUFFer STRing CALibration ALL Display Commands Command Parameter DISPlay ON OFF TEXT lt quoted string gt CLEar 314 See Page 502 503 504 505 506 507 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 See Page 523 524 525 Remote Programming Reference Triggering Commands Command Parameter See Page ARM FREQuency 1 2 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 527 IMPedance NR3 MINimum MAXimum 530
23. 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference AM 1 J2 DSSC SOURCE AM 1 2 DSSCarrier ON OFF Double sideband suppressed carrier DSSC AM can be performed with or without carrier suppression DSSC OFF 1 ModulationDepth th 1 t t u 2 100 U moa EE DSSC ON u t U nod t U carrier t AM1 DSSC OFF 375 376 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example AM 1 2 EXT IMP SOURCE AM 1 2 EXTernal IMPedance lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum OHM Specifies the impedance of the modulation input If you try to program any other value it will be rounded to one of the specified values 50Q or 10kQ AM1 EXT IMP 50 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference AM 1 2 EXT RANG SOURCI LH AM 1 2 EXTernal RANGe lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Specifies the voltage range of the modulation input If you try to program any other value it will be rounded to one of the specified values either 2 5V or 5V Setting the input voltage range to 2 5 5 selects 2 5V 5V as full range input voltage range AMI EXT RANG 5 371 378 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example AM 1 2 INT FREO
24. Continuous Continuous Ayilent 81150a Host Name Set the Host Steps Name e Press the Host Name softkey and enter the host name The host name is the host portion of the domain name which is translated into an IP address The host name is entered as a string using the knob and cursor keys to select and change characters The host name may include letters numbers and dashes You can use the m for the numeric characters only e Press He to delete all characters to the right of the cursor position Set the Domain The Domain Name cannot be changed But the name that was detected by Name the Operating System is displayed for information 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 87 88 Set the DNS Server address Set the WINS Server address Exit the DNS Setup menu Exit the menu Press the DNS Server softkey and enter the address of the DNS server there are two DNS Server addresses in the IP address format using the keypad Press the WINS Server softkey and enter the address of the WINS server there are two WINS Server addresses in the IP address format using the keypad Press the Back softkey to return to the previous screen This will bring you back to the LAN menu Utility Press the key to directly enter from the LAN menu Else keep pressing the Back key unless you reach the required screen Front Panel Menu Operation 2 32 Resetting the 81150A 81160A Introduction To
25. Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference BURS GATE POL BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted Selects whether the instrument uses true high or true low logic levels the externally gated burst It corresponds with ARM SLOP POS NI on command Application recommendation Use ARM SLOP BURS GATE POL NEG 355 EG E 356 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example BURS 1 2 INT PER BURSt 1 2 INTernal PERiod NR3 MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the burst period for internally triggered bursts The burst period defines the time from the start on one burst to the start of the next burst It corresponds with the ARM PERiod or ARM FREQ command BURS NT ER 10MHZ Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference BURS 112 MODI LH J u BURSt 1 2 MODE TRIGgered GATed Sets trigger on the edge or gate level at the external input It corresponds width the ARM SENS EDGE LEV command Application recommendation Use ARM SENS BURS1 MODE TRIG 357 358 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example BURS 1 2 NC
26. LEVel NR3 MINimum MAXimum 531 PERiod 1 2 NR3 MINimum MAXimum 532 SENSe 112 EDGE LEVel 933 SLOPe POSitive NEGative EITHer 534 SOURce 1121 IMMediate INTernal 1 INTernal 2 535 EXTernal MANual TRIGger 536 TRIGger 1 2 SOURce IMMediate INTernal 1 937 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 315 Pattern Related Commands Command DIGit al 1 2 S ie 316 STI Mulus IGNal FORMat PATTern STATe PRBS PRESet DATA FORMat SELect COPY DELete DELete ALL CATalog NVOLatile CATalog FREE QUANtity LENGth NLEVels LOFFset TRANsition DAC INTerpolate prm G Lect a a Lete S COPY D D ELete ALL CATalog TRIGger MODE SOURCe Parameter NRZ USER ON OFF lt n gt lt n gt lt m gt lt block data gt PACKed lt nr1 gt lt name gt lt name gt VOLATILE lt name gt lt name gt lt n gt lt n gt lt value gt lt block data gt ON OFF lt name gt lt name gt VOLATILE lt name gt lt name gt BIT BLOCK INT EXT See page 538 539 540 541 542 543 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 EXTernal RANGe IMPedance THREshold LOWer
27. Set the stop Press the Stop Frequency softkey and then set the value to 5 kHz using the frequency numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys At this point the 81150A 81160A outputs a continuous sweep from 50 Hz to 5 kHz if the output is enabled Sweep Type Linear Start Freq 50 000000 Hz Linear Sweep Continuous Continuous 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 73 74 View the waveform If desired you can set the frequency boundaries of the sweep using a center frequency and frequency span These parameters are similar to the start frequency and stop frequency and are included to give you added flexibility To achieve the same results set the center frequency to 2 525 kHz and the frequency span to 4 950 kHz Press to view the waveform parameters To turn off the Graph Mode press again D 01010 E 1 5000kHz 5000Hz e You can generate a single frequency sweep by pressing the key but only if triggered mode is active e The 81150A 81160A can also have gated sweeps In this case it will start a new sweep as long as the gate is active If the gate is getting inactive while a sweep is generated this sweep will be finished For more information see Triggering a Sweep or Burst Front Panel Menu Operation 2 28 Outputting a Burst Waveform Introduction You can configure the 81150A 81160A to output a waveform with a specified number of cycles called a burst You can output the burst at a rate
28. Use as copy name gt to copy a file into the parent directory MMEM COPY ISTATE1 ISTATE2 MMEM COPY ISTATE1 MMEM COPY STATE 1 STATE2 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide MM MM lt file name gt EM DE EM ELete lt file name gt Remote Programming Reference It s used to delete file lt file name gt from the currently selected directory MM EM EL STAT E T 471 478 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example MMEM LOAD STAT MMEM LOAD STATe 1 2 3 4 file name gt 2 To load a complete instrument setting state from a file file name gt located in the current selected directory on the USB memory stick into non volatile memory in the instrument Load FREQ SWEEP into storage location 2 MMEM LOAD STAT 2 FREO SWEEP I Recall storage location 2 as current setting RCL 2 MMEM LOAD STAT 1 TEST 0012 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide MMI MMI Remote Programming Reference EM LOAD DATA 1 2 EM LOAD DATA 1 2 VOLATILE lt file name gt It is
29. lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Or you can set the amplitude by specifying a high level and low level using the following commands VO VO LTage 1 2 HIGH volts MINimum MAXimum LTage 1 L 2 LOW lt volts gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 107 108 3 2 4 DC Offset Voltage Introduction Limits due to Amplitude Limits due to Output Termination Arhitrary Waveform Limitations The default offset is 0 volts for all functions The relationship between offset voltage and output amplitude is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50 load or 10 volts for a high impedance load lt V V Mora SV 7 Offset The offset limits are determined by the current output termination setting The 81150A 81160A keeps the configured voltages However if this is not possible it shows an error message For arbitrary waveforms the maximum offset and amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum offset is limited to 4 95 volts into 50 ohms You can also set the offset by specifying a high level and low level For exampl
30. the current cycle will be finished If the gate is getting active again while the previous cycle is being finished then there will be no discontinuity at the output In triggered and gated mode the triggering event or gate signal may be generated by the following e External In e Man key or SCPI command e Internal Trigger Generator External In Man key or SCPI command Internal Trigger Generator 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Tutorial This input allows to define the decision threshold in a 10V voltage window The input signal is referenced to chassis ground 81150A The input impedance may be set to either 50 Q or 10 kQ 81160A The input impedance may be set to either 50 Q or 1 kQ The Man key on the front panel may be used to generate the trigger event or gate signal manually When receiving the TRG command the instrument will emulate a press and release event of the Man key Each channel of the Agilent 81150A 81160A contains its own internal trigger event generator The frequency of the trigger event may be adjusted as required for the specific application The internal trigger generator cannot be used to generate the gate signal While each of the two channels has its own internal trigger generator the External In and Man key are a shared resource for both channels But both channels can use the available arming sources independently only if channel coupling is disabled The block diagram below reflects
31. 1 2 COMPlement 0 1 OFF ON The APPLy command overrides the current setting and automatically enables the Output connector In case of an overload condition both outputs of the channel Normal and Inverted will be turned off Features and Functions 3 2 15 Parameter Coupling Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The 2 channels of the Agilent 81150A 81160A can work as 2 completely independent instruments that use some shared resources like External In Man key and Clock Reference For applications that require some locking of the two channels the 81150A 81160A provides two means of synchronization e Frequency Coupling The frequency of channel 2 is automatically set to an adjustable ratio of channel 1 e Channel Coupling The frequency and phase of channel 1 and 2 are locked The 81150A 81160A works as a 2 channel instrument with only one timing system for both channels 121 122 Frequency Coupling Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation For a 2 channel instrument the frequency of the 2 channels can be coupled to keep a user defined frequency ratio This can be used to automatically adjust the frequency of channel 2 whenever the frequency of channel 1 changes e Enables or disables frequency coupling mode on channel 2 If frequency coupling mode is enabled the frequency on channel 2 will be calculated as followed fo FreqMult f FreqDiv e It is no longer possible to enter
32. 1mHz to 50 MHz The default is 10 Hz ource After enabling PWM press the PWM Frequency softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the d esired PWM Frequency PWM 1 2 INTernal FRI MAXimum EQuency lt frequency gt M Nimun Features and Functions 3 11 6 Width Deviation Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation e 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The width deviation represents the variation in width in seconds in the modulated waveform from the width of the original pulse waveform Width deviation 0 s to 1000 s see below The default is 500ps The width deviation cannot exceed the current pulse width The width deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width Wmin Width Deviation Pulse Width Wmin and Width Deviation lt Period Pulse Width Wmin 81150A Where Wmin is either 4 1 ns or 10 ns depending on the selected amplifier See section Amplifier Type Selection 81160A Where Wmin is 1 5 ns The width deviation is limited by the current edge time setting Width Dev lt Pulse Width 0 8 Lead Edge Time 0 8 Trail Edge Time and Width Dev x Period Pulse Width 0 8 Lead Edge Time 0 8 Trail Edge Time After enabling PWM press the Width Deviation softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation PWM 1 2 DEViation deviation in seconds MINimum MAXimum
33. ANGL UNIT 1 2 ANGLe DEGree RADian Select degrees or radians to set the phase offset value remote interface only The default is DEG The ANGL query returns DEG or RAD From the front panel the phase offset is always displayed in degrees radians are not available If you set the phase offset in radians from the remote interface and then return to front panel operation you will see that the instrument converts the phase offset to degrees UNIT ANGL RAD Remote Programming Reference 4 5 4 Level Commands Introduction The following SCPI command subsystem specifies all the commands to change amplitude offset high level and low level of a sigal to be output The Amplitude can be specified as VPP VRMS dBm 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 363 364 Level Commands Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example VOLTage 1 2 SOURCE VOLTage 1 2 LEVelj IMMediate AMPLitude lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum VPP VRMS DBM V Set the output amplitude MIN selects the smallest amplitude MAX selects the largest amplitude for the selected function The VOLT 1 2 UNIT command specifies the unit the amplitude will be interpreted VPP VRMS or DBM VOLT2 4 12 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference VOLT 1 2 HIGH
34. Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation The Agilent 81150A 81160A allows to use the two channels completely independent or in a frequency and phase locked mode In the Channel Coupling mode the frequency and phase of both the channels are locked Locking the output frequency and phase of both channels does have a noticeable effect on most of the major modes of operation Therefore as a result of coupling the output function and all other parameters like burst sweep and modulation are also kept identical on both channels Refer to the Appendix for complete list of coupled parameters and Tutorial for more details Ch 1 Ch2 Press the e and za key to select the channel that defines the setting that will be used when enabling channel coupling Couplin Then press the key to enable channel coupling The following function is used to configure Channel Coupling remotely TRACk CHANnel 1 2 ON OFF Features and Functions 3 2 16 Polarity Introduction In the normal mode default the waveform goes positive during the first part of the cycle In the inverted mode the waveform goes negative during the first part of the cycle Waveform Polarity e As shown in the examples below the waveform is inverted relative to characteristics the offset voltage Any offset voltage present will remain unchanged when the waveform is inverted e When a waveform is inverted the Trigger Out and Strobe Out signal associat
35. If the width is held so is the width deviation If the duty cycle is held so is the duty cycle deviation If duty cycle and duty cycle deviation are being held width deviation values specified with the PWM 1 2 DEV command are automatically converted to the equivalent duty cycle deviation in percent PWM DEV 100ns 407 408 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description PWM 1 2 DEV DCYC SOURCE PWM 1 2 DEViation DCYCle lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum PCT Set the duty cycle deviation in percent percent of period This value represents the peak variation in duty cycle from the duty cycle of the underlying pulse waveform For example if duty cycle is 10 and duty cycle deviation is 596 the duty cycle of the modulated waveform will vary from 596 to 1596 The default is 1 percent MIN is approximately 096 MAX is approximately 10096 limited by the period minimum pulse width and edge time The PWM 1 2 DEV DCYC query returns the duty cycle deviation in percent e The duty cycle deviation cannot exceed the current pulse duty cycle e The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width If you select the External modulating source PWM 1 2 SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the duty cycle deviation to 5 percent
36. Local key on the Front Panel USB The USB interface requires no front panel configuration parameters Just connect your Agilent 81150A 81160A to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure LAN There are several parameters that you may need to set to establish network communication using the LAN interface Primarily you will need to establish an IP address You may need to contact your network administrator for help in establishing communication with the LAN interface 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 301 302 4 1 1 Programming Recommendations Recommendations This section lists some recommendations for programming the instrument for programming e Start programming from the default setting The common command the 81150A for setting the default setting is 81160A RST e Switch off the automatic update of the display to increase the programming speed The device command for switching off the display is DISPlay OFF The SCPI standard defines a long and a short form of the commands For fast programming speed it is recommended to use the short forms The short forms of the commands are represented by upper case letters For example the short form of the command to set 100 ns pulse delay is PULS DEL 100NS e To improve programming speed it is also allowed to skip optional subsystem command parts Optional subsystem command parts are depicted in square brackets e g Set edge time in sec
37. Logical Trigger Signal and or Logical Strobe Signal is routed to Sync Out A and or Sync Out B The OUTPUT connectors provide the signal output normal and inverted and the indicators show the current state of the output on or off The instrument provides the following special function keys Man Store Recall Help The function of each of these keys is explained below In triggered or gated mode the MAN key can be used to manually arm and or trigger the instrument Front Panel Menu Operation Trigger Modes The trigger modes are explained below in subsequent sections e Continuous e External Triggered e External Gated e Internal Triggered e Manual See Selecting Trigger Mode section for more details Waveform Types The standard waveforms include Pulse Sine Noise Square Ramp and Arbitrary The predefined arbitrary waveforms include Exponential rise exponential fall sin x x cardiac gaussian haversine negative ramp and DC Advanced modes of There are three advanced modes of operation available Operation e Modulation Selects the modulation type from AM FM PM FSK PWM e Sweep For frequency sweeps e Burst Repeats selected waveform n times The following sections provide more details on the modulation types Store The Store Recall key can be used to store to recall from 1 to 4 individual Recall f settings in the instrument memory In the internal memory location 0 there is a default setting s
38. PCT DEG RAD It is used to set the default unit for the pulse delay parameter The default unit of a parameter is the unit used when the parameter is programmed to a value without a unit suffix FUNC2 PULS DEL UNIT PCT 439 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description 440 FUNC 1 2 PULS HOLD SOURce FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe HOLD WIDTh DCYCle TDELay Set instrument to hold either pulse width or pulse duty cycle or trailing delay WIDTh DCYCle TDEL The instrument holds the pulse width setting in seconds constant as the period is varied Minimum width and edge time restrictions apply If a command to set a duty cycle value is received the duty cycle is converted to the equivalent pulse width in seconds If Pulse Width Modulation PWM is turned on the pulse width is held and the width deviation also is held as the period is varied Duty cycle deviation commands are converted to width deviation values The instrument holds the pulse duty cycle setting in percent constant as the period is varied Minimum width and edge time restrictions apply If a command to set a pulse width value is received the width is converted to the equivalent duty cycle in percent If Pulse Width Modulation PWM is turned on the pulse duty cycle is held and the duty cycle deviation also is held as the period is varied Width deviation commands are converted to duty
39. Select the function and amplitude for the burst Select the burst mode 81150A and 81160A User s Guide You can configure the 81150A 81160A to output a waveform with a specified number of pulses waveform cycles called a burst You can output the burst at a rate determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the Front Panel External In connector A burst can be initiated either by e An Internal Immediate event which triggers a continuous burst Atrigger source which triggers a triggered burst e An active gate which enables a gated burst For burst waveforms you can select sine square ramp pulse or arbitrary waveforms Burst mode cannot be used when using DC or noise Burst e Press E and specify the Cycles and the Start Phase softkeys to set the desired values e The Start Phase defines the phase at which signal generation starts The allowed range is 360 to 360 It is only applicable to Sine and Arb waveforms amp Refer to Outputting a Burst Waveform for details 41 42 2 11 3 Sweep Introduction To select a Sweep In the frequency sweep mode the 81150A 81160A steps from the start frequency to the stop frequency at a sweep rate which you specify The 81150A 81160A can produce a frequency sweep for sine square ramp or arbitrary waveforms pulse noise and dc are not allowed Sweep Press MI to output a sweep using the present settings for frequency output amplitu
40. Setup With DHCP Auto IP On IP address will automatically be set Set the IP Address e 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Front Panel Menu Operation To use the Agilent 81150A 81160A on the network you must first establish an IP setup including an IP address and possibly a subnet mask and gateway address Press the IP Setup softkey By default DHCP Auto IP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is set to On With DHCP Auto IP On an IP address will automatically be set by DHCP Auto IP when you connect the Agilent 81150A 81160A to the network provided the DHCP server is found and is able to do so DHCP also automatically deals with the subnet mask and gateway address if required This is typically the easiest way to establish LAN communication for your instrument All you need to do is leave DHCP Auto IP On However if you cannot establish communication by means of DHCP Auto IP you will need to manually set an IP address and a subnet mask and gateway address if they are in use To establish an IP setup follow these steps Press the softkey to select DHCP Auto IP Off The manual selection softkeys appear and the current IP address is displayed Contact your network administrator for the IP address to use All IP addresses take the form nnn nnn nnn nnn where each nnn is a byte value in the range 000 through 255 You can enter a new IP address using the numeric keypad not the knob Just type in the numb
41. The pulse width and width deviation and the pulse duty cycle and duty cycle deviation are coupled in the front panel interface If you select Width for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Width Deviation softkey is available On the other hand if you select Dty Cyc for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Dty Cyc Deviation softkey is available 221 222 3 11 7 Introduction Characteristics Duty Cycle Deviation The duty cycle deviation represents the variation in duty cycle of the modulated waveform from the duty cycle of the pulse waveform The duty cycle deviation is expressed as a percentage of the period Duty cycle deviation 0 to 100 see below The default is 50m The duty cycle deviation cannot exceed the current pulse duty cycle The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width Wmin Duty Cycle Deviation lt Duty Cycle 100 x Wmin Period and Duty Cycle Deviation lt 100 Duty Cycle 100 x Wmin Period 81150A Where Wmin is either 4 1 ns or 10 ns depending on the selected amplifier See section Amplifier Type Selection 81160A Where Wmin is 1 5 ns The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the current edge time setting Duty Cycle Dev lt Duty Cycle 80 x Lead Edge Time Trail Edge Time Period and Duty Cycle Dev lt 100 Duty Cycle 80 x Lead Edge Time Trail Edge Time Period Features and Functions Front Panel After enabling PWM press the Dty Cy
42. e Internal External or Channel The default is Internal e fyou select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The frequency deviation is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the deviation to 100 kHz then a 2 5V 5V signal level corresponds to a 100 kHz increase in frequency Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the frequency below the carrier frequency Note the 81160A offers a fix 2 5V input range The 81150A offers a selectable 2 5V or 5V input range Modulation In 1 10V 2 5 V 5 V OV 2 5 V 5 V 10V 1 After enabling FM press the FM Source softkey INTernal2 EXTernal FM 1 2 SOURce INTernal 1 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 199 200 3 9 Phase Modulation PM Introduction A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform PM is very similar to FM but in PM the phase of the modulated waveform is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform For more information on the fundamentals of Phase Modulation refer to the Tutorial chapter Continuous PM Phase Deviation 180 deg Carrier Sinewave 0 04 MHz Modulated by Sinewave 0 02 MHz Modulation Signal EN SX ORY Trigger Out J Strobe Out CON DON AAN Features and
43. for more information Contents n EO eOROO 6 1 Dp pp m 13 2 Front Panel Ment Operatl lusicicsictiaiconeebadi recen ci red tof ve Pa ec icon il ct nic 17 2 1 The Front Pablel odo od d dad Ooq dp Dad Pg dp pp bn D QD M 19 22 Help is Available tnnt tnnt nter tenentes 24 2 3 The Front Panel Display at a Glance netten ntes 25 Z9 NI NIGEL deperdita een teen UU Oi PRU U Qno EK 25 232 Graph M6deiusosuse osos imc ne e e a 26 24 The Front Panel Number Entry sse nennen nennen 27 2 5 The Rear Panel sees ntennnte teret tentent tete te ttem 28 2 6 Preparing the 81150A 81160A for Use sssssssssseeeenetnnntttn tenens 30 2 7 Using the Built in Help System sse tette tette ntn tn tantes 31 2 8 Selecting the Mode of Operation tenerent 32 2 9 Selecting Trigger Mode and Source sse 33 2 10 Selecting the Waveform sss tenente tenete tenerent nennen 37 2 11 Selecting the Advanced Mode sse netten 40 2 11 1 Modulation RE RE 40 PNE ME I eT 41 VENENIS AEE 42 2 12 Setting the Output Frequency sse retten tnter tentata ta tanta tania 43 2 13 Setting the Output Amplitude sss netten tnter ttti nnns 45 2 13 1 Converting the amplitude from
44. group A positive transition filter allows an event to be reported when a condition changes from false to true Setting both positive negative filters true allows an event to be reported anytime the condition changes Clearing both filters disable event reporting The contents of transition filters are unchanged by CLS and RST Remote Programming Reference 4 8 Programming Basics Introduction This chapter provides the information you need for programming the 81150A 81160A using the Agilent IO Libraries Suite Familiarity with the Agilent 10 Libraries Suite is instrumental in understanding the remote programming of the 81150A 81160A See the user documentation delivered with the Agilent IO Libraries Suite for information on how to use them Depending on the options of your 81150A 81160A e g one channel or two channel instrument some of the following functions may not be valid See the integrated Help or the User s Guide for a more detailed description of available options 4 8 1 Before you begin Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide This section provides background information that you need before you start with remote programming 585 586 Connecting to the instrument Introduction To communicate with the generator from a remote computer the Agilent IO Libraries Suite must be installed on this computer The following description only provides you with the information you need for the instrument F
45. the indicated conditions are fully understood and met A WARNING notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury or death Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Safety Summary General Safety Precautions The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Agilent Technologies Inc assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Before operation review the instrument and manual for safety markings and instructions You must follow these to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in safe condition General This product is a Safety Class 1 instrument provided with a protective earth terminal The protective features of this product may be impaired if it is used in a manner not specified in the operation instructions All Light Emitting Diodes LEDs used in this product are Class 1 LEDs as per IEC 60825 1 Environment Conditions This instrument is intended for indoor use in an installation category Il pollution degree 2 environment It is designe
46. 001 1 channel instrument Output at BNC Connector Internal Logical Signal Sync Out A source None Logical Trigger Signal Channel 1 Logical Strobe Signal Channel 1 Sync Out B source None Logical Trigger Signal Channel 1 Logical Strobe Signal Channel 1 gt Note It is e g possible that the Logical Trigger Signal 1 functionality is routed simultaneously to Sync Out A and Sync Out B 81160A 002 2 channel instrument Output at BNC Connector Internal Logical Signal Sync Out A source None Logical Trigger Signal Channel 1 Logical Strobe Signal Channel 1 Logical Trigger Signal Channel 2 Logical Strobe Signal Channel 2 Sync Out B source None Logical Trigger Signal Channel 1 Logical Strobe Signal Channel 1 Logical Trigger Signal Channel 2 Logical Strobe Signal Channel 2 gt Note It is e g possible that the Logical Trigger Signal Channel 1 functionality is routed simultaneously to Sync Out A and Sync Out B Features and Functions Front Panel Cont Trig Gated E mE to display Operation Press one of the trigger mode keys a the Trigger Mode Screen Impedance 50 2 Hysteresis High Trg d by Risin Frequency 0 000 Hz Trigger Out TTL Strobe Out TTL Sy External Trigger Continuous External In Impedance The settings above indicate that Logical Trigger Signal 1 is routed to Sync A Logical Strobe Signal 1 is routed to Sync B Sync A and
47. 10 3 Introduction FSK Carrier Frequency Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions FSK Carrier Frequency The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 MHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 uHz 81150A 240 MHz 81160A 500 MHz Square 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz Ramp 1 uHz 81150A 5 MHz 81160A 20 MHz Arbs 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the Modulation In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output To set the carrier frequency press the Frequency softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency FREQuency 1 2 lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 211 3 10 4 Introduction FSK Hop Frequency Characteristics Front Panel Operation 212 FSK Hop Frequency The maximum alternate or hop frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 100 Hz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum F
48. 122 07 kHz the address will change by more than one location during each clock cycle and some points will be skipped If too many points are skipped a phenomenon known as aliasing will occur and the waveform output will become somewhat distorted eo The Nyquist Sampling Theorem states that in order to prevent aliasing the highest frequency component of the desired output waveform must be less than half of the sampling frequency 2 GHz for the 81150A 2 5 GHz for the 81160A 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 605 606 1 2 Creating Arbitrary Waveforms Introduction Creating a waveform The Agilent 81150A allows you to create arbitrary waveforms of up to 512K points 524288 points 81160A 1ch 262144 points 81160A 2ch 131072 points and provides seven built in examples of arbitrary waveforms You can create an arbitrary waveform from the front panel or you can use the Agilent BenchLink Waveform Builder software provided on the CD ROM included with the Agilent 81150A 81160A The Agilent BenchLink Waveform Builder software allows you to create arbitrary waveforms using a graphical user interface on your PC and then download them into the Agilent 81150A 81160A You can also capture waveforms from your Agilent oscilloscope and import them into BenchLink For most applications it is not necessary to create an arbitrary waveform with a specific number of points since the function generator will repeat points or interpolate as ne
49. 2ch or 64k 128k 256k 2ch deep Waveform Memory Tutorial The 81150A 81160A represents amplitude values by 16 384 discrete voltage levels or 14 bit vertical resolution The specified waveform data is divided into samples such that one waveform cycle exactly fills waveform memory see the illustration below for a sine wave If you create an arbitrary waveform that does not contain exactly 16K or Samplema points the waveform is automatically stretched by repeating points or by interpolating between existing points as needed to fill waveform memory 81150A Samplemax 524288 512 k 81160A 1 channel Samplema 262144 256 k 81160A 2 channels Samplemax 131072 128 k Since all of waveform memory is filled with one waveform cycle each memory location corresponds to a phase angle of 2 1 16 384 radians or 27 Samplemax radians 8191 DAC Code 8191 Memory Address Phase 12288 270 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Sine Wave Representation in Waveform Memory 603 604 Phase Increment Register PIR Direct digital synthesis DDS generators use a phase accumulation technique to control waveform memory addressing Instead of using a counter to generate sequential memory addresses an adder is used see the following page On each clock cycle the constant loaded into the phase increment register PIR is added to the present result in the phase accumulator The most significant
50. 4 level patterns bits 7 amp 6 b amp 4 3 amp 2 and 1 amp 0 define one MLbit each Data is used from left to right and within one byte from MSB to LSB 543 gJ G NLEV 2 IG FORM PACKED 1 IG DATA 2161001101001001001 Example KJ O 544 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern SELect lt name gt Use this command to select a named data block The name can be one of the built in pattern names PRBS 7 PRBS 15 etc a user defined pattern name that has been stored with DIG COPY before or the name VOLATILE to select the pattern that is currently in volatile memory DIG SEL MY PATTERN 545 Command DIG COPY Long DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern COPY Parameters lt name gt VOLATILE Parameter Suffix Description Use this command to store the volatile pattern into non volatile storage under a certain name Example DIG COPY MY PATTERN 546 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern DELete lt name gt Use this command to delete the named pattern from non volatile storage amp f a pattern is currently in use it
51. 5 V 5 V 0v 2 5 V 5 V Front Panel After enabling AM press the Source softkey Operation Remote Interface AM 1 2 SOURce INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 191 192 3 8 Frequency Modulation FM Introduction FM Characteristics A modulated waveform consists of e A Carrier Waveform Shape e A Modulating Waveform In FM the frequency of the carrier is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform For more information on the fundamentals of Frequency Modulation refer to the Tutorial chapter e The 81150A 81160A will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FM and AM at the same time When you enable FM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The 81150A 81160A will not allow FM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable FM the sweep or burst mode is turned off Features and Functions 3 8 1 Selecting FM Modulation Front Panel You must enable FM before setting up any of the other modulation Operation parameters Press and then select FM using the Modulation Type softkey The FM waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency modulating frequency output amplitude and offset voltage Remote Interface To avoid multiple waveform changes enable FM after you have set up the Operation other modulation parameters FM 1 2 STATe ON OFF Con
52. 670 A 4 Preparing a USB Flash Drive using Windows Vista Introduction The following description is intended to help you prepare an USB flash drive if itis not being detected by the 81150A 81160A or if the recovery mechanism of the software update was not able to bring up the instrument after an interrupted software update e e You need to have administrative rights on your computer to execute the steps mentioned below e The steps mentioned below will erase all data from the USB flash drive e The procedure does not work on computers that have Windows XP installed on them since the required partition tool does not support USB flash drives on Windows XP Appendix Steps 1 Click on the Windows logo and type cmd 2 Atthe command prompt type diskpart and press enter allow permissions and continue 3 When you are at the diskpart gt prompt type list disk and press enter Insert the USB flash drive into a Windows Vista PC 5 Wait until Windows Vista has recognized the USB flash drive 6 Atthe diskpart gt prompt type list disk and press enter Check which drive has been added to the list usually disk 1 depending on how many disk drives are installed 7 Type select disk where is the disk number of the USB flash drive Continue only if you are sure that the selected drive is the USB flash key that you want to prepare The following steps will erase all data from the selected drive 8 Type clean a
53. 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference SYST COMM RLST SYSTem COMMunicate RLSTate LOCal REMote RWLock Set the remote local state of the instrument over the LAN interface from a Telnet or socket session Provides control analogous to the IEEE 488 2 commands such as GTL Go To Local over the GPIB and USB interfaces e LOCal The default Sets the instrument state to local Removes any annunciator and unlocks the front panel keyboard e REMote Sets the instrument state to remote Displays the remote annunciator and locks the keyboard except the LOCAL key e RWLock Sets the instrument state to remote with lock Displays the rwl annunciator and locks the keyboard including the LOCAL key SYST COMM RLST LOC 505 506 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example SYST ERR SYSTem ERRor NEXT Read and clear one error from the instrument s error queue A record of up to 30 command syntax or hardware errors can be stored in the error queue Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored Errors are cleared as you read them If more than 30 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue the most recent error is replaced with Queue overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the e
54. 81160A Trigger Out signal to drive the clock input of your external pattern source Set the 81150A 81160A frequency to the desired data rate and use Fixed sampling mode This gives you the greatest flexibility in creating ideal and distorted signals You can use NRZ with adjustable transition times or arbitrary bitshapes and add AM or PM modulation to create jitter and noise on the output signal e f your external pattern source delivers a continuously running clock signal together with the data signal and you want the 81150A 81160A to follow exactly that external clock then consider using Triggered mode with the external clock signal connected to External In and Fixed sampling If you use arbitrary bitshapes the 81150A 81160A frequency setting determines the duration of a bitshape The bit rate is determined by the external clock Modulation is not available in this case e f you cannot control the data rate of your external pattern source and your pattern source does not deliver a continuously running clock signal set the 81150A 81160A to Continuous Mode with Automatic sampling Set the 81150A 81160A frequency approximately to the data rate of your external pattern source In order for the 81150A 81160A to correctly pass that pattern through itis necessary that the data pattern occasionally contains sequences of 8 or more identical bits or 8 or more unit intervals of electrical idle in case of 3 level patterns T
55. AM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable AM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The AM 1 2 STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The instrument will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable AM and FM at the same time When you enable AM the previous modulation mode is turned off The instrument will not allow AM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable AM the sweep or burst mode is turned off AM1 STAT ON 381 382 Frequency Modulation FM Commands Introduction A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform In FM the frequency of the carrier is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FM 1I2 DEV LH SOURCE FM 1 2 DEViation lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the peak frequency deviation in Hertz This value represents the peak variation in frequency of the modulated waveform from the carrier frequency The PM 1 2 DEV query returns the deviation in Hertz The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the deviation If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than the carrier frequency with FM enabled the instrument wi
56. CHAN2 ON couples both channels copies all values from channel 2 to channel 1 switches tracking state ON TRAC CHAN 1 2 OFF decouples both channel TRAC CHAN1 ON 429 430 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example TRAC FREQ SOURCe TRACk FRI ON OFF Switches frequency coupling on to generate sub rates of channel one s EQuency STATe frequency at the output connector of channel two TRAC FRI EQ ON Remote Programming Reference Command TRAC FREOQ DIV Long SOURce TRACk FREQuency DIVider Parameters lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Parameter Suffix E Description Specifies the divider of the frequency quotient of channel two s frequency Range 1 255 Example TRAC FREO DIV 4 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 431 432 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example TRAC FREQ MULT SOURce TRACk FREQuency MULTiplier lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Specifies the multiplier of the frequency quotient of channel two s frequency Range 1 255 TRAC FREQ MULT 8 Remote Programming Reference 4 5 8 Output Function Commands Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide This section describes the low level commands used to program the instrument Although the APPLy commands provide the most straightforward method to progra
57. Continuous and Burst enabled A burst of waveform cycles is repeated continuously You can select the number of cycles per burst in the range of 2 to 1 000 000 Trigger Out marks each cycle Strobe Out rises at the start of the first cycle in a burst and falls at the start of the last cycle Continuous Burst of 4 Trigger Out Strobe Out Out 4 241 242 3 13 3 Triggered Burst Mode Introduction The following figures show typical timings for trigger mode Triggered and Burst enabled Characteristics A burst of waveform cycles is triggered by an active edge at the selected arming source e Man key on front panel triggered by press or release or both e External In External signal triggered by rising or falling or both edges e Internal Internally triggered bursts select the triggering period You can select the number of cycles per burst in the range of 2 to 1 000 000 Trigger Out marks each cycle Strobe Out rises at the start of the first cycle in a burst and falls at the start of the last cycle Triggered Burst of 4 External In Trigger Out L Strobe Out 4 Out J Features and Functions 3 13 4 Gated Burst Mode Introduction Characteristics 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The following figures show typical timings for trigger mode Gated and Burst enabled Bursts of waveform cycles are enabled by Gated by an active level at the se
58. Default Value 0 Auto Update On Continuous Continuous 3 Number of Number of T Default Auto EDIT Bits Levels Value Update i AS T E Configure the new Configure the new pattern by providing all the information shown in the pattern above screen When done press the EDIT softkey to open the new created pattern in the pattern editor 162 Remote Interface Operation Number of Bits Number of Levels Default value Auto Update Features and Functions gJ IG NLEV 2 IG FORM PACKED IG DATA 2161001101001001001 O O Defines the initial number of bits in the pattern For most efficient and easiest editing the desired pattern length should be chosen on this screen In case of setting up too less or too many bits here this can be changed by inserting or removing bits in the process of editing the pattern later on Defines the number of different levels or bit values in the pattern This can be set to 2 3 or 4 Defines the default bit value that is used to fill the pattern during creation Depending on the number of levels the possible values are 0 and 1 for 2 level patterns 0 1 and idle for 3 level patterns And 0 1 2 3 for 4 level patterns On Changes of the pattern will be applied immediately to the output The editor is slower Off The pattern will be applied to output when editing is finished The editor is faster due to missing hardware update Edit a Stored Pattern
59. Defines the threshold to distinguish between logical levels on the external input Depending on the number of levels see DIG NLEV a subset of the thresholds are actually used If NLEV 2 the LOWer threshold is used to distinguish between 0 and Y If NLEV 3 the LOWer threshold is used to distinguish between 0 and while the UPPer threshold is used to distinguish between and 1 NLEV 3 EXT THR LOW 0 5 DIG EXT THR UPP 0 5 O Q Q 569 570 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG EXT SAMP DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern EXTernal SAMPling AUTomatic FIXed Selects whether the sampling of the external pattern data that is provided at MOD IN is done in fixed or automatic mode Use fixed mode for test setups that allow operation of the external pattern source by a clock signal that is generated by the 81150A 81160A or if the external pattern source provices a clock signal that can be used to trigger the 81150A 81160A via the External In connector Use automatic mode for external pattern sources that do not allow to tightly couple the timing systems of pattern source and 81150A 81160A or that send patterns in packets with inactivity between the data packets See External Patterns for more details on externally provided patterns DIG EXT SAMP FIX
60. EN key the description for the errors will be shown first However you can see the description of warnings by pressing the Warning softkey If the output s are switched off and you are using the knob to adjust parameters it is usually not possible to generate warnings or errors All parameters are automatically limited to settings that guarantee specified operation Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 6 Application Programs The enclosed CD contains several remote interface example programs to help you develop programs for your own application Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference lists the syntax for the SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands available to program the function generator Several example programs are given in the CD to demonstrate controlling the Agilent 81150A 81160A using SCPI commands These example programs are written in Microsoft Visual BASIC 6 0 and use the Agilent VISA COM objects for example C sharp or VC examples are also available The example programs given in the CD illustrate the use of several drivers and environments Also included is the Agilent BenchLink Waveform Builder for the 81150A 81160A Waveform Generator For a detailed description of these programs refer to the readme file in the Examples directory If you want to modify the example programs or write your own programs and compile them you will need to install the Agilen
61. Filter sXe Nb beERS ue Channel 2 Scaling 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Channel Addition The sample data of both channels is being scaled according to the contribution to the added signal so that the added signal is using the full scale of the waveform DAC The amplifier of channel 1 is set to the sum of the specified voltages for channel 1 and channel 2 High Level High Level High Level Low Level Low Level Low Level 651 652 The resulting added voltages must be in the allowed voltage range of the amplifier being used on channel 1 Due to the scaling of the digital samples before the addition there might be a loss of resolution if the specified amplitudes of channel 1 and channel 2 are different The scaling factors are defined as follows Amplitude Scaling Amplitude Amplitude Tutorial 1 15 Coupling between Channels Introduction Frequency Coupling 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Each of the two channels of the Agilent 81150A 81160A uses its own DDS as time base for the signal being generated This allows using the two channels completely independently just as if they are two independent 1 channel instruments that use the same reference clock In some applications the 2 channels are not used completely independently but rather require some synchronization between the two channels When enabling frequency coupling the ou
62. Front Panel Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide After selecting the Edit Pattern softkey press the Edit Stored softkey to Edit or Delete a stored pattern This is shown in the following image Press the EDIT softkey to edit the selected pattern in the Pattern Editor which is described below 163 Internal Pattern Memory Number of L 3 Length 32 Preview USER 1 lt User defined USER 2 USERS USER4 Continuous Continuous Ez Edit VOLATILE Front Panel After selecting the Edit Pattern softkey press the Edit VOLATILE softkey to Operation edit a pattern from the VOLATILE memory of the instrument See the description of the pattern editor below Bit 0 Number of Bits 32 TT 500 mV 4 B aha 0 000 V SOO mv L Continuous Continuous Pattern Edit On the Pattern Edit screen Bits can be inserted and deleted the pattern can be edited the loop offset can be modified and the pattern can be stored to the non volatile memory 164 Features and Functions Bit Selects a bit by its position in the pattern The Bit is automatically incrementing when changing the value of a bit Bit Value Press the Bit Value softkey to select the value of the selected bit Depending on the number of levels in the pattern the Bit Value can either be set to 0 1 0 1 idle or 0 1 2 3 For easy editing the different bit values can be entered using the numerical keypad Press 0 1 2 3 for the corresponding bit value
63. Functions 3 9 1 Selecting PM Modulation Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The 81150A 81160A will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable PM and AM at the same time When you enable PM the previous modulation mode is turned off The 81150A 81160A will not allow PM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable PM the sweep or burst mode is turned off You must enable PM before setting up any of the other modulation Mod parameters Press bill and then select PM using the Modulation Type softkey The PM waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency modulating frequency output amplitude and offset voltage To avoid multiple waveform changes enable PM after you have set up the other modulation parameters PM 1 2 STATe OFF ON 201 202 3 9 2 PM carrier shape Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Carrier Waveform Shape Sine Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform The default is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or dc as the carrier waveform Pulse Noise Press any of the front panel function keys except JL or M For Arb arbitrary waveforms press E and then press More key Press the Select Waveform softkey to select the active waveform FUNCtion 1 2 SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy co
64. Keys Modes Type Modes Function Keys USB Host Channel 2 Selection CE Auent Technologies BUTBOA pr Graph Local Power Switch Menu Softkeys Cancel Numeric Keypad Inputs Outputs Front Panel of the 81160A 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 19 20 Power Switch USB Menu Softkeys More Key The front panel switch is used to switch on and off the instrument When the front panel switch is off the instrument is in standby mode The instrument is disconnected from the AC line power only by disconnecting the power cord The Front Panel contains a USB host connector It is intended to connect USB drives to store instrument states and waveforms on an external memory The five keys below the main display screen are called softkeys software controlled keys The current function of each softkey is indicated in the corresponding box on the display Some softkeys hold additional symbols to indicate that they provide extended functionality e Yellow Triangles SZ These are visible on the five softkeys on the Front Panel The yellow triangles indicate that there are more choices further and keep pressing to view the available options e White Rectangles Indicate that by pressing them you can enter into another screen The following examples explain the above mentioned
65. Level Index Input lt Lower Threshold 0 0 Input gt Lower threshold 1 1 Input lt Lower Threshold 0 0 Lower Threshold lt Input lt 2 Upper Thres Input Upper threshold 1 1 When using external pattern mode the incoming pattern must be sampled by the 81150A 81160A before it can be processed by the pattern generation logic There are two different sampling modes that differ in the way the 81150A 81160A chooses the point in time when the value of the sample is being determined Fixed Sampling Introduction Tutorial With fixed sampling there is a deterministic relation between the sampling time at MOD IN and the edge at the TRIGGER OUT connector The external data is sampled at fixed intervals The latency of the external pattern through the 81150A 81160A is deterministic This mode shall be used whenever the device that provides the external data pattern can either be driven with an external clock that is provided by the 81150A 81160A via TRIGGER OUT or it provides a clock signal together with the data which can be used to trigger the 81150A 81160A via the External In connector Or in other words when the timing of pattern source can be tightly coupled with the 81150A 81160A then fixed sampling is possible Automatic Sampling Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide With automatic sampling the 81150A 81160A is monitoring the signal at MOD IN to detect an initial transition After this transi
66. Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DIG FORM DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern FORMat DATA PACKed 1 4 8 This command controls the format of data transfer for the DIG DATA command In the following description MLbit stands for a multi level bit a bit value that has either 2 3 or 4 levels The following values are possible 1 This is the default format and should be used in most cases Data is sent as a string of ASCII 1 s and 0 s or ASCII 0 1 and 2 for 3 level patterns or ASCII 0 1 2 and 3 for 4 level patterns Only the least significant bit 2 level patterns or two bits 3 and 4 level patterns are used to define a single MLbit 4 The data is sent as a string HEX characters With this format the amount of data to be transmitted is reduced amount but the binary block data still contains printable characters which is needed for some programming environments For 2 level patterns bits 3 through 0 of each symbol are used to define 4 MLbits For 3 and 4 level patterns bits 3 amp 2 and 1 amp 0 are used to define 2 MLbits 8 The data is sent as a string of 8 bit ASCII characters All 8 bits are used This format provides maximum packing density but the binary data block might contain non printable characters For 2 level patterns bits 7 through 0 define one MLbit each For 3 and
67. MHz Modulated by Sinewave with 1 MHz max Modulation Signal NN min Trigger Out 4 Strobe Out ON LATIN A max min _ Amplitude Modulation DSSC 640 Modulation Depth 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Tutorial The amount of amplitude modulation is called the modulation depth which refers to the portion of the amplitude range that will be used by the modulation For example a depth setting of 80 causes the amplitude to vary from 10 to 90 of the amplitude setting 9096 10 80 with either an internal or a full scale 45V external modulating signal 641 642 Frequency Modulation FM Introduction For FM the function generator uses modulation samples to modify the output frequency of the instrument by changing the content of the PIR see Direct Digital Synthesis amp Since the rear panel Modulation In connector is decoupled you can use the 81150A 81160A to emulate a voltage controlled oscillator VCO The variation in frequency of the modulated waveform from the carrier frequency is called the frequency deviation Waveforms with frequency deviations less than 196 of the modulating signal s bandwidth are referred to as narrowband FM Waveforms with larger deviations are referred to as wideband FM The bandwidth of the modulated signal can be approximated by the following equations BW 2 x Modulating Signal Bandwidth For narrowband FM BW 2 x Deviation Modulating Signal Ba
68. Menu as seen on the Front Panel of the 81150A 81160A lt Channel Information Frequency Delay 0 000 s Amplitude Offset Load Imp Outp Imp Polarity orma Channel 1 Information Trigger Information for Am by sine pe Continuous OUT1 Ch 1 Ch 2 Channel addition Channel 1 and 2 Burst External Trigger F2 2 3 F1 amp Channel 2 Information Frequency Coupling Numeric Readout 1 333333333333 MHz Polarity iia MORE Impedance Impedance in 2 of 2 Units Softkey Labels 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 25 26 2 3 2 Graph Mode Introduction foran To enter the Graph mode press the a key To exit press the key again TRG OUT ST E 1 000 Vie 4 0 000 V Continuous Continuous 1 000008000000 MHz Delay e e Not all screens have a graphical representation e The trigger mode screen will always be in textual mode even if graph mode is enabled Front Panel Menu Operation 24 The Front Panel Number Entry Entering modifying You can enter numbers or modify the displayed number from the front panel numbers using one of the following two methods e Rotary Knob Arrow Keys e Numeric keypad softkeys le lv for le DDE For selecting units Use the numeric keypad and menu softkeys to select the units e e The left right arrows below the Rotary Knob are used to move left and right to select the digit to be modified o
69. NR3 MINimum MAXimum NR3 MINimum MAXimum SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRlangle NOISe USER INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal ON OFF See Page 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 See Page 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 Remote Programming Reference Pulse Width Modulation Commands Command Parameter See Page PWM 112 DEViation NR3 MINimum MAXimum 407 DCYCle lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 408 EXTernal IMPedance NR3 MINimum MAXimum 40 RANGe NR3 MINimum MAXimum 411 INTernal FREQuency lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 412 FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRlangle 413 NOISe USER SOURce INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal 414 STATe ON OFF 419 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 309 Output Commands Command Parameter CHANnel MATH OFF PLUS 0UTPut 112 0 1 OFF ON COMPlement 0 1 OFF ON IMPedance NR3 MINimum MAXimum EXTernal NR3 MINimum MAXimum LOAD NR3 MINimum MAXimum POLarity NORMal INVerted ROUTe 7 HIVoltage HiBandwidth STRobe VOLTage TTL ECL SYM4vpp TRIGger VOLTage TIL ECL TRACK CHANne1 1 2 ON OFF FREQuency ON OFF DIVider lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum MULTiplierl NR3 MINimum MAXimum Output Function Commands Command Parameter FREQuen
70. Remote Programming Reference DISPlay WINDow STATe ON OFF Disable or enable the instrument s front panel display When it is disabled the front panel display is blanked and the bulb used to backlight the display is also switched off The DISP query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON Sending a message to the front panel display from the remote interface DISP TEXT command overrides the display state This means that you can display a message even if the display is disabled The display is automatically enabled when power is cycled after an instrument reset RST command or when you return to local front panel operation Press the key or execute the IEEE 488 GTL Go To Local command from the remote interface to return to the local state DISP ON 523 524 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DISP TEXT DISPlay WINDow TEXT quoted string Display a text message on the instrument s front panel display Sending a text message to the display overrides the display state as set by the DISP command The TEXT query reads the message sent to the front panel display and returns a quoted string You can use upper or lower case letters A Z numbers 0 9 and any other character on a standard computer keyboard Depending on the number of characters you specify in the string the instrument will choose one of t
71. Set the duty cycle percentage for square waves Duty cycle represents the amount of time per cycle that the square wave is at a high level assuming that the waveform polarity is not inverted The default is 50 MIN selects the minimum duty cycle for the selected frequency and MAX selects the maximum duty cycle The FUNC 1 2 SQU DCYC query returns the current duty cycle setting in percent For square waveforms the APPLy command overrides the current duty cycle setting and automatically selects 5096 The duty cycle setting is remembered when you change from square wave to another function When you return to the square wave function the previous duty cycle is used If you select a square waveform as the modulating waveform for AM or FM the duty cycle setting does not apply The instrument always uses a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle FUN2 SQU DCYC 23 3PCT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PER 1I2 SOURce PER1od 11 2 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the period for pulses The PER 1 2 query returns the period of the pulse waveform in seconds The specified period must be greater than the sum of the pulse width and the edge time This command affects the period and frequency for all waveform functions not just pulse For example if you select a period using the PER 1 2 comman
72. Source Pattern Bit Shape Bit Waveform External Patterns Number of Levels Sample Mode Lower Threshold Voltage Upper Threshold Voltage Pattern Trigger Mode Input Configuration External In Threshold Voltage Input Impedance Hysteresis Modulation In Input Range Input Impedance Threshold Voltage 2 Modulation Carrier AM FM PM FSK Carrier PWM Mod Waveform AM Mod Waveform FM PM PWM AM Depth Factory Setting Gaussian with Crest Factor 3 1 Factory Setting Exponential Rise Factory Setting Off Internal PRBS 2 7 1 NRZ CAP 2 2 Fixed 1 0V 1 6V Block Factory Setting 25V 506 High 81160A only 5 V 10 kQ 2 5 V external modulated FSK only Factory Setting 1 MHz Sine wave 1 MHz Pulse 100 Hz Sine wave 10 Hz Sine wave 100 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 297 298 AM DSSC FM Deviation PM Deviation FSK Hop Frequency FSK Rate PWM Width Deviation Modulation State Sweep Start Stop Frequency Sweep Time Sweep Mode Type Sweep State Frequency Marker Off 100 Hz 180 degrees 100 Hz 10 Hz 500 ps Off Factory Setting 100 Hz 1 kHz 1 Second Linear Off Features and Functions Burst Burst Count Burst Start Phase Burst State Triggering Operations Trigger Mode Trigger Source Internal Trigger Frequency Triggered Gated by System Related Operations Power Down Recall Display Mode Error Queue Stored States
73. Sync B output levels are set to TTL 2 TRIGger ROUTe NONE SYNA SYNB Remote Interface OUTput 1 Operation SYAB OUTput 1 SYAB 2 STRobe ROUTe NONE SYNA SYNB 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 129 130 3 3 Input Configuration Introduction This section contains information on the following parameters e External In Parameters Threshold Voltage Input Impedance e Modulation In Parameters Input Voltage Range Input Impedance FSK Threshold Voltage Reference Clock VVV Y 3 3 1 Introduction Front Panel Operation Features and Functions External In Parameters The External In Parameters contain the following e 81150A and 81160A Threshold Voltage e 81150A and 81160A Input Impedance e 81160A only Hysteresis e 81160A only Frequency Cont Trig Gated Press one of the trigger mode keys 2 gt OF to display the Trigger Mode Screen External In Thresh TTL 2 5 V Triggered Sinewave Impedance 50 Source External In Trg d by Ris Trigger Out TTL Strobe Out TTL External Trigger Continuous Rising Edge ji External In Triager Impedance Out Trigger Mode Screen of the 81150A 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 131 132 Impedance 50 2 Hysteresis High Trg d by Rising Frequency 0 000 Hz Trigger Out TTL Strobe Out TTL SyncB External Trigger Continuous Trigger Mode Screen of the 81160A Threshold Voltage Introducti
74. Voltage Autoranging characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions Voltage Autoranging Autoranging is enabled by default and the 81150A 81160A automatically selects the optimal settings for the output amplifier and attenuators With autoranging disabled the 81150A 81160A uses the current amplifier and attenuator settings You can disable autoranging to eliminate momentary disruptions caused by switching of the attenuators while changing amplitude However turning autoranging off has side effects e The amplitude and offset accuracy and resolution as well as waveform fidelity may be adversely affected when reducing the amplitude below a range change that would occur with autoranging on e You may not be able to achieve the minimum amplitude that is available with autoranging on Utility Press zl and select the Output Setup softkey Then press the Amplifier Range softkey again to toggle between the Auto Hold and Auto Once selections The following function is used to configure the voltage autoranging remotely VOLTage 1 2 RANGe AUTO ON OFF ONCI LH wy The APPLy command overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging 113 114 3 2 9 e Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Amplifier Type Selection The Amplifier Type Selection applies to the
75. Waveform softkey to edit any of the arbitrary waveforms stored in non volatile memory or the waveform currently stored in volatile memory While editing an existing waveform please note the following interactions e f you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape for AM FM PM or PWM the waveform is automatically limited to 16K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 257 258 3 15 System Related Operations Introduction This section gives information on topics such as instrument state storage power down recall error conditions self test and front panel display control This information is not directly related to waveform generation but is an important part of operating the 81150A 81160A Features and Functions 3 15 1 Instrument State Storage Introduction The 81150A 81160A has five storage locations in non volatile memory to store instrument states The locations are numbered 0 through 4 Storage location 0 holds the instruments default state It is not possible to store an instrument state to location 0 You can also assign a user defined name to each of the locations 1 through 4 for use from the front panel Characteristics e You can store the instrument state in location 1 to 4 However you can only recall a state from a location that contains a previously stored state e From the remote interface only you can recall location 0 This is equivalent to using the S
76. Y softkey to set the DAC value for the current point For this example set X to 3279 and Y to 8191 Define the remaining waveform points FP OO N Features and Functions Using the X and Y softkeys define the remaining waveform points using the values shown in the table below The X value of the last point that can be defined in the waveform must be less than 16384 16K The waveform editor automatically connects the last waveform point to the voltage level of first point to create a continuous waveform To insert additional points after the current waveform point press the Insert Point softkey The new point is inserted with the same DAC value as the current point To remove the current waveform point press the Remove Point softkey The remaining points are joined using the interpolation method currently selected If Point 1 is removed then Point 2 will be placed to address 0 Remove Point is not possible if the waveform has 2 points since this is the minimum waveform length Point X Y 0 8191 3279 8191 6554 4096 11469 8191 Equidistant Spacing Pressing the Equidistant Spacing softkey adjusts all points in the waveform editor at an equal distance from one another 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 251 End Edit When the editing is finished the resulting waveform will look similar to the following screenshot Point 4 Number of Points 4 Continuous Continuous 3191 Store the arbitrary END Ed
77. a 2 5V 5V signal level corresponds to a 5 percent deviation that is an additional 596 of period added to the pulse duty cycle Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the duty cycle Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference The operation of the PWM 1 2 DEV DCYC command is affected by the FUNC 1 2 PULS HOLD command The FUNC PULS HOLD command determines whether pulse width the default or pulse duty cycle values are to be held constant as the period is varied If the width is held so is the width deviation If the duty cycle is held so is the duty cycle deviation If pulse width and width deviation are being held duty cycle deviation values specified with the PWM 1 2 DEV DCYC command are automatically converted to the equivalent width deviation in seconds PWM DEV DCYC 10 1 PCT 409 410 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PWM 1 2 EXT IMP SOURCE PWM 1 2 EXTernal IMPedance lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum OHM Specifies the impedance of the modulation input If you try to program any other value it will be rounded to one of the specified values either 50Q or 10kQ PWM EXT IMP 50 OHM Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programmin
78. also summarized by bits in the questionable status register SYST WARN Response 0 Remote Programming Reference Command SYST WARN BUFF Long SYSTem WARNing BUFFer Parameters Parameter Suffix 2 Description Use this command to read the maximum possible number of characters which could be returned by SYST WARN STR If all warnings were active Example SYST WARN BUFF Response 8627 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 519 520 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example SYST WARN STR SYSTem WARNing STRing It is used to read all the currently active warning messages The warning messages are concatenated to form a single string with a as separator between the messages SYST WARN STR Response Remote Programming Reference Command CAL Long CALibration ALL Parameters Parameter Suffix B Description Disconnect all cables before executing calibration Self calibration includes the following e Levels at normal and inverted outputs e Levels at Trigger Out e Levels at Strobe Out e Sensitivity of External In e Input voltage window and OV level at Modulation In Example CAL Response 1 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 521 522 4 5 14 Introduction Display Commands Display related commands Display Commands Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide
79. can not be deleted DIG DEL MY PATTERN 547 548 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG DEL ALL DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern DELete ALL Use this command to delete all user defined patterns from non volatile storage amp f a pattern is currently in use it can not be deleted DIG DEL ALL Remote Programming Reference Command DIG CAT Long DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern CATalog Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Use this query to get a list of all user defined patterns Example DIG CAT 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 549 550 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG NVOL CAT DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern NVOLatile CATalog Use this query to get a list of all non volatile patterns DIG NVOL CAT Remote Programming Reference Command DIG NVOL FREE Long DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern NVOLatile FREE Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Use this command to get the number of unused pattern slots that are available for storing patterns The return value will be in the range or 0 to 4 Example DIG NVOL FREE 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 551 552 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG N
80. command This command returns the same result as a Serial Poll but the Master Summary bit bit 6 is not cleared by the STB command Trigger e g a sweep a burst or a simple pulse from the remote interface depending on the selected instrument function It is similar to the TRIG command Performs a complete self test of the instrument Returns 0 PASS or 1 FAIL If the test fails one or more error messages will be generated to provide additional information on the failure Use the SYST ERR command to read the error queue Wait for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands over the interface 577 578 4 7 Status Model Introduction What is a Condition Register What is an Event Register This section describes the structure of the SCPI status system used by the 81150A 81160A The status system records various conditions and states of the instrument in several register groups as shown on the following pages Each of the register groups is made up of several ow level registers called Condition registers Event registers and Enable registers which control the action of specific bits within the register group These groups are explained below A condition register continuously monitors the state of the instrument The bits in the condition register are updated in real time and the bits are not latched or buffered This is a read only register and bits ar
81. currently selected e The PLL state indicates whether the internal PLL is locked or unlocked This is also reflected in the Questionable Data Register Refer to the Remote Interface Reference for more information Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions Press zd and then Reference Clock softkey Reference Clock Selection Source Internal PLL State LOCKED Continuous Continuous Manual ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal ROSCillator SOURCe AUTO ON OFF 141 3 4 Pulse Waveforms Introduction A pulse waveform consists of a period a pulse width a rising edge and a falling edge This is shown in the following figure In pulse mode it is possible to adjust the transition times of the pulse leading and trailing edge settings Pulse Width refers to the start of leading edge to start of trailing edge In this format the pulse width is independent of changes in pulse period and delay Pulse Width 10 i 1096 4 9 lt eee Rise Time Fall Time 142 Features and Functions 3 4 1 Pulse Period Introduction The pulse period defines the time between two consecutive pulses from the start of the leading edge to the start of the next leading edge It can be set as either period or frequency The pulse period will be ignored for triggered pulses Pulse Period e 81150
82. cycle deviation values The instrument holds the trailing delay setting in seconds constant as the period is varied Minimum width and edge time restrictions apply Remote Programming Reference The PULS HOLD 1 2 command does not limit period settings The physical limits of the width are not exceeded Example FUNC2 PULS HOLD DCYC 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 441 442 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FUNC 1 2 PULS TDEL SOURce FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe TDELay lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the delay of the trailing edge of the pulse relative to start of pulse period This is an alternative method of programming pulse width amp This command is affected by the PULS HOLD 1 2 command which determines the value to be held constant as the period is adjusted the specified pulse width value or the specified pulse duty cycle value or specifies the trailing delay See the PULS HOLD 1 2 command for further information FUNC2 PULS TDEL 50 8NS Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FUNC 1 2 PULS TRAN SOURCE FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe TRANsSition Leading lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the edge time in seconds for the leading edges The edge time represents the time from the 10 threshold to the 90 thr
83. cycles of a sine waveform When you set the function generator s frequency to 24 MHz the actual output frequency will be 240 MHz and the amplitude will be attenuated by approximately 11 dB As you increase the frequency above 24 MHz more attenuation will occur At approximately 60 MHz waveform distortion due to aliasing will become evident Some aliasing will be present in most arbitrary waveforms but whether or not it will be troublesome depends on your specific application When creating arbitrary waveforms the function generator will always attempt to replicate the finite length time record to produce a periodic version of the data in waveform memory However as shown below it is possible that the shape and phase of a signal may be such that a discontinuity is introduced at the end point When the wave shape is repeated for all time this end point discontinuity will introduce leakage errors in the frequency domain because many spectral terms are required to describe the discontinuity Leakage error is caused when the waveform record does not include an integral number of cycles of the fundamental frequency Power from the fundamental frequency and its harmonics is transferred to the spectral components of the rectangular sampling function You can reduce leakage errors by adjusting the window length to include an integer number of cycles or by including more cycles within the window to reduce the residual end point discontinuity size
84. data size order for binary block data transfer ends on computer and GPIB card used most significant bit MSB sent first least significant bit LSB sent first FORMat BORDer NORMal n Str for the viPrintf function to send block data hould look like this VOLATILE 16000hb n oO Remote Programming Reference sprintf cmd str s dhbWn DATA DAC VOLATIL E long data size A comma separated list of values use this format Setup cmd str for the viPrintf function to send integer list data sprintf cmd str s dhd n DATA DAC VOLATILE long data size Set timeout to infinite errorStatus viSetAttribute vi VI ATTR TMO VALU VI TMO INFINITE LH Write the data to the instrument errorStatus viPrintf vi cmd str waveform restore standard timeout errorStatus viSetAttribute vi VI ATTR TMO VALUE 2000 Close session viClose vi viClose viRm return 0 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 593 Visual Studio 2005 C Unmanaged Linear Sweep This program creates a linear sweep for a sine wave It sets the start and stop frequency and the sweep time Here the instrument s second channel parameters are changed and additional the error queue is read out Introduction include lt visa h gt stdafx h include int tmain i
85. determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the Front Panel External In For this example you will output a three cycle sine wave with a 20 ms burst period You will not change the other parameters from their default settings internal burst source and 0 degree starting phase t ee ee J Select the burst Bu mode Press ae to enable or disable burst mode Notice that a status message Burst is shown in the status line Set the burst count Press the Cycles softkey and then set the count to 3 using the numeric keypad or knob 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 75 76 Start Phase Set the period frequency Defines the start phase of the waveform that is bursted The start phase is only available for sinewave and arb waveforms Noise and DC do not have a period and thus no phase information Square ramp and pulse is generated in a way that does not allow the use of a start phase The Start Phase can vary between 360 to 360 of Cycles Start Phase Burst Continuous Continuous e Set the period frequency of the sinewave to 2 ms e Enable triggered mode e Select Internal trigger source e Set the internal frequency to 50 Hz or the internal period to 20 ms Front Panel Menu Operation View the waveform Press to view the waveform parameters To turn off the Graph Mode press again eo You can generate a single burst with the specified count by pressing
86. if you have set the phase deviation to 180 degrees using the PM DEV command then a 2 5V 5V signal level corresponds to a 180 degree phase deviation Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels produce a negative phase shift If you select the other channel as the modulation waveshape INT2 the SCPI command PM 1 2 INT FREQ doesn t apply PM SOUR EXT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PM 1 2 STAT SOURCE PM 1 2 STATe ON OFF Disable or enable PM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable PM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The PM 1 2 STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The instrument will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable PM and AM at the same time When you enable PM the previous modulation mode is turned off The instrument will not allow PM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable PM the sweep or burst mode is turned off PM STAT ON 405 406 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands Introduction In Pulse Width Modulation PWM the width of a pulse waveform is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform The width of the pulse can be expre
87. impedance of 50 ohms to the front panel output connector Press any of the waveform screens i e Pulse Sine Square Ramp Noise or Arb to adjust the output and load impedance Press the Load Impedance and Out Impedance softkeys to set the desired values Frequency Delay 10 00 ms Amplitude 1 000 Va width 10 00 ms Offset 0 000 V5 Lead Edge 2 5ns Load Imp Sns Outp Imp 50 Q Polarity Normal Continuous Continuous 59 0 Q Trail Edge Impedance Trail Edge 2 Front Panel Menu Operation Select the output cower uo ge E amplifier type and P eSS the key and then select the Output Setup softkey ranging Amplifier Type f Amplifier Range Automatic Range Channel Add Separate CI Voltage Limits Off High Limit 10 00 Y Continuous Continuous max Bandwidth Amplifier Channel Range Add Select Amplifier For Amplifier Type choose from max Amplitude or max Bandwidth Type and Range For Amplifier Range choose from Hold Auto or Auto Once Refer to the Amplifier Type Selection section for more information e The Amplifier Type selection is available for the 81150A only 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 63 64 2 24 Outputting a Modulated Waveform Introduction Select the function frequency and amplitude of the carrier Select AM A modulated waveform consists of a carrier and a modulating waveform In AM amplitude modulation the amplitude of the carrier is varied by the am
88. in the questionable status group It s a read only register and bits are not cleared when you read the register A query of the register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register STAT QUES COND Response 4 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference STAT QUES ENAB STATus QUEStionable ENABle Sets or queries the enable register in the questionable status group The selected bits are then reported to the Status Byte A CLS will not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register To enable bits in the enable register you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits you wish to enable in the register STAT QUES ENAB 32 STAT QUES ENAB H20 STAT QUES ENAB B100000 STAT QUES ENAB Response 32 487 488 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example STAT QUES NTR STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Sets or queries the negative transition register in the questionable status group A negative transition filter allows an event to be reported when a condition changes from true to false Setting both positive negative filters true allows an event to be reported anytime the condition chang
89. its own address Be sure to avoid using the computer s address for any instrument on the interface bus 2 31 2 USB Configuration Introduction The USB interface requires no front panel configuration parameters Just connect your Agilent 81150A 81160A to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 83 84 2 31 3 Introduction Select the 1 0 Interfaces menu Select the LAN menu LAN Configuration There are several parameters that you may need to set to establish network communication using the LAN interface Primarily you will need to establish an IP address You may need to contact your network administrator for help in establishing communication with the LAN interface Follow these steps to set the LAN address Utility Press Midi and then press the 1 0 Interfaces softkey Press the LAN softkey From this menu you can select IP Setup to set an IP address and related parameters DNS Setup to configure DNS The Current Config is always displayed on the LAN screen e LAN RESET does reset the LAN configuration back to DHCP Auto IP and enables the web server MAC Address 0003d3041083 Status LAN worl with Dynami IP Address 169 254 0 6 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Def Gateway 159 254 0 1 Host Name agilent 81150a Domain Name some domain com DNS Server 1 169 254 0 2 Continuous Continuous IP Setup DNS Setup FLAN RESET Establish an IP
90. less deviation amp e The 81160A offers a fix 2 5V input range The 81150A offers a selectable 2 5V or 5V input range Modulation In 1 10V 2 5 V 5 V OV 2 5 V 5 V 10V Mod Press eat and then press Modulation Type softkey to enable PM After enabling PM press the PM Source softkey and select from Internal Channel or External INTernal2 EXTernal PM 1 2 SOURce INTernal 1 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 207 208 3 10 Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation Introduction You can configure the 81150A 81160A to shift its output frequency between two preset values using FSK modulation The rate at which the output shifts between the two frequencies called the carrier frequency and the hop frequency is determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Modulation In connector or the signal being generated on the other channel 2 channel instrument only For more information on the fundamentals of FSK Modulation refer to the Tutorial chapter L e FSK is not available in pattern mode Continuous FSK Carrier Sinewave 1 MHz Hop Frequency 5 MHz FSK Rate 450 kHz max Modulation In min L 4 Trigger Out IM IA DII Strobe Out E AAAA Features and Functions 3 10 1 Selecting FSK Modulation Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A
91. must always be greater than or equal to the Characteristics frequency deviation If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than the carrier frequency with FM enabled the 81150A 81160A will automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency e The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz If you attempt to set the deviation to a value that is not valid the 81150A 81160A will automatically adjust it to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency Front Panel To set the carrier frequency press the Frequency softkey for the selected Operation function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 195 196 Remote Interface Operation 3 8 4 Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation FREQuency 1 2 lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command Modulating Waveform Shape The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel e Modulating waveform sh
92. name from the front panel the RCL command requires a numeric parameter The MEM STAT NAME 1 query returns a quoted string containing the name currently assigned to the specified storage location If you have not assigned a user defined name to the specified location the default name is returned STATE 1 or STATE 2 0r STATE 3 or STATE 4 The name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be letters numbers 0 9 or the underscore character Blank spaces are not allowed An error is generated if you specify a name with more than 12 characters An example is shown below MEM STATE NAME 1 TEST WFORM 1 If you do not specify a name note that the name parameter is optional the default name is assigned to that state This provides a way to clear a name however the stored state is not deleted The instrument will not prevent you from assigning the same name to different storage locations For example you can assign the same name to locations 1 and 2 Example Renames state 1 to TEST WFORMI MEM STAT NAME 1 TEST WFORMI LH nd Assigns the default name to state 1 STAT MEM STAT NAME Returns the name of state 0 here STATE 1 MEM STAT NAME 1 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 473 474 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Descriptio
93. other channel as the modulation waveshape INT2 the SCPI command FM 1 2 INT FREQ doesn t apply FM2 SOUR EXT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FM 1 I2 STAT SOURCE FM 1J2 STATe ON OFF Disable or enable FM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable FM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The FM 1 2 STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The instrument will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FM and AM at the same time When you enable FM the previous modulation mode is turned off The instrument will not allow FM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable FM the sweep or burst mode is turned off FM2 STAT ON 389 390 Frequency Shift Keying Modulation FSK Commands Introduction You can configure the instrument to shift its output frequency between two preset values using FSK modulation The rate at which the output shifts between the two frequencies called the carrier frequency and the hop frequency is determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Modulation In connector Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remo
94. outputs the idle frequency The idle frequency can be set to Start Frequency Stop Frequency or DC 0 Hz Trig Gated Press the EJ or key to enable either Triggered or Gated mode Sweep Then press the o key to reach the sweep screen Press the Idle Frequency softkey or use the navigation keys to select Idle frequency Press the Idle Frequency softkey again or use the rotary knob to select from Start Frequency Stop Frequency or 0 Hz DC SWEep 1 2 IDLE SFRequency EFRequency DC Features and Functions 3 12 5 Sweep Type Introduction You can sweep with either linear or logarithmic spacing The default is Linear For a linear sweep the 81150A 81160A varies the output frequency in a linear fashion during the sweep For a logarithmic sweep the 81150A 81160A varies the output frequency in a logarithmic fashion Front Panel Een After enabling press the Sweep Type softkey again to toggle Operation dan between the Linear or Logarithmic mode Remote Interface SWEep 1 2 SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Operation Continuous Linear Sweep Start Frequency 0 001MHz Stop Frequency 0 007 MHz Sweep Time 0 00145714285714286s max Modulation Signal internal Lm min Trigger Out M II IA Strobe Out 4 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 233 234 Continuous Exponential Sweep Start Frequency 0 001MHz Stop Frequency 0 007 MHz Sweep Time 0 00145
95. press the Front panel key for the desired trigger mode press the Source softkey or navigate to Source using the navigation keys e Then change the selection Front Panel Menu Operation 2 10 Selecting the Waveform Introduction The 81150A 81160A can output six standard waveforms including Pulse Sine Square Ramp Noise Arbitrary You can also select one of the seven built in arbitrary waveforms or create your own custom waveforms You can internally modulate any of the standard waveforms except pulse and noise and DC and also arbitrary waveforms using AM FM PM or FSK Pulse Waveform A pulse is defined by the following parameters Characteristics 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Amplitude Offset or High Level Low Level Period or Frequency not applicable for triggered pulses Width in seconds or Duty Cycle or Trailing delay in seconds Delay in seconds Delay as percentage of the period not applicable for triggered pulses Delay as phase in degree not applicable for triggered pulses Leading edge transition time in seconds Leading edge transition time in percent of width Trailing edge transition time in seconds Trailing edge transition time in percent of width Polarity Source Impedance Load Impedance 37 38 Pattern Characteristics Sine Wave Characteristics Square Wave Characteristics Patterns are defined by the following parameters Internal or external pattern source PRBS patterns and
96. range of duty cycle values at higher frequencies as shown below Duty cycle is limited by minimum width specification The high phase and the low phase of the square or pulse wave may not be less than Wmin The limits for the duty cycle are calculated from this restriction e DcycMin 100 Wmin period e DcycMax 100 1 Wmin period 81150A Where Wimin is either 4 1ns or 10ns depending on the selected amplifier See section Amplifier Type Selection 81160A Where Wmin is 1 5ns To set the output frequency press the Frequency softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency To set the waveform period instead press the Frequency softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey The following function is used to configure the output frequency remotely FREQuency 1 2 lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command Features and Functions 3 2 3 Output Amplitude Introduction The default amplitude is 1 Vpp into 50 ohms for all functions Offset Voltage The relationship between output amplitude and offset voltage is shown Limitations below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50 load or 10 volts for a high impedance load Vpp Vmax Vmin Or Vpp 2 Vmax Voffset Limits due to If you change the ou
97. reset the instrument to its factory default state press and then select the Set to Defaults softkey Press YES to confirm the operation The Set to Defaults functionality will program the instrument s default setting This is related to the electrical signals that are generated at the instruments output connectors The Set to Defaults does not affect system settings like GPIB address LAN configuration and Display brightness In short everything that has nothing to do with the BNC connectors There is another mechanism that will reset everything This is called SECURE ALL and can be found under Utility System Security SECURE ALL does a full format of every NON VOLATILE storage in the instrument e Set the instrument s default setting just like Set to Defaults e It erases all settings and waveforms that are stored on the instruments internal memory e It resets all system settings like LAN GPIB address SECURE ALL brings the instrument back to the delivery state and takes some time several minutes in doing this For a complete listing of the instrument s power on ans reset conditions see Factory Default Settings 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 89 90 Introduction What s inside this Chapter 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 3 Features and Functions This section makes it easy to look up all the details about a particular feature of the 81150A 81160A Whether you are operating the 81150A 81160
98. start points the interval from leading edge start stays unchanged in practice start points may shift with changes in transition time when transition times are varied This is more convenient for programming and the width display is easy to interpret 50 Specified idth Interval between leading edge medians of trigger output pulse and output pulse The specified and displayed value is that obtained with the fastest leading edge Pulse delay has two components a fixed delay from trigger output to output signal and a variable delay with respect to the trigger output Trigger Output I Qutput Signal Fixed Delay Variable Delay Appendix Inter channel Delay Interval between corresponding leading edge medians of the output signals Skew Transition Time Interval between the 10 and 90 amplitude points on the leading trailing edge 100 96 90 96 Amplitude Transition Time 10 96 Amplitude 0 Linearity Peak deviation of an edge from a straight line through the 10 and 90 amplitude points expressed as percentage of pulse amplitude 100 Amplitude 90 Amplitude Deviation 10 Amplitude f 0 Amplitude 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 661 662 Jitter Stability Pulse Levels Short term instability of one edge relative to a reference edge Usually specified as rms value which is one standard deviation or sigma If distrib
99. teta tanta tosta atis 317 44 81150A 81160A SCPI Instrument Command List Format sse 319 4 5 81150A 81160A SCPI Instrument Elements Name enne 320 451 APPLY Commands nnninnesenhen neon oensn ee han eo f nita 321 4 5 2 Arbitrary Waveform Commands ssec nentes 331 75 3 Burst Commands cmo meten nna nan an mtem etia 354 45 4 Level Commands sesenta teta ttt 363 45 5 Modulation Commands sse tette tete ttt tnnt 373 45 6 Channel Command nsncsssnisissssssnasinnosnonananninnininiiiiiiiia 416 45 7 Output Commands rnnt retenta teneret tenete tat 418 45 8 Output Function Commands sss netten 433 45 9 Reference Clock Commands sessi 467 45 10 Non Volatile Storage Commands sse 470 45 11 Status Reporting Commands 484 4 5 12 Sweep Commands sse terne titanic s as 490 45 13 System Related Commands eterne ntes 501 45 14 Display Commands teret ttt tnter ttai 522 45 15 Triggering Commands seen 526 4 5 16 Pattern Related Commands essent tette tette ntes 538 4 6 Common Command List essent E 575 4 7 Status Model c ccesccessssesssssssscssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssssssessssesssssssssssssseessssesssesssseesssseasseessssesssess 578 4 7 1 Status register structure sssssssssseseeeeeetn
100. that conflict with these terms the warranty terms in the separate agreement shall control Technology Licenses The hardware and or software described in this document are furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license Restricted Rights Legend If software is for use in the performance of a U S Government prime contract or subcontract Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer software as defined in DFAR 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause Use duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies standard commercial license terms and non DOD Departments and Agencies of the U S Government will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 June 1987 U S Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 or DFAR 252 227 7015 b 2 November 1995 as applicable in any technical data Safety Notices CAUTION A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to the product or loss of important data Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until
101. the Man Paesi key For more information see Triggering a Sweep or Burst You can also use an external gate signal to either turn the burst signal on or off based on the external signal applied to the Front panel External In connector For more information see Burst Mode 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 71 2 29 Triggering a Sweep or Burst Introduction Internal or automatic triggering Gated Sweep or Burst Triggered Sweep or Burst 78 There are 3 different trigger gate sources e External this is default e Internal this is the programmable timebase e Manual this is the key on the front panel or the TRG command on the remote interface You can issue triggers from the front panel for sweeps and bursts using a manual trigger or an internal trigger Internal or automatic triggering is enabled with the default settings of the 81150A 81160A In this mode the 81150A 81160A outputs continuously when the sweep or burst mode is selected When using the automatic triggering the Cont key is illuminated on the Front Panel Bursts or sweeps are enabled by Gated by an active level at the selected arming source e External Input External Signal gated while high or low or both e Man key on Front Panel gated while pressed or released or both A burst or a sweep is triggered by an active edge at the selected arming source e Internal select the triggering period e External Input External Signal
102. the desired waveform and press select Confirm your choice by pressing Yes The 81150A 81160A has a graphical browser to select the waveform to be used This waveform can either be a predefined one or a user defined one from VOLATILE memory or a stored waveform from NON VOLATILE memory It is also possible to import a waveform from a USB stick into VOLATILE memory Front Panel Menu Operation Frequency WU 1 Delay 10 00 ms Amplitude 1 000 Wp Offset 0 000 y Load Imp 50 0 Q Outp Imp 90 Q Arb Wim XP RISE Polarity Normal Continuous Continuous 7 000000 Hz VF Internal Memory 1638 Built In gt a lt Built In gt I E GAUSSIAN lt Built In gt Bi EXP_RISE lt Built In gt a Continuous Continuous e For information on creating a custom arbitrary waveform refer to Creating and Storing an Arbitrary Waveform 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 61 62 223 Selecting the Output Termination Introduction Press any waveform screen Navigate the menu to set the output termination The Agilent 81150A has a selectable series output impedance of either 50 ohms or 5 ohms to the front panel output connector If the actual load impedance is different than the value specified the displayed amplitude and offset levels will be incorrect The load impedance setting is simply provided as a convenience to ensure that the displayed voltage matches the expected load The Agilent 81160A has a fixed series output
103. the number of waveform points depends on the number of levels Remote Programming Reference O G NLEV 3 IG TRAN 1 1 1 1 1 0 5 1 1 1 1 1 0 5 0 5 2150 5 1 0 5 0 5 Example O 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 557 558 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG TRAN DAC DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern TRANsition DAC lt block data gt This command is similar to DIG TRAN see previous section except that the values are sent as a binary block and consist of 16 bit integer values between 8191 minimum DAC value and 8191 maximum DAC value Refer to DIG TRAN for a detailed explanation LEV 2 DIG TRAN DAC 3512 lt 512 bytes of binary data Q zi Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DIG TRAN INT DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern TRANsition INTerpolate ON OFF 0 1 Use this command to turn interpolation of the bitshape waveform on or off When turned off the output is series of steps from DAC value to DAC value When turned on the output signal is interpolated linearly between adjacent DAC values Interpolation OFF Interpolation ON DIG TRAN INT ON 559 560 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG TRAN SEL
104. the pattern mode screen press the Ext Input Setup softkey Operation e Press the Number of Levels softkey e Enter the number of levels using the numerical keypad or turn the rotary knob to select the desired number of levels Remote Interface DIGital 1 2 NLEVels lt number Operation of levels MINimum MAXimum 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 157 Lower Threshold Voltage Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 158 The lower threshold voltage defines the voltage level at which a sample is considered being a logical 0 If the voltage at MOD IN is less or equal to the lower threshold voltage then the external provided bit is considered being 0 This is true for 2 level and 3 level signals In case of 2 level signals a voltage level above the lower threshold is considered being a logical 1 User defined Bitshape i Sampling Points 1 Frequency Input Signal Lower Threshold i 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Derived Logical Levels Leading Edge on Pulse Screen wz b bib pee ete Ouput j Signal Low Level Output Signal Example only e On the pattern mode screen press the Ext Input Setup softkey e Press the Number of Levels softkey e Enter the number of levels using the numerical keypad or turn the rotary knob to select the desired number of levels DIGital 1 2 SOURce EXTernal THReshold lt volts gt MINimum MAXimum
105. the trigger mode related functional blocks for one channel 627 External In Man Key SCPI External In Threshold Arming Arming Source Sense Polarity Internal Trigger Period Generator Selection Arming Signal 3 eneratne A enerato L Trigger Mode Waveform C Output Generation Trigger Out Advanced Modes Logic Strobe Out 628 gt Burst Generator gt Internal Trigger Period Modulation Signal DDS Cother Channel Modulation In Modulation Advanced Mode Source Selection Trigger Modes Trigger events can be generated on the rising or falling edge of the selected arming signal The active state of the gating signal can be set to high or low level amp The selection of the trigger edge and gate level is done using the arming sense ARM 1 2 SI mode also changes the selection in burst mode ENS so that changing this setting in triggered Tutorial 7 7 External In to Trigger Out Timing Introduction The Agilent 81150A 81160A has a constant timing between the signal provided at the External In connector and the response at the Trigger Out connector This latency is independent to the output frequency being generated but depends on the overall mode of operation the latency is bigger for triggered or gated frequency sweeps To achieve this constant l
106. to a frequency not in this range the 81150A 81160A will automatically set the marker frequency equal to the start frequency or stop frequency whichever is closer Sweep After enabling sions press the Frequency Marker softkey Press the Frequency Marker softkey again to enable disable the Frequency Marker Alternatively you can also use the rotary knob to switch it On and Off Press the Marker Frequency softkey or use the navigation keys to select the Marker Frequency Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired value Use the following command to set the Marker Frequency MARKer 1 2 FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Use the following command to turn the Frequency Marker on and off MARKer 1 2 STATe OFF ON Features and Functions 3 12 8 Triggered Gated Sweep Introduction In the triggered mode the 81150A 81160A outputs a single sweep when a trigger signal is received After one sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency the 81150A 81160A waits for the next trigger while outputting the idle frequency In gated Sweep mode the 81150A 81160A outputs sweep as long as the gate signal is active If the gate signal changes to inactive the sweep will be finished While waiting for an active gate signal the 81150A 81160A will output the idle frequency Characteristics e Available sources for Trigger are Internal External and Manual e Available sources for Gated are Ex
107. to the square function the previous duty cycle is used e n square mode the leading and trailing edge are both at the minimum setting fastest possible transition time 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 117 118 Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation The duty cycle setting does not apply to a square waveform used as the modulating waveform for AM FM PM or PWM A 50 duty cycle is always used for a modulating square waveform The duty cycle setting applies only to a square waveform carrier After selecting the square wave function press the Duty Cycle softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired duty cycle The following function is used to configure the duty cycle remotely FUNCtion 1 2 SQUare DCYCl percentage MINimum MAXimum The APPLy command automatically sets the duty cycle to 5096 3 2 13 Introduction Symmetry Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Symmetry Ramp Waves Applies to ramp waves only Features and Functions Symmetry represents the amount of time per cycle that the ramp wave is rising assuming that the waveform is not inverted 0 Symmetry 100 Symmetry e The symmetry is stored in volatile memory the symmetry is set to 100 the default when power has been off or after a remote interface reset assuming the Power On state is set to default e The sy
108. triggered by rising or falling or both edges e Man key on Front Panel triggered by press or release or both Front Panel Menu Operation 2 30 Storing the Instrument State Introduction You can store the instrument state in one of four non volatile storage locations A fifth storage location automatically holds the power down configuration of the instrument When power is restored the instrument can automatically return to its state before power down Select the desired Store Recall storage location Press and then select the Store State softkey State 1 unused State 2 STATE_2 unused State 3 STATE_3 unused State 4 STATE_4 unused Continuous Continuous 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 79 Select a custom name for the selected location Store the instrument state If desired you can assign a custom name to each of the four locations State 1 unused State 2 STATE _2 unused State 3 STATE_3 unused State 4 STATE_4 unused The name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character and To add additional characters keep pressing the right cursor key unless it reaches the place where you want to insert a character Then turn the knob to obtain the desired character all characters to the right of the cursor position press n To use numbers and in the name you can enter
109. used to load a waveform from a file into VOLATILE memory MMI 4 EM LOAD DATA VOLAT IE SIGNAL WEM 479 480 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example MMI MMI EM LOAD DATA 1 2 MOD EM LOAD DATA 1 2 MODulation VOLATILE file name gt It is used to load a waveform from a file into VOLATILE memory MMI EM LOAD DATA MOD VOLATILE ENV ELOP E WEM Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide MMEM STOR STAT Remote Programming Reference MMEM STORe STATe 1 2 3 4 file name Use this command to store a complete instrument setting state from non volatile memory 1 2 3 4 location to file lt file name gt in the current selected directory on the USB memory stick Store storage location 1 to file FREQ SWEEP MMEM STOR STAT 1 FREQ SWEEP Save current state to storage location 1 SAV 1 MMEM STOR STAT 4 T EST 0012 481 482 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example MMI MMI EM STOR DATA 1 2 EM STORe DATA 1 J2 VOLATILE file name It is used to store a waveform to a file from VOLATILE memory MM EM STOR DATA VOLAT
110. waveform to an USB mass memory connected with the instrument The USB connector is located at the front panel To address the USB mass memory the Mass MEMory command subsystem can be used Remote Programming Reference Command MEM NST 2 EMory NSTates Long Parameters m Parameter Suffix Description Query the total number of memory locations available for state storage Always returns 4 Example MEM NST Response 4 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 471 472 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example a EM STAT DEL z EMory STATe D 1121314 ELete Delete the contents of the specified storage location If you have assigned a user defined name to a location MEM STAT NAME command this command also removes the name that you assigned and restores the default name STATE 1 STATE 2 etc amp You cannot recall the instrument state from a storage location that is empty An error is gene lt 1 E WwW EM STAT DI rated if you attempt to recall a deleted state Remote Programming Reference Command MEM STAT NAME Long MEMory STATe NAME Parameters 1 2 3 4 name Parameter Suffix E Description Assign a custom name to the specified storage location You can name a location from the front panel or over the remote interface but you can only recall a state by
111. when storing to recalling from USB memory devices Power ON Continuous Continuous Last Setting MORE 2 of 2 Done Features and Functions Press e Press the Export State Import State softkey to store to recall from Export Import USB memory devices softkey e Choose from DELETE STORE RECALL and press the corresponding softkey Press the File Name softkey to define set file name This name will be used for storing the instrument state using the STORE softkey 4 2 2007 11 23 22 AM Continuous Continuous File DELETE Name eo The waveform editor is also able to store to a USB memory device In this case you need to select Store in NON VOL and on the waveform browser you have to press the leftmost softkey Memory Int USB This softkey toggles between the internal waveform storage locations and the content of the USB memory device The same key is to be used when selecting a waveform that is stored on an USB memory device 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 263 264 3 15 3 Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Error Conditions A record of up to 30 command syntax or hardware errors can be stored in the 81150A 81160A s error queue e Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored Errors are cleared as you read them The 81150A 81160A beeps once each time an error is generated unless you have disable
112. 0 ohms If you query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated DATA ATTR PTP EXP RISE Response 1 0000E 00 337 338 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DATA 1 2 CAT DATA 1 2 CATalog List the names of all waveforms currently available for selection Returns the names of the seven built in waveforms non volatile memory VOLATILE if a waveform is currently downloaded to volatile memory and all user defined waveforms downloaded to non volatile memory Use the DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the user defined waveforms in non volatile memory DATA CAT Response CARDIAC EXP_FALL EXP_RISE GAUSSIAN HAVERS NEY SINC UOLATTLE TESTI Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DATA 1 2 COPY DATA 1 2 COPY destination arb name gt VOLATILE Copy the waveform from volatile memory to the specified name in non volatile memory The source for the copy is always VOLATILE You cannot copy from any other source and you cannot copy to VOLATILE The arb name may contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining cha
113. 0A and 81160A User s Guide For sine waveforms signal imperfections are easiest to describe and observe in the frequency domain using a spectrum analyzer Any component of the output signal which has a different frequency than the fundamental or carrier is considered to be spurious The signal imperfections can be categorized as harmonic non harmonic or phase noise and are specified in decibels relative to the carrier level or dBc Harmonic components always appear at multiples of the fundamental frequency and are created by non linearties in the waveform DAC and other elements of the signal path At low amplitudes another possible source of harmonic distortion is due to the current flowing through the cable connected to the function generator s Strobe output connector This current can cause a small square wave voltage drop across the resistance of the cable s shield and some of this voltage can be imposed on the main signal If this is a concern for your application you should remove the cable If your application requires that you use the Strobe output connector you can minimize the effect by terminating the cable in a high impedance load rather than into a 50Q load 631 632 Non Harmonic Imperfections Phase Noise Quantization Errors The biggest source of non harmonic spurious components called spurs is the waveform DAC Nonlinearity in the DAC leads to harmonics that are aliased or folded back into
114. 1 2 INT FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRI NOIS or USER e Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle e Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry e Select TRI for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry e Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform with 0 symmetry If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 16K 16384 points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation PWM INT FUNC NOIS 413 414 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PWM 1 2 SOUR SOURCE PWM 1 2 SOURce INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal Select the source of the modulating signal The instrument will accept an INTernal or EXTernal modulation source The default is INT 1 The PWM 1 2 SOUR query returns INT or INT2 or EXT INT 1 selects an internal modulation signal and INT2 selects the other channel of the instrument if available If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The pulse width or pulse duty cycle deviation is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the pulse width deviation to 50 us using the PWM DEV command then a 2 5V 5V signal level correspo
115. 1160A User s Guide Noise without Memory Address Compression 623 The crest factor of the user defined distribution is _ Sample Sample min 1 N I 5 225 Sample i 0 of Where N is either 16384 or 524288 for 81150A 7 5 1 Limitations of User defined Noise Distributions Introduction Due to bandwidth limitations of the output amplifier the measured histogram does not perfectly match the defined distribution The difference between the calculated crest factor of the user defined distribution and the measured histogram depends on the amplifier path being used and on the distribution itself Example of user The following example shows a user defined distribution that is defined by a defined distribution ramp waveform This should lead to an equal distribution of all voltage levels defined by Ramp in the output signal Due to the bandwidth limitations and asynchronous waveform sampling of the oscilloscope the measured histogram is not rectangular as expected DI deber Tutorial Example of user The example below shows the measured histogram of a user defined noise defined noise distribution containing only 2 different values square wave with 5096 duty distribution cycle Since the output signal cannot jump between the programmed high and low level it is sampled on voltage levels in between while it is on the transition between the high and low level This leads to a measured histogram that
116. 1160A for remote interface communication For information on the SCPI commands available to program the 81150A 81160A over the remote interface refer to chapter 4 The Agilent 81150A 81160A supports remote interface communication using a choice of three interfaces GPIB USB and LAN explained below All three interfaces are live at power up The instructions that follow explain how to configure your remote interface from the instrument front panel The CD ROM provided with your instrument contains connectivity software to enable communications over these interfaces Refer to the instructions provided on the CD ROM to install this software on your PC GPIB Configuration Each device on the GPIB interface must have a unique address The address is stored in the non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Follow these steps to set the GPIB address Utility Press hd and then press the 1 0 Interfaces softkey Front Panel Menu Operation Select the GPIB Use the knob and cursor keys or the numeric keypad to select a GPIB address address in the range 0 through 31 the factory default is 10 The GPIB address is shown on the front panel display at power on GPIB USB usb0 2391 16648 DE1234567 INSTR Continuous Continuous 19 GPIB Address Exit the menu Press the Enter softkey to enter the GPIB address and exit e Your computer s GPIB interface card has
117. 150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel Characteristics e Modulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine e Square has 50 duty cycle Pu e Ramp has 100 symmetry e Triangle has 50 symmetry e Negative ramp has 0 symmetry P e f you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 16K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation Front Panel After enabling PWM press the press More key Then press the PM Shape Operation softkey and select the desired shape Remote Interface PWM 1 2 INTernal FUNCtion 1 SINusoid SQUare RAMP Operation NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 219 220 3 11 5 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Modulating Waveform Frequenc y The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel Modulating frequency internal s 81150A 1mHz to 10 MHz 81160A
118. 160A can execute commands from the remote interface you may want to turn off the front panel display From the remote interface you can also display a 12 character message on the front panel Utili The display can be disabled from the front panel Press E then System and then the Display Off softkey Pressing any key or turning the Rotary Knob will turn the display on When disabled the front panel display is blanked Sending a message to the front panel display from the remote interface overrides the display state This means that you can display a message even if the display is currently disabled The display is automatically enabled when power is cycled You can display a text message on the front panel by sending a command from the remote interface You can use upper or lower case letters A Z numbers 0 9 and any other character on a standard computer keyboard Depending on the number of characters that you specify the 81150A 81160A will choose one of two font sizes to display the message You can display approximately 12 characters in a large font and approximately 40 characters in a small font When the display is blanked then all the LEDs at the front panel keys are also turned off except the power key Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions The following command turns off the front panel display DISP OFF The following command displays a message on the front p
119. 160A User s Guide In contrast to NRZ mode there is no fix association between the logical bit value e g 0 and 1 for 2 level patterns and the voltage level at the output in arbitrary bit shape mode Instead of the simple logical bit value to output voltage mapping an arbitrary waveform is being used to define the transition from one voltage level to the next one For a 2 level pattern there are 4 different transitions 0 gt 0 0 1 1 0 and 1 1 for 3 level patterns there are 9 possible transitions and for 4 level patterns there are 16 transitions that need to be defined Each type of transition is selecting the shape of the following bit The bit shape is defined as an arbitrary waveform with up to 64 points The bit shape editor is separating the several bit shapes by vertical lines The possible bit shapes are ordered in a way that all bits that are coming from the same logical bit value e g 1 are kept together and inside that group the logical bit value or level index of the target bit is increasing e g 0 1 for 3 level patterns 617 618 Number of Levels 2 Level Index O N c AN C Cil A O l2 c CO 239 C 13 14 15 Current Symbol 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 eeee Next Symbol 0 1 0 1 1 S Noe Tutorial Transition Time In arbitrary bit shape mode leading and trailing edge are not available as adjustable parameters since they are a part
120. 198 Peak Frequency Deviation The peak frequency deviation represents the variation in frequency of the modulating waveform from the carrier frequency Peak frequency deviation Range 81150A 1uHz to 120 MHz 81160A 1 uHz to 250 MHz The default is 100 Hz e The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the deviation If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than the carrier frequency with FM enabled the 81150A 81160A will limit the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency e The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz If you attempt to set the deviation to a value that is not valid the 81150A 81160A will limit it to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency After enabling FM press the Frequency Deviation softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation FM 1 2 DEViation lt peak deviation in Hz gt MINimum MAXimum Features and Functions 3 8 7 Modulating Source Introduction Modulating Source Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel
121. 2 ON command Example OUTP2 ON 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 419 420 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example OUTP 1 2 COMP OUTPut 1 2 COMPlement STATe 0 1 OFF ON Disable or enable the corresponding front panel Output complement connector The default is OFF See OUTPut 1 2 STATe for more information OUTP2 COMP ON Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide OUTP 1 2 IMP OUTPut 1 2 MPedanc 3 Remote Programming Reference INTernal lt NR3 gt MAXimum MINimum OHM It s used to program the source impedance of the output connector e There are only two settings available If you try to program any other value it will be rounded to one of the specified values either 50Q or 5 OUTP2 IMP MAX 421 422 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example OUTP 1 OUTP 1 2 IMP EXT 2 LOAD OUTPut OUTPut 1 2 IMPedance EXTernal 2 LOAD lt NR3 gt MAXimum MINimum OHM These two SCPI commands address the same instrument parameter To be compatible with other instrument from Agilent both commands were implemented Select the desired output termination i e the impedance of the load attached to the output of the instrument The specified value
122. 3 210 Digital Channel Addition ssssssssssssennenntetete tete 115 32 1 Voltage EImits secretos tette orci tai ebat a Patani te trend 116 3 2 12 Duty Cycle Square Waves tentent tentes 117 3 2 13 Symmetry Ramp Waves sss tette tnnt tatnen 119 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 3 3 34 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 414 Qutp lt Control eth ert ttt rt ettet ferit ites 120 3 2 15 Parameter Coupling sse tenete 121 3 22 16 Polart ssri ene mee tret mii tinae ntt ite dut 125 3 2417 Strobe Output uon usps tm D RE ie i 126 3 218 Trigger Output tentent tenerent tenete 127 3 2 9 Sync Outputs iiie ene ED eb op E prb iie nn 128 Input Configuration ccccccsecsessesessessessessessesecsessessessessesecsessessesaesaesussesseeaesaesaseessessesateateneens 130 3 3 1 External In Parameters ccccccsssssssssssscsssscsssscssssssesscssssssessssesssssssssesssssessssessssesseees 131 3 3 2 Modulation In Parameters sse tentent tnnt 135 3 4 9 Referenc Clocks ettet erp e ipt habt bert pats 140 Pulse Wawveloris a2o aio fronte oe eire dom nd ren prede men re OA 142 3 4 1 Pulse Period tentent nennen n nn 143 34 2 UC RU o TERM 144 3 43 Leading Edge Trailing Edge cccsscsessessessssessessessessessesessessessteseeasesenseneaeenteaeeess 146 Pattern Capablliti s 5 hee een nente anaean hona eon te ane e n n s 149 3 594 PattermMOGB sarea fodere RE E
123. 60A 1 mHz to 50 MHz The default is 10 Hz The FSK rate is ignored when the external FSK source or other channel source is selected Front Panel To set the FSK rate do the following Operation Mod e Press laedi and then press the Modulation Type softkey to select FSK e Press the FSK Rate softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Remote Interface FSKey 1 2 INTernal RATE lt rate in Hz MINimum MAXimum Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 213 214 3 10 6 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation FSKey 1 2 SOURce INTernal 1 EXTernal FSK Source FSK source can be Internal External or other channel The default is Internal When the Internal source is selected the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and hop frequency is determined by the FSK rate specified When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the Modulation In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output The maximum external FSK rate is 10 MHz When other channel is selected then a DAC value below 0 will output the carrier frequency a DAC value gt 0 will output the hop frequency After enabling FSK press the FSK Source softkey and select from Internal Channel o
124. 714285714286s max Modulation Signal internal d c min 4 Trigger Out HI IM MI Strobe Out B AWA Features and Functions 3 12 6 Sweep Time Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The sweep time specifies the number of seconds required to sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency The number of discrete frequency points in the sweep is automatically calculated by the 81150A 81160A and is based on the sweep time you select Sweep time 81150A 100 us to 500 seconds 81160A 50 us to 500 seconds The default is 1 second Sweep After enabling xoa press the Sweep Time softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired sweep time SWEep 1 2 TIME lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 235 3 12 7 Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 236 Marker Frequency If desired you can set the frequency at which the signal on the front panel Strobe Out connector goes to a logic low during the sweep The Strobe Out signal always goes from low to high at the beginning of the sweep e Marker frequency 81150A 1 uHz to 240 MHz 81160A 1 uHz to 500 MHz The default is 500 Hz e When the sweep mode is enabled the marker frequency must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency If you attempt to set the marker frequency
125. 81150A only The 81160A has one type of amplifier See the data sheet for the output amplifier specifications of the 81160A There are two different amplifiers available for each channel inside the 81150A One amplifier is optimized for high bandwidth but provides a smaller output voltage window The second one is optimized for high output voltage but has a lower bandwidth Max Bandwidth Max Amplitude Max Frequency 240 MHz 50 MHz Max Amplitude 5 Vpp if frequency 10 Vpp 50Q into 50 is x 120 MHz 3 Vpp if frequency is gt 120 MHz Voltage Window 5 V 10 V 50Q into 50Q Min Transition Time 2 5 ns 7 5 ns Min Width 4 1 ns 10 ns The amplifier selection applies additional limitations to available voltage range frequency transition time and width duty cycle Utility Press the M key and then select the Output Setup softkey Press the Amplifier Type and use the knob or the softkey to set the desired value OUTPut 1 2 ROUTe HIVoltage HIBandwith Features and Functions 3 2 10 Digital Channel Addition Introduction If the instrument is equipped with 2 output modules channel 2 can be added to channel 1 internally The maximum output voltage remains unchanged In this case the second channel outputs the unchanged waveform of channel two The resulting voltages at the output of channel 1 are High Level High Level 1 High Level 2 Low Level Low Level 1 Low L
126. A 81160A for Use Check the List of supplied items Connect the Power Cord and turn on the 81150A 81160A If the 81150A 81160A does not turn on 30 Before preparing the 81150A 81160A for use check the list of supplied items given below One Power Cord USB Cable Product CD This User s Guide if ordered in printed version Getting Started Guide if ordered in printed version Certificate of Calibration Agilent Automation Ready CD The instrument runs a short power on self test which takes about 45 50 seconds The 81150A 81160A powers up in the sine wave function at 1 MHz with an amplitude of 1 Vpp into a 50Q termination or the power down setting At power on the Output connector is disabled To enable the Output connector press the output key Steps Verify that the power cord is firmly connected to the power receptacle on the rear panel the power line voltage is automatically sensed at power on You should also make sure that the 81150A 81160A is connected to a power source that is energized Then verify that the 81150A 81160A is turned on If the power on tests fail the instrument automatically switches to the diagnostics screen and displays the power on messages Front Panel Menu Operation 2 7 Using the Built in Help System Introduction To view the help information for a function key To view the list of topics To view the help information for displayed messages 81150
127. A Pulse period limits 8 33 ns to 1000000 s Characteristics 81160A Pulse period limits 3 03 ns to 1000000 s e Pulse frequency limits 1 Hz to 120 MHz for 81150A 1 Hz to 330 MHz for 81160A e The default value is 1 uis 1MHz e The specified period must be greater than the sum of the pulse width and the edge time as shown below Period gt Pulse Width 1 6x Edge Time Front Panel After selecting the pulse function press the Frequency softkey again to Operation toggle to the Period softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse period Remote Interface The following function is used to configure the Pulse Period remotely Operation PULSe PERiod 1 2 lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum PULSe FREQuency 1 2 lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 143 3 4 2 Introduction Pulse Width Characteristics Front Panel Operation Width in Seconds Duty Cycle 144 Pulse Width Pulse Width refers to the start of leading edge to start of trailing edge In this format the pulse width is independent of changes in pulse period and delay The Pulse Width can be specified as e Width in seconds e Duty Cycle percentage of period e Trail Delay e Pulse width Wmin to 950000s see restrictions below The default pulse width is 50ns e The Pulse width is limited by the minimum possible width of Wmin e Pulse Width gt Wmin e Pulse Width x Period
128. A and 81160A User s Guide The built in help system is designed to provide context sensitive assistance on any front panel key or menu softkey A list of help topics is also available to assist you with several front panel operations Steps Steps Press and hold down the key If the message contains more information than will fit on the display press the up down keys or turn the knob to view the remaining information Press the Help key to exit Help Press the Help key to view the list of available help topics To scroll through the list press the up down arrow keys or rotate the knob Select any topic using the Previous Link and Next Link keys and press Follow link to obtain details on the selected topic Press the Help key to exit Help Whenever a limit is exceeded or any other invalid configuration is found the 81150A 81160A will display a message For example if you enter a value that exceeds the frequency limit for the selected function a message will be displayed The built in help system shows all active messages Steps Press the Help key Upon doing this you will see an error or warning is active red or yellow text scrolling on the display and a red E or orange W indicator blinking in the input line The instrument will automatically switch to the error or warning screen Press the Help key to exit Help 31 32 28 Selecting the Mode of Operation Introduction Coupling between Ch1 amp Ch2 The Mo
129. A from the front panel or over the remote interface this chapter will be useful This section contains the following sections VNN Trigger Mode Output Configuration Input Configuration Pulse Waveforms Pattern Capabilities Noise Amplitude Modulation AM Frequency Modulation FM Phase Modulation PM Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation Pulse Width Modulation PWM Frequency Sweep Burst Mode Arbitrary Waveforms Creating and Storing an Arbitrary Waveform Managing Stored Waveforms Additional Information on Arbitrary Waveforms System Related Operations Remote Interface Configuration Software Update Installing Licenses Diagnostics Calibration Overview Security Factory Default Settings 91 92 Conventions used for SCPI command syntax Some knowledge of the front panel menus will be helpful before you read this section If you have not already read chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation starting on page 13 you may want to read it now Chapter 4 Remote Programming Reference starting on page 299 lists the syntax for the SCPI commands available to program the 81150A 81160A Throughout this manual the following conventions are used for SCPI command syntax for remote interface programming e Square brackets indicate optional keywords or parameters e Braces enclose parameters within a command string e Triangle brackets lt gt enclose parameters for which you must substit
130. Agilent Pulse Function Arbitrary Noise Generator 81150A and 81160A User s Guide EE Agilent Technologies Notices Agilent Technologies Inc 2011 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies Inc as governed by United States and international copyright laws Manual Part Number 81160 91020 Edition First edition March 2011 Printed in Germany Agilent Technologies Deutschland GmbH Herrenberger Str 130 71034 B blingen Germany For Assistance and Support http www agilent com find assist Warranty The material contained in this document is provided as is and is subject to being changed without notice in future editions Further to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law Agilent disclaims all warranties either express or implied with regard to this manual and any information contained herein including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing use or performance of this document or of any information contained herein Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document
131. CPI command RST e The state storage feature remembers the selected function including the name of the arbitrary waveforms frequency amplitude dc offset duty cycle symmetry as well as any modulation parameters in use e When shipped from the factory storage locations 1 through 4 are empty location 0 contains the default state e When power is turned off the 81150A 81160A automatically stores its state in a non volatile memory battery backed up You can configure the 81150A 81160A to automatically recall the power down state or the default state when power is restored When shipped from the factory the 81150A 81160A is configured to automatically recall the power down state at power on However when recalling the power down state the outputs will always be forced to the off state e You can assign a custom name from 1 to 4 to storage locations however you cannot name location 0 You can name a location from the front panel or over the remote interface but you can only recall a state by name from the front panel From the remote interface you can only recall a stored state using a number 0 through 4 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 259 260 Characteristics Front Panel Operation e The name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be letters numbers 0 9 or the underscore character Blank spaces are not allowed An error
132. DC Offset The dc offset is summed with the ac signal in the output amplifier This allows relatively small ac signals to be offset by relatively large dc voltages For example you can offset a 100 mVpp signal by almost 5 Vdc into a 50Q load 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 633 634 81150A only The output of the high bandwidth amplifier may optionally be amplified by the low bandwidth amplifier to achieve higher output voltages amplifier gain of 2 81150A only When enabling the low bandwidth path the available output voltage range doubles But the maximum output frequency as well as the other pulse parameters like transition times and width are limited to 50 MHz When changing ranges the 81150A and the 81160A switches attenuators such that the output voltage never exceeds the current amplitude setting However momentary disruptions or glitches caused by switching can cause problems in some applications For this reason the 81150A and the 81160A incorporates a range hold feature to freeze the attenuator and amplifier switches in their current states However the amplitude and offset accuracy and resolution as well as waveform fidelity may be adversely affected when reducing the amplitude below the expected range change 81150A As shown below the 81150A has a selectable series output impedance of 50 Q or 5 Q forming a voltage divider with the load resistance 81160A The 81160A has a series output impedance of 50 Q fix
133. INTernal the instrument will use it s built in 10MHz reference When set to EXTernal it will use the signal provided at the 10MHz Ref In connector The selection will be overridden by the automatic reference clock detection if this is enabled When ROSC SOUR AUTO is set to ON then the query will report the currently used reference clock source ROSC SOUR EXT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference ROSC SOUR AUTO SOURce ROSCillator SOURce AUTO ON OFF 0 1 Enable disable the automatic reference clock selection When set to ON the instrument will switch to external clock reference as soon as it detects a signal at the 10MHz Ref In connector There is no check for validity of the signal at Ref In As a result of this the instruments PLL may loose lock state if an invalid reference clock signal is applied to Ref In ROSC SOUR AUTO ON 469 470 4 5 10 Introduction Non Volatile Storage Commands The instrument has five storage locations in non volatile memory to store instrument states The locations are numbered 1 through 4 The instrument automatically uses location 0 to hold the state of the instrument at power down You can also assign a user defined name to each of the locations 1 through 4 for use from the front panel Additional it is possible to store an instrument state and arbitrary
134. INimum MAXimum 461 HOLD TIME WRATio 462 TRAiling NR3 MINimum MAXimum 463 AUTO 2 OFF ON ONCE 464 UNIT S SEC PCT 465 WIDTh NR3 MINimum MAXimum 466 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 311 Reference Clock Commands Command ROSCillator SOURCe AUTO Parameter INTernal EXTernal ON OFF 0 1 Non Volatile Storage Commands Command MEMory NSTates STATE DELete MMEMory COPY DELete LOAD STATe DATA 1 2 MODulation STORe STATe DATA 1 2 MODulation 312 Parameter 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 lt name gt OFF ON 1 2 3 4 file name copy name file name 1 2 3 4 file name VOLATILE VOLATILE lt file name gt lt file name gt 1 2 3 4 file name gt VOLATILE VOLATILE lt file name gt lt file name gt See Page 468 469 See Page 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 Status Reporting Commands Command STATus PRESet QUEStionable CONDition ENABle EVENt Parameter lt NR1 gt NTRansition lt NR1 gt PTRansition lt NR1 gt Sweep Commands Command FREQuency 1 2 CENTer SPAN STARCt STOP MARKer 1 2 FREQuency SWEep 1 2 DLE SPACing STATe
135. Interface sss tentent 82 21 1 GPIB COnTiQUIatION anten ttn fete te eontra 82 2 31 2 USB Configuration nne tette tenerent tenens 83 2 31 3 LAN Configuration tentent tenente tenen 84 2 32 Resetting the 81150A 81160A sssssssssssssseseeeene tenete netten 89 3 Features and FUNCTIONS uote citerior ED bres Fe uM RUE LPs ERE Feb EYE FEY AH nities 91 3 1 Trigger Mode 52525552595353595459593900999509do90009599860069d9o09S5ond0905 93 3 1 l Arming SOU E iososesosotosetronetre etre o dro e rede Iro rere o re re na i ro 95 3 1 2 Arming Slope tenente tnnt retener 97 3 1 3 Internal Trigger Period Frequency sssssssseseeenennnnnt tenens 98 3 2 Dutput CONTIQUIATION excites catre ro dn car nire pet n e re e rn ceo 100 3 2 4 JDutput FUbCEOzinm c heh i th emt emn n th o tty 100 3 24 Output Frequehey 5e etit t tbe ient tt det 102 3 43 Qutput Amplitude nane teen see re ere d agen 105 3 24 DC Offset Voltage inci sacidiaidadacadiaadndacianaigadnaagndiandaadhdadn 108 3 25 Output Units aos dan ges E ERE RR ME ERO RS 110 02 0 Eoau mpedarie rsnotoototratmotia tta meta foo toa me ro fro fa tro rfr tra foo fr fn tna iens 111 3 27 Output Source Impedance ssssesseeseneeeenet tentent tnnt n en 112 3 28 Voltage Autoranging ccccecsecseceseesessessessessesecsessessesseesesaseecsessesaeeateaseesenseneateateateess 113 3 29 Amplifier Type Selection sese 114
136. Level and Low Level Values e Configuring a Pulse Waveform e Setting up a Pattern e Viewing a Waveform Graph e Qutputting a Stored Arbitrary Waveform e Selecting the Output Termination e Outputting a Modulated Waveform e OQutputting an FSK Waveform e OQutputting a PWM Waveform e Qutputting a Frequency Sweep e OQutputting a Burst Waveform e Triggering a Sweep or Burst e Storing the Instrument State e Configuring the Remote Interface e Resetting the 81150A 81160A Front Panel Menu Operation 2 1 The Front Panel Introduction The instrument is mainly operated from the front panel when used for benchtop testing This section explains the Keys Functions Inputs Outputs and Controls seen on the Front Panel of the 81150A 81160A Channel 1 Selection Navigation Rotary Knob Trigger Waveform Advanced Special USB Host Channel Coupling Keys Cursor Keys Modes Type Modes Function Keys Channel 2 Selection Chi f A E G Y Tr gA IIR oupling S Z l eA gt iH e m PET Soe pan Im LE E53 ep Ep qe Power Switch Menu Softkeys Cancel Numeric Keypad Inputs Outputs Graph Local Front Panel of the 81150A Channel 1 Selection Channel Coupling Navigation Rotary Knob Trigger Waveform Advanced Special Keys Cursor
137. Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PM 1I2 DEV SOURCE PM 1 2 DEViation lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum DEG Set the phase deviation in degrees This value represents the peak variation in phase of the modulated waveform from the carrier waveform Select any value from 0 to 360 degrees The default is 180 degrees MIN 0 degrees MAX 360 degrees The PM 1 2 DEV query returns the phase deviation in degrees If you select the External modulating source PM 1 2 SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the frequency deviation to 180 degrees then a 2 5V 5V signal level corresponds to a 180 degree phase deviation Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels produce a negative phase shift PM DEV 110 399 400 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PM 1 2 EXT IMP SOURCE PM 1 2 EXTernal IMPedance lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum OHM Specifies the impedance of the modulation input If you try to program any other value it will be rounded to one of the specified values either 50Q or 10kQ PM EXT IMP 50 Command Long Parameters Paramet
138. MP gt DIG SOUR EXT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DIG EXT RANG DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern EXTernal RANGe 2 5 0r5 Specifies the input voltage range of the external pattern input i e the modulation input on the rear panel Setting the input voltage range to 2 5 5 selects 2 5V 5V as full range input voltage Any other value will be rounded to one of the possible values either 2 5V or 5V DIG EXT RANG 2 5 567 Command DIG EXT IMP Long DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern EXTernal IMPedance Parameters nr3 Parameter Suffix Description Specifies the input impedance for the external pattern input i e the modulation input on the rear panel Valid values are 50 Ohm and 10 kOhm Any other value will be rounded to one of the two possible values Example DIG EXT IMP 50 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DIG EXT THR LOW DIG EXT THR UPP DIGital 1 2 ST THReshold LOWer DIGital 1 J2 STIMulus PATTern EXTernal THReshold UPPer IMulus PATTern EXTernal lt nr3 gt
139. NCtion 1 2 PULSe WIDTh lt seconds gt MINimum MAX imum FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe DCYCle percent MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe TDELay seconds MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe HOLD WIDTh DCYCle TDELay 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 145 146 3 4 3 Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Leading Edge Trailing Edge The edge time sets each edge transition time rising and falling of the pulse For each transition the edge time represents the time from the 1096 threshold to the 9096 threshold e 81150A Edge time 2 5 ns to 1000 s see restrictions below The default edge time is 2 5 ns e 81150A The minimum edge time is limited to 7 5 ns If the amplifier type is set to max Amplitude e 81160A Edge time 1 0 ns to 1000 s The default edge time is 1 0 ns e Lead Edge and Trail Edge may be specified in seconds or of period e Trail Edge can be configured to follow the leading edge After selecting the pulse function press the Lead Edge Trail Edge softkeys Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired edge time Features and Functions Remote Interface The following function is used to configure the Leading Edge remotely Operation PULSe TRANSition 1 2 lt seconds or percentage MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe TRANsition secondso or percentage MINimum MAXimum The following function is used to configur
140. NSe 1 2 EDGE L R Nimum For more information refer to the Triggering Commands section Features and Functions 3 13 Burst Mode Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide You can configure the 81150A 81160A to output a waveform with a specified number of cycles called a burst The 81150A 81160A can produce a burst using sine square ramp pulse or arbitrary waveforms noise and dc is not allowed For more information on the fundamentals of the burst mode refer to the Tutorial chapter 239 240 3 13 1 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Selecting a Burst The 81150A 81160A will not allow the burst to be enabled at the same time that sweep or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable burst the sweep or modulation mode is turned off You must enable burst before setting up any of the other burst parameters Burst Press zen to output a burst using the present settings for frequency output amplitude and offset To avoid multiple waveform changes enable the burst mode after you have set up the other parameters BURSt 1 2 STATe OFF ON TRIGger 1 2 COUNt lt cycles gt Burst is enabled if the number of cycles to generate bursts is 2 or greater than 2 Features and Functions 3 13 2 Continuous Burst Mode Introduction Characteristics 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The following figure shows typical timings for trigger mode
141. Normal Continuous Continuous 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 47 2 14 Selecting Delay Introduction The time between the start of a period until the start of the waveform is called the delay The start of a period is defined when the delay is set to Ons It can be measured between the Trigger Out and Out Connector Delay Format Delay has the following format e Abs Delay e of Period e Phase To select Delay Steps e Press the Delay softkey e This will show the available choices for the delay format Period Delay Ej Amplitude 1 000 Vp width 10 00 ms Offset 0 000 V5 Lead Edge 2 5 ns Load Imp 50 0 Q Trail Edge 2 5ns Outp Imp Polarity Continuous Continuous 500 0000080 ms Lead Edge 48 Abs Delay 96 of Per Phase 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Front Panel Menu Operation Period Delay 0 Ej Amplitude 1 000 Vas width 10 00 ms Offset 0 000 V5 Lead Edge 2 5 ns Load Imp 50 0 Q Trail Edge 2 5 ns Outp Imp 50 Q Polarity Normal Continuous Continuous Delay Defines the time between the start of a period until the start of the waveform in units of seconds Defines the time between the start of a period till the start of the waveform as a percentage of the period Defines the time between the start of a period till the start of the waveform in degrees 1 360 of the period Selecting any of the delay formats will take you back to the main screen 49 50 2 15 Sele
142. PLy lt function gt lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt For example the following command string sent from your computer will output a 3 V sine wave at 5 kHz with a 2 5 volt offset APPL SIN 5 KHZ 3 0 V 2 5 V For the frequency parameter of the APPLy command the output frequency range depends on the function specified You can substitute MINimum MAXimum or DEFault in place of a specific value for the frequency parameter The DEFault frequency is 1kHz For the amplitude parameter of the APPLy command the output amplitude range depends on the function specified the output termination and the selected amplifier type MINimum MAXimum or DEFault can also be used The DEFault amplitude is 1 0 Vpp into 500hms for all functions The amplitude value will be interpreted as defined by the SCPI command VOLT UNIT VPP VRMS DBM MINimum MAXimum or DEFault can also be used here The default offset is 0 0 V for all functions APPLy Command Syntax examples APPL SIN 5 0e3 3 0 0 0 APPL NOIS def 5 0 2 0 APPL PULS def def defisthe same as APPL PULS APPL DC def def 2 5 321 322 APPLy command Operations The APPLy command performs the following operations Sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to sending the ARM SOUR IMM command Turns off any modulation sweep or burst mode currently enabled a
143. Press the decimal point key to enter a idle or bit Loop Offset The Loop Offset defines the bit position at which the pattern will be continued when the end of the pattern has been reached The Loop Offset is set to 0 by default Setting the Loop Offset to values greater than 0 allows the definition of an initialization or preamble pattern in front of the test pattern that will be looped during the pattern generation Hw Upd On Off Press the Hw Update On Off softkey to select whether changes in the pattern shall be immediately programmed into the hardware or if the hardware update shall be suppressed until editing of the pattern is finished Especially when editing longer patterns the process of editing will be faster when the pattern download is being suppressed STORE in NON VOL Press the STORE in NON VOL softkey to leave the editor apply the edited pattern to the hardware and store the pattern in non volatile memory The 81150A 81160A provides 4 non volatile memory locations for patterns Additionally it is possible to store the pattern to a external USB memory device See the description of the pattern browser below End Edit Press the END Edit softkey to leave the editor and apply the edited pattern to the hardware The pattern will be kept in VOLATILE memory when leaving the editor 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 165 166 Store a Pattern to Non Volatile Memory Front Panel After pressing the STORE in NON VOL softkey in the p
144. Pulse Parameter Definitions Introduction Here you find the pulse parameter definitions of terms used in the instrument specifications In the following figure a graphical overview of the pulse parameters is provided 0 Y D C 0 Pulse Period Extern G al Trigger i S ignal lt lt a Trigger i we i99 NO A utput i Pulse 1 Iransition 1 Mi PulseDelay 4 Width Times i I LI utput h I ouble Pulse y l utput a Double Pulse Delay hannel A Delay A utput LI 1 I LI 128 Bee interchannel 1 Delay Skew hannel B utput Delay B Appendix Time Reference The time reference point is at the median of the amplitude 50 amplitude Point point on pulse edge 10096 50 NENNEN Median Pulse Period The time interval between the leading edge medians of consecutive output pulses Pulse Period Trigger Delay Interval between trigger point of the external trigger input signal and the trigger output pulse s leading edge median 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 659 660 Pulse Width Pulse Delay Interval between leading and trailing edge medians The specified and displayed value is that obtained with fastest edges essentially equal to the interval from the start of the leading edge to the start of the trailing edge By designing so that the pulse edges turn about their
145. RES 150 3 5 2 Patteri SOUNCE ost di tont ttti hdd dda deti dt 151 3 5 3 Configuring the External Pattern Source 153 3 5 4 Selecting a Pattern tenente tnnt tenente 160 3 5 5 Creating Editing and Storing a Pattern sssssssse 162 3 5 6 Bitshape Selection sse enenatis 169 3 5 7 Creating Editing and Storing a Bitshape ssssssssse 171 3 5 8 Triggered and Gated Patterns cccccsessesesesessessessesseesesessessesseeseesestsenseneeteateateess 177 MIETEN u 179 Amplitude Modulation AM ssssssssseseseenetn tentent tenente tenent 181 3 7 1 Selecting AM Modulation sse teretes 182 3 7 2 Carrier Waveform Shape sse enenatis 183 3 7 3 Carrier Freq ency iuioasdooss soa R ned deeem 184 3 7 4 Modulating Waveform Shape seen 185 3 75 Modulating Waveform Frequency sse 186 3 7 6 Modulating Depth tnter tenete 187 3 7 DSSC Double Sideband Suppressed Carrier Mode 189 3 7 9 lt Modulating SOUIGe ntt nete nnde fn dh nde Dann ta d 191 Frequency Modulation FM sse tenerent tn tente ta nsns 192 3 8 1 Selecting FM Modulation tette 193 3 8 2 Carrier Waveform Shape sss enenatis 194 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Contents 3 8 3 Carrier Frequency ert
146. RM EFREquency Remote Programming Reference Command ARM HYSTeresis Long ARM SEQuence STARt LAYer HYSTeresis Parameters LOW HIGH Parameter Suffix B Description Set the hysteresis input range for the External In connector Example ARM HYST LOW 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 529 530 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example ARM IMP ARM SEQuence 1 STARt LAYer 1 IMPedance lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum OHM Use this command to program the input impedance of the external input EXT IN connector Two separate values are available 81150A 50 Q or 10 kQ 81160A 50 Q or 1 KQ The command accepts numerical values the sent value will be clipped to the corresponding value 50 Q or 10 kQ for the 81150A 50 or 1 KQ for the 81160A To select the external input as trigger source use ARM SOUR 1 2 EXT ARM IMP 500HM Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference ARM LEV ARM SEQuence 1 STARt LAYer 1 LEVel1 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum It is used to program the triggering threshold of the external input EXT IN connector To select the external input as trigger source use ARM SOUR 1 2 EXT ARM LEV 1V 531 532 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix
147. SOUR 1 2 Remote Programming Reference ARM SEQuence 1 STARt LAYer 1 SOURce 112 IMMediate INTernal 1 INTernal 2 EXTernal BUS MANual Use this command to select the triggering mode of the instrument by selecting the source of the arming signal for the specified channel of the instrument IMMediate INTernall INTernal2 EXTernal MANual Continuous mode Triggered by the internal trigger period generator Triggered or Gated by External Input EXT IN Triggered or Gated by the manual key or by TRG TRIGger amp f the mode IMM of INT1 was sent the query form returns always IMM ARM SOUR2 IMM 535 536 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example TRIG TRIGger Initiates a software trigger Corresponds to the TRG TRG and TRI are both channel independent or in other words it generates a software trigger on both channels if both channels are waiting for a trigger event TRIG G Remote Programming Reference Command TRIG 1 2 SOUR Long TRIGger 1 2 SEQuence 1 STARt SOURce Parameters IMMediate INTernal 1 Parameter Suffix Description This command was implemented to be compatible with the Agilent Pulse generator Family trigger model Example TRIG SOUR IMM 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 537 538 4 5 16 Command Long Parame
148. SOURCe PULSe TDELay 112 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the delay of the trailing edge of the pulse relative to start of pulse period This is an alternative method of programming pulse width amp This command is affected by the PULS HOLD 1 2 command which determines the value to be held constant as the period is adjusted the specified pulse width value or the specified pulse duty cycle value or the specifies trailing delay See the PULS HOLD 1 2 command for further information PULS TDEL1 6 77NS Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PULS TRAN 112 SOURCe PULSe TRANsition 1 2 Leading lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the edge time in seconds for the leading edges The edge time represents the time from the 10 threshold to the 90 threshold of each edge The PULS TRAN 1 2 query returns the edge time in seconds The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width PULS TRAN2 34 5NS 461 462 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PULS TRAN 1 2 HOLD SOURce PULSe TRANsition 1 2 HOLD TIME WRATio It s used to set the coupling between transition times and the pulse width TIME WRATio PULS TRAN2 HOLD TIME The absolute transition times are held when the pul
149. Setup softkey shown in the image below Frequency iQOOOOO0000 Hz 1 Patt Mode Off Amplitude 1 000 Yp Delay 0 000 s Offset 0 000 V width 50 0ns Load Imp Lead Edge 2 5ns Outp Imp Trail Edge 2 5 nS Polarity Continuous Continuous Pattern Setup e This will show the Pattern Setup screen as shown in the following image Pattern Setup Pattern Mode Off Pattern Source Internal Pattern Name FRBES 7 Bit Shape feed Continuous Continuous Pattern Pattern Mode Source a r Pattern 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 57 58 Pattern Mode e Press the Select Pattern softkey to select from the available built in PRBS patterns or user defined patterns e Use the Rotary Knob or up down Arrow keys to select Internal Pattern Memory Number of Levels 2 Length 2147483647 PRBS_11 lt Built In gt PRBS_15 lt Built In gt i PRBS_23 lt Built In 18 PRBS_31 lt Built In gt Continuous Continuous Front Panel Menu Operation 2 21 Viewing a Waveform Graph Introduction In the Graph Mode you can view a graphical representation of the current waveform parameters The softkeys are listed in the same order as in the normal display mode and they perform the same function However only one label Frequency or Period is displayed for each softkey at one time Enable the Graph Graph Mode Press the key to enable the Graph Mode Select the desired To select a specific parameter note the softkey label
150. Shape M DSSC Continuous Continuous AM by Sine AM Internal AM Depth 80 0 9 AM Frequency Modulation Type Source Shape DSSC Continuous Continuous AM by Sine Sine 65 View the waveform foran Press EH to view the waveform parameters To turn off the Graph Mode press again Front Panel Menu Operation 2 25 Outputting an FSK Waveform Introduction You can configure the 81150A 81160A to shift its output frequency between two preset values using FSK modulation The rate at which the output shifts between the two frequencies called the carrier frequency and the hop frequency is determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Modulation In connector There is one Modulation In connector for each channel For this example you will set the carrier frequency to 3 kHz and the hop frequency to 500 Hz with an FSK rate of 100 Hz Select the function frequency and amplitude of the carrier For this example select a 3 kHz sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp Sine Press A and then press the Frequency Ampl and Offset softkeys to configure the carrier waveform Select FSK Mod i Press and then select FSK using the Modulation Type softkey Notice that a status message FSK Internal is shown in the status line This message is applicable for all waveforms 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 67 Set the hop
151. Some signals are composed of discrete non harmonically related frequencies Since these signals are non repetitive all frequency components cannot be harmonically related to the window length You should be careful in these situations to minimize end point discontinuities and spectral leakage 607 608 0 90 180 270 360 0 90 180 270 360 1 Cycle Arbitrary Waveform with Discontinuity 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 MHz Spectrum of Above Waveform at 100 kHz Tutorial 7 3 Pulse Waveform Generation Introduction The Agilent 81150A 81160A uses a modified DDS scheme for pulse square and ramp waveform generation The full 64 bit phase information is used for the timing calculations Every sample for the waveform DAC is computed by arithmetic logic units This prevents the need to reprogram a waveform memory if one of the pulse parameter changes All timing changes are synchronized with the pulse period so that there are no glitches in the output signal as long as the period is small Signal generation will be reset if the period is greater than 100 ms to guarantee reasonable response times when changing the timing parameters The pulse waveform generation logic is represented in the diagram shown below for the 81150A The 81160A uses a 2 5 GHz clock DDS Phase Information 64 Bits A Rise Time
152. Stored Arbs Remote Interface Configuration GPIB Address DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Server Host Name Web Server Web Server Password Factory Setting 2 Cycle 0 degrees Off Factory Setting Continuous External In 100 KHz Rising Edge High Level Factory Setting Enabled On Errors are cleared No Change Factory Setting 10 On 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 agtXXXXX where XXXXX stands for the instrument s serial number Enabled AGT81150 81150A only Agilent 81160A only Parameters marked with an asterisk are stored in non volatile memory Parameter groups marked with a G will be part of the stored instrument state The content of the volatile arb memories is not part of a stored instrument state 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 299 300 e e e e e e 4 Remote Programming Reference e o ee 0 0 e e e e e e Introduction This chapter provides general information on writing SCPI programs for the 81150A 81160A 4 1 Agilent 81150A 81160A Remote Control Introduction The Agilent 81150A 81160A has two modes of operation e Local The Instrument can be operated using the front panel keys e Remote After receiving the first command or query via the GPIB USB or LAN the instrument is put into the remote state and the front panel is locked To return to the local operating mode press the
153. TTern UPDate ON OFF ONCE Set read the format of output channel DIGital STIMulus SIGNal 1 2 FORMat RZ NRZ Current SCPI subsystem Switches between Voltage Current SOURCe HOLD 1 2 VOLT CURR 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 665 666 Set read channel amplitude current SOURCe CURRent 1 2 LEVe1 IMMediate AMPLitude lt value gt Set read channel offset current SOURce CURRent 1 2 LEVel IMMediate OFFSet value Set read channel high level current SOURce CURRent 1 2 LEVel IMMediate HIGH value Set read channel low level current SOURce CURRent 1 2 LEVel IMMediate LOW value Set read maximum current limit SOURce CURRent 1 2 LIMit HIGH value Set read minimum current limit SOURce CURRent 1 2 LIMit LOW value Enable disable the current limits SOURce CURRent 1 2 LIMit STATe ON OFF CLK IN Input SCPI subsystem Measure frequency at CLK IN SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed AUTO ONCE ru Measure period at CLK IN SOURCe PERiod AUTO ONCE au Set read impedance of CLK IN TRIGger IMPedance value Set read threshold of CLK IN TRIGger LEVel value Set read trigger slope CLK IN TRIGger SLOPe POS NEG Reference Clock SCPI s
154. UR INT command You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform The default is SIN The PM 1J 2 INT FUNC Query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRI NOIS or USER e Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle e Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry e Select TRI for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry e Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform with 0 symmetry If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 16K 16384 points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation PM INT PFUNC RAMP 403 404 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PM 1 I2 SOUR SOURCE PM 1J2 SOURce INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal Select the source of the modulating signal The instrument will accept an INTernal or EXTernal modulation source The default is INT 1 The PM 1 2 SOUR query returns INT or INT2 or EXT INT 1 selects an internal modulation signal and INT2 selects the other channel of the instrument if available If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The phase deviation is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example
155. VOL QUAN DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern NVOLatile QUANtity Use this command to get the total number of pattern slots that are available for storing patterns DIG NVOL QUAN Remote Programming Reference Command DIG LENG Long DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern LENGth Parameters lt name gt Parameter Suffix Description Use this command to query the length of the currently selected pattern If lt name gt is specified then the length of the named pattern is returned Example DIG LENG 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 553 554 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG NLEV DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern NLEVels n Use this parameter to define the number of levels in a data pattern For binary patterns use 2 for three level data binary electrical idle use 3 The behavior of this command query is slightly different in internal and external pattern mode In internal pattern mode DIG SOUR INT the command form of this parameter is used to set the number of levels for a pattern or a bitshape that will be programmed subsequently using DIG DATA or DIG TRAN resp The query form always returns the number of levels of the currently selected pattern which is not necessarily identical with the number of levels that was previously set using the DIG NLEV com
156. YC BURSt 1 2 NCYCles lt cycles gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger 1 2 COUNt and BURSt NCYC1 triggered periods to be generated per arm event T es set the number of RIGger COUNt gt 1 is the short form of BURSt NCYCles and BURST STATe In other words for example TRIGger COUNt 3 set the i and BURTs NCYCles to 3 BURS2 NCYC 200 BURSt STATe to ON Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference BURS 1 2 PHAS BURSt 1 2 PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum The burst phase defines the starting phase of the burst Burst phase 360 0 degrees to 360 0 degrees The default is 0 degree From the remote interface you can set the starting phase in degrees or radians using the UNIT ANGL command From the front panel the starting phase is always displayed in degrees radians are not available If you set the starting phase in radians from the remote interface and then return to front panel operation you will see that the instrument converts the phase to degrees For sine waveform 0 degrees is the point at which the waveform crosses zero volts or the dc offset value in a positive going direction For arbitrary waveforms 0 degrees is the first waveform point downloaded to memory The burst phase has no effect on pulse noise square and ramp wavefor
157. address 219 280 3 16 6 Introduction Setting up a Host Name Front panel operation Host Name A host name is the host portion of the domain name which is translated into an IP address Contact your network administrator for the correct host name Enter the host name using the knob and cursor keys Each character in the name can be a letter a through z number or dash Use the knob to select each character Use the cursor key to move to the next character You can use the keypad for numbers The host name is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Utility Press and then the 1 0 Interfaces softkey Then select LAN followed by DNS Setup Then select Host Name There is no SCPI command to set a host name 3 16 7 Introduction Front Panel Operation e Features and Functions Domain Name LAN A domain name is a registered name on the Internet which is translated into an IP address Utility e Press and then the 1 0 Interfaces softkey e Then select LAN followed by DNS Setup The Domain name cannot be changed The 81150A 81160A simply displays the name of the domain that was determined when the instrument was connected to the LAN 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 281 282 3 16 8 Introduction Setting up a DNS Server address Front Panel Operation DNS Server LAN DNS Domain Name Service is an Intern
158. al triggering is enabled or when the gated mode is selected It is not possible to specify a trigger period which is too short for the 81150A 81160A to output with the specified burst count and frequency see below Trigger Period gt Burst Count x Waveform Period It is not possible to specify a trigger period which is too short for the 81150A 81160A to output with the specified sweep time Trigger Period Sweep Time To set the trigger period press the Internal Period or Internal Frequency softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the period RM FREQuency 1 2 lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum ARM PERiod 1 2 lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 99 100 3 2 Output Configuration Introduction 3 2 1 Introduction This section contains information to help you configure the 81150A 81160A for outputting waveforms You may never have to change some of the parameters discussed here but they are provided to give you the flexibility you might need Output Function The 81150A 81160A can output five standard waveforms sine square ramp pulse and noise plus dc You can also select one of six built in arbitrary waveforms or create your own custom waveforms You can internally modulate sine square ramp and arbitrary waveforms using AM FM PM or FSK You can also modulate pulse using PWM Linear or logarithmic frequency sweeping is available for sine square ramp and arb
159. all user defined bit transition waveforms Built in waveforms will not be deleted by this command Example DIG TRAN DEL ALT 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 563 564 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG TRAN CAT DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern TRANsition CATalog None Use this query to get a list of all user defined bit transition waveforms DIG TRAN CAT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DIG TRIG DIGital 1 2 STiMulus PATTern TRIGger MODE i i BIT BLOCk Use this command to select the trigger mode for pattern If it is set to BIT each trigger event causes a single bit to be output If set to BLOCK each trigger event will cause a complete data block to be output DIG TRIG BLOCk 565 566 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG SOUR DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern SOURce INTernal EXTernal Use this command to select the pattern source In INTernal mode one of the built in or user defined patterns or a PRBS can be selected In EXTernal mode pattern data is supplied on the MOD IN connector on the rear panel of the 81150A 81160A See also DIG EXT IMP DIG EXT RANG DIG EXT THR DIG EXT SA
160. ameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DIG PRES DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern PRESet lt n gt lt length gt Use this command to generate a clock pattern with a rate of lt instrument frequency gt lt n gt The parameter lt length gt determines the length of the sequence lt n gt 2 generates 010101010101010101010 lt n gt 3 generates 001001001001001000100 and so on Special case With lt n gt 0 the sequence defined by lt length gt is filled with zeroes If lt n gt 1 the sequence is filled with ones DIG PRES 4 541 542 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG DATA DIGital 1 2 STIMulus lt block data gt PATTern DATA Use this command to define the contents of the VOLATILE pattern Depending on the data format see D1 four or eight bits 81150A 2 level patterns can be 2 to 16 can be up to 8 Mbit long 81160A 1 channel 2 level patterns can patterns can be up to 2 Mbit long G FORM each byte contains one Mbit long 3 and 4 level patterns be 2 to 4 Mbit long 3 and 4 level 81160A 2 channels 2 level patterns can be 2 to 2 Mbit long 3 and 4 level patterns can be up to 1 Mbit long O G NLEV 2 IG FORM PACKED gJ O IG DATA 2161001101001001001 Command
161. and 81160A User s Guide The 81150A 81160A will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FSK and AM at the same time When you enable FSK the previous modulation mode is turned off The 81150A 81160A will not allow FSK to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable FSK the sweep or burst mode is turned off You must enable FSK before setting up any of the other modulation Mod parameters Press and then press the Modulation Type softkey to select FSK The FSK waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency output amplitude and offset voltage To avoid multiple waveform changes enable FSK after you have set up the other modulation parameters FSKey 1 2 STATe ON OFF 209 210 3 10 2 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Carrier Waveform Shape FSK carrier shape Sine Square Ramp or Arhitrary waveform The default is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or dc as the carrier waveform Steps Pulse Noise e Press any of the front panel function keys except JL or ate Arb For arbitrary waveforms press Av and then press More key Press the Select Waveform softkey to select the active waveform FUNCtion 1 2 SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 3
162. anel and turns on the display if currently disabled DISP TEXT Test in Progress To clear the message displayed on the front panel without changing the display state send the following command DISP TEXT CLEAR 269 3 15 7 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 270 Time Displays the time which is set on the instrument Utility Press hind and then System softkey Press MORE and then the Time softkey Brightness 6 Beeper On Time Date 2 Continuous Continuous ij 12 42 Time SYSTem TIME lt hours gt lt minutes gt lt seconds gt SYSTem TIME The time can be modified using the Rotary Knob 3 15 8 Introduction Front Panel Operation e Remote Interface Operation Date Features and Functions Displays the date which is set on the instrument Utility Press el and then System softkey Press MORE and then the Date softkey The date can be modified using the Rotary Knob SYSTem DATI SYSTem DAT 81150A and 81160A User s Guide E P E P 2 lt years gt lt month gt lt day gt 271 3 15 9 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 272 Firmware Revision Query You can query the 81150A 81160A to determine which revision of firmware is currently installed KJ Press and then press System and then press the Configuration softkey Produc
163. ape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine e Square has 50 duty cycle F L e Ramp has 100 symmetry e Triangle has 50 symmetry e Negative ramp has 0 symmetry e You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform e f you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 16K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation After enabling FM press the FM Shape softkey FM 1 2 INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Features and Functions 3 8 5 Modulating Waveform Frequency Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel Modulating frequency internal source 81150A 1 mHz to 10 MHz 81160A 1 mHz to 50 MHz The default is 10 Hz After enabling FM press the FM Frequency softkey FM 1 2 INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 197 3 8 6 Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation
164. are ramp or arbitrary waveforms pulse noise and dc are not allowed Sweep Commands Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FREQ 1 2 CENT SOURce FREQuency 1 2 CW FIXed CENTer lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the center frequency used in conjunction with the frequency span MIN 1 1Hz MAX based on the frequency span and maximum frequency for the selected function The FREQ 1 2 CENT query returns the center frequency in Hertz FREQ2 CENT 5MHZ 491 492 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FREQ 1I2 SPAN SOURCE FREQuency 1 2 CW FIXed SPAN lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the frequency span used in conjunction with the center frequency MIN 0Hz MAX based on the center frequency and maximum frequency for the selected function The FREQ 1 2 SPAN query returns the span in Hertz can be a positive or negative value Frequency Span max 2 X Max Frequency Center Frequency e To sweep up in frequency set a positive frequency span e To sweep down in frequency set a negative frequency span FREQ1 SPAN 2 5MHZ Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Program
165. atency the logic depicted in the following block diagram is used The 81160A uses a 2 5 GHz ADC External In Threshold Voltage D 1 GHz Start Transition Data Time ADC m Logic DDS Converter Phase Correction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide External In Block Diagram of 81150A The signal applied to External In is first compared against the threshold voltage The digitized External In signal is then fed through a transition time converter This guarantees that the signal that is sampled by the ADC has a well known transition time which is greater than the sampling interval The required phase offset for the DDS is calculated from the first 2 ADC readings that are not clipped to the ADC s minimum reading as shown below 629 630 ADC Input Voltage ADC Reading ADC Input Range Phase Offset Phase Offset Phase Offset Sample Phase Offsa Sample 2 Samplettl The calculated phase offset will then be applied to the DDS when processing the Start signal While waiting for the start signal the DDS sends the waveform data that corresponds to the start phase usually 0 to the waveform DAC The first waveform data that is sent after receiving the start signal uses the phase that corresponds to Phase Increment Phase Offset Tutorial 1 8 Signal Imperfections Introduction Harmonic Imperfections 8115
166. attern editor the Operation pattern browser opens This allows storing the pattern to one of the 4 built in memory locations for patterns or to an external USB memory device Internal Pattern Memory USER1 lt User defined gt Assigning a Name Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions You can assign a custom name to the non volatile memory locations The custom name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character To add additional characters press the right cursor key until the cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob j To delete all characters to the right of the cursor press the ud key For this example assign the name RAMP AGT to memory location 1 and then press the STORE softkey to store the waveform This will bring the following screen USER1 User defined gt Overwrite exisiting File Empty gt Emp Empty Press Yes to overwrite the new Pattern Name on the existing old name The pattern is now stored in non volatile memory and is currently being output from the 81150A 81160A You can select the storage location by scrolling up and down in the list using the up down arrow keys or the knob The name that you used to store the pattern will now appear in the list of stored patterns under the Patt
167. aveform as the binary download is faster than the comma separated one DATA VOLATILI LH nd 2604 33 Up Sado COT aL 333 334 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DATA 1 2 ATTR AVER DATA 1 2 ATTRibute AVERage lt arb name gt Query the arithmetic average of all data points for the specified arbitrary waveform 1 lt average lt 1 The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently active selected with FUNC USER command If you query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated DATA 1 ATTR AVER EXP RISE Response 0 833275 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DATA 1 2 ATTR CFAC DATA 1 2 ATTRibute CFACtor lt arb name gt Query the crest factor of all data points for the specified arbitrary waveform Crest factor is the ratio of the peak value to the RMS value of the waveform The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently active selected with FUNC USER command If you query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated DATAl ATTR CFAC EXP RISE Response 1 239349433E 01 335 336 Command Long Parameters Pa
168. aximum allowed voltage Low Volt Limit is used to set the minimum allowed voltage Amplifier Type max Bandwidth Amplifier Range Automatic Range Channel Add Separate Cl Voltage Limits High Limit 10 00 Y Low Limit 10 00 V Continuous Continuous VOLTage 1 2 LIMit STATe OFF ON VOLTage 1 2 LIMit lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage 1 2 LIMit LOW lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum Features and Functions 3 2 12 Duty Cycle Square Waves Introduction The duty cycle of a square wave represents the amount of time per cycle that the square wave is at a high level assuming that the waveform is not inverted See Pulse Waveforms for information about duty cycle for pulse waveforms MM E 20 Duty Cycle 80 Duty Cycle Duty Cycle e The duty cycle is limited by the minimum pulse width of Wmin This Characteristics means the duty cycle can get as low as 10096 Wmin period and as high as 100 1 Wmin period 81150A Where Wmin is either 4 1ns or 10ns depending on the selected amplifier See section Amplifier Type Selection 81160A Where Wmin is 1 5 ns e The duty cycle is stored in volatile memory the duty cycle is set to 50 the default when power has been off or after a remote interface reset assuming the Power On state is set to default e The duty cycle setting is remembered when you change from square wave to another function When you return
169. bits of the phase accumulator output are used to address waveform memory By changing the PIR constant the number of clock cycles required to step through the entire waveform memory changes thus changing the output frequency The PIR determines how fast the phase value changes with time and thereby controls the frequency being synthesized More bits in the phase accumulator result in finer frequency resolution Since the PIR affects only the rate of change of the phase value and not the phase itself changes in waveform frequency are phase continuous Phase Increment Register PIR Adder 64 Bits D 2 GHz MSBs 64 Bits 14 or 19 bits Phase Register 64 Bits Waveform Memory Address Phase Information for Pulse Generation Logic Phase Accumulator Circuitry of 81150A 81160A is clocked with 2 5GHz Tutorial Phase Accumulator The 81150A and 81160A use a 64 bit phase accumulator which yields 2 x 2 GHz or 2 7 picohertz for 81150A 2 64 x 2 5 GHz or 3 4 picohertz for 81160A frequency resolution internally Only the 14 or 19 values of the 81150A most significant bits of the Phase Register are used to address waveform memory Therefore when synthesizing low frequencies less than 122 07 kHz for a typical 16K point waveform the address will not change in every clock cycle However at higher frequencies greater than
170. burst or change with time in any way there are possible applications limited only by your ability to specify the waveform data 601 602 1 1 Direct Digital Synthesis Introduction The Agilent 81150A 81160A uses a signal generation technique called Direct Digital Synthesis DDS for all waveform functions except noise As shown below a stream of digital data representing the desired waveform is sequentially read from waveform memory and is applied to the input of a digital to analog converter DAC The DAC is clocked at the 81150A 81160A s sampling frequency of 2 GHz for the 81150A 2 5 GHz for the 81160A and outputs a series of voltage steps approximating the desired waveform A low pass anti aliasing filter then smoothes the voltage steps to create the final waveform Waveform Memory Anti Aliasing Address 2 GHz Filter Data zm Waveform DAC Direct Digital Synthesis Circuitry Direct Digital Synthesis Circuitry The 81150A 81160A uses two anti aliasing filters A linear phase filter is used for all waveform functions For standard waveforms and arbitrary waveforms that are defined with fewer than 16 384 16K points the 81150A 81160A uses waveform memory that is 16K words deep For arbitrary waveforms that are defined with more than 16K points the 81150A uses waveform memory that is 524288 512K words 81160A uses 32k 64k 128k
171. c Deviation softkey Then use the Operation knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation e Go to the Pulse Screen press the Width softkey and switch to Duty Cycle e Press the Modulation Key Instead of Width Deviation the softkey will be labeled Dty Cyc Deviation and the value to be entered will be in instead of seconds e The width representation can be changed directly on the PWM screen by pressing the Width Deviation or Dty Cyc Deviation softkey shown in the figure below Modulation Type PWM Source Internal Width Deviation PWM Freq 10 000 Hz Shape Sine PWM by Sine Continuous Continuous Width Modulation Type PAM Source Internal Dcyc Deviation PWM Freq 10 000 Hz Shape Sine PWM by Sine Continuous Continuous Modulation Type SOUrCe Frequent 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 223 Remote Interface PWM 1 2 DEViation DCYCle lt deviation Operation in percent MINimum MAXimum C The pulse width and width deviation and the pulse duty cycle and duty cycle deviation are coupled in the front panel interface If you select Width for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Width Deviation softkey is available On the other hand if you select Duty Cycle for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Dty Cyc Deviation softkey is available Features and Functions 3 11 8 Modulating Source Introduction Modulating Source Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operatio
172. ce lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 376 RANGe lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 377 INTernal FREQuency lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 378 FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRlangle 379 NOISe USER SOURce INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal 380 STATe ON OFF 381 Frequency Modulation Commands Command Parameter See Page FM 1J2 DEViation lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 383 EXTernal IMPedance lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 384 RANGe lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 385 INTernal FREQuency lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 386 FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle 387 NOISe USER SOURce INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal 388 STATe ON OFF 389 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 307 Frequency Shift Keying Modulation Commands Command FSKey 1 2 EXTerna IMPedance LEVel RANGe FREQuency INTernal RATE Parameter NR3 MINimum MAXimum NR3 MINimum MAXimum NR3 MINimum MAXimum NR3 MINimum MAXimum NR3 MINimum MAXimum INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal ON OFF Phase Modulation Commands Command PM 1J2 DEViation EXTernal IMPedance RANGe INTernal FREQuency FUNCtion SOURCe STATe 308 Parameter NR3 MINimum MAXimum NR3 MINimum MAXimum
173. cessary to fill waveform memory For example if you specify 100 points each waveform point will be repeated an average of 16 384 100 or 163 84 times For the 81150A 81160A you do not have to change the length of the waveform to change its output frequency All you have to do is create a waveform of any length and then adjust the function generator s output frequency However in order to get the best results and minimize voltage quantization errors it is recommended that you use the full range of the waveform DAC When entering waveform points from the function generator s front panel you are not required to enter the points at evenly spaced intervals in time You can always add additional points as needed where the waveform is more complex From the front panel only you can also use linear interpolation to smooth the transition between waveform points These features make it possible to create useful arbitrary waveforms using a relatively small number of points With the 81150A you can output an arbitrary waveform to an upper frequency limit of 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz However note that the useful upper limit is usually less due to the function generator s bandwidth limitation and aliasing Waveform components above the function generator s 3 dB bandwidth will be attenuated Creating a waveform Leakage Error 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Tutorial An example of the 81150A Consider an arbitrary waveform consisting of 10
174. characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character e To add additional characters press the right cursor key until the cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob e To delete all characters to the right of the cursor press the zs key Features and Functions State i unused State 2 STATE 2 unused State 3 STATE_3 unused State 4 STATE_4 unused Continuous Continuous STATE_1 Remote Interface SAY 112 3 4 Operation RCL 0 1 2 3 4 States 1 2 3 and 4 are user defined states To assign a custom name to a stored state to be recalled from the front panel send the following command From the remote interface you can only recall a stored state using a number 0 through 4 MEMory STATe NAME 1 2 3 4 name MEM STATE NAME 1 TE ST WFORM 1 To configure the 81150A 81160A to automatically recall the power down state when power is restored send the following command MEMory STATe RECall AUTO ON 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 261 262 3 15 2 Export Import State Introduction The 81150A 81160A can store instrument states on a USB memory device usually this is a USB stick but could also be a hard drive Front Panel Store Operation Press the Recall key and then the More softkey You will then see two softkeys labeled Export State and Import State This is available on the second level of the softkey menu More 2 These are the ones to be used
175. cified value if the output is enabled 53 54 2 18 Setting the High Level and Low Level Values Introduction To Set the High Level and Low Level Values You can specify a signal by setting its amplitude and dc offset values Another way to set the limits of a signal is to specify its high level maximum and low level minimum values This is typically convenient for digital applications In the following example let us set the high level to 1 0 V and the low level to 0 0 V Steps e Press the Ampl softkey to select Ampl e Press the softkey again to toggle to show the different representations of the output voltages e Press the High Low softkey to select High level and Low level e Both the Ampl and Offset softkeys toggle together to High and Low respectively e Set the High Level value using the numeric keypad or the knob e Press the Low Level softkey and set the value using the numeric keypad or the knob These settings high level 1 0 V and low level 0 0 V are equivalent to setting an amplitude of 1 0 Vpp and an offset of 500 mVdc Front Panel Menu Operation 2 19 Configuring a Pulse Waveform Introduction Select the pulse function Set the pulse period 81150A and 81160A User s Guide You can configure the 81150A 81160A to output a pulse waveform with variable pulse width and edge time The following steps show you how to configure a 500 ms pulse waveform with a pulse width of 10
176. cond and all following repetitions Tutorial o Once the sequencing is started there is no way to stop or restart the sequence since the looped part of the pattern will simply be repeated contiuously If there is the need to have a restartable pattern with preamble and looped payload then set the Pattern Trigger Mode to BLOCK and enable Burst Mode In this case the preamble part of the pattern will be generated once while the payload part of the pattern will be repeated N time With N being the configured burst length The sequence will stop after the burst has reached the number of block repetitions and the 81150A 81160A is awaiting the next trigger event which in turn will reset the sequence to the start of the preamble and initiate another playback of the preamble and N repetions of the payload 7 4 3 Trigger Modes Introduction In continuous trigger mode the pattern is continuously generated at the output If the loop offset is set to a non zero value the preamble part of the pattern is generated only once The 81150A 81160A is using the concept of last cycle completed when using triggered or gated modes which means that a pulse burst or arbitrary waveform is always completed before the next trigger event or active gate state will be processed When using pattern generation the definition of a cycle is selectable between the entire pattern a block and a single bit This allows to either trigger one complete run of the
177. ct LAN followed by IP Setup e By default DHCP Auto IP is On Press the DHCP Auto IP softkey to toggle its state e There is no SCPI command to set DHCP Auto IP On Off 3 16 3 Introduction Setting up an IP Address Front Panel Operation Features and Functions IP Address LAN An IP address is actually a four byte integer expressed in the notation nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn in each case is a byte value from 000 to 255 You can enter an IP address for Agilent 81150A 81160A e You need not set an IP address if DHCP is in use e Contact your network administrator for a valid IP address to use for your 81150A 81160A e Enter the IP address using the numeric keypad not the knob e The IP address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Utility e Press and then the 1 0 Interfaces softkey e Then select LAN followed by IP Setup e By default DHCP is On Select DHCP Off if necessary The IP Address field appears e There is no SCPI command to set an IP address 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 271 278 3 16 4 Subnet Mask LAN Introduction Setting up a Subnet Mask Front Panel Operation Subnetting allows the network administrator to divide a network into smaller networks to simplify administration and to minimize network traffic The subnet mask indicates the portion of the host address to be used to indicate the subnet e You n
178. cting DC Volts Introduction You can select the DC Volts feature from the Utility menu and then set a constant dc voltage as an Offset value As an example let us set DC Volts 1 5 Vdc To select DC Volts Steps Utility e Press bagi and then press the DC Mode softkey e Press the DC softkey to toggle between DC mode off and on When DC mode is being turned off then the instrument will switch back to the parameter screen of the waveform being generated DC sj Offset 0 000 W Load Imp 50 Outp Imp 50 Continuous Continuous Off Load Out Impedance Impedance Front Panel Menu Operation 2 16 Setting a DC Offset Voltage Introduction Press the Offset softkey Enter the magnitude of the desired offset 81150A and 81160A User s Guide At power on normally the instrument outputs the same setting as before power down The following steps show you how to change the offset Steps Press the Offset softkey to select the DC offset voltage Enter the desired voltage level as an Offset as shown in the image below When you change functions the same offset is used if the present value is valid for the new function DC Off Offset o Load Imp 50 Q Outp Imp 50 Q Continuous Continuous 0 000800 V Ra zc Load Out X O at DC Impedance fImpedance Using the numeric keypad enter the value 1 5 as shown in the image below 51 52 Select the desi
179. cy 1 2 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCCion 1 2 2 SINusoid SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe DC USER NOISe PDFunction USER PDF1 PDF2 PDF3 PDF4 PULSe DCYCle NR3 MINimum MAXimum DELay NR3 MINimum MAXimum HOLD TIME PRATio UNITI S SEC PCT DEG RAD 310 See Page 417 419 420 421 422 422 423 424 425 426 429 430 431 432 See Page 434 435 436 437 438 439 Remote Programming Reference Command Parameter See Page HOLD WIDTh DCYCle TDELay 440 TDELay NR3 MINimum MAXimum 442 TRANsition lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 443 HOLD TIME WRATio 444 TRAiling lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 445 AUTO OFF ON ONCE 446 UNIT S SEC PCT 447 WIDTh NR3 MINimum MAXimum 448 RAMP SYMMetry lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 449 SQUare DCYCle lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 450 PERiod 1 2 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 451 PULSe DCYCle 1 2 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 452 DELay 112 2 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 453 HOLD TIME PRATio DEGree 454 UNIT S SEC PCT DEG RAD 455 FREQuency 112 NR3 MINimum MAXimum 456 HOLD 1 2 WIDTh DCYCle TDELay 457 PERiod 1 2 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum 459 TDELay 1 2 NR3 MINimum MAXimum 460 TRANsition 11 2 NR3 Ml
180. cycle is held and the duty cycle deviation also is held as the period is varied Width deviation commands are converted to duty cycle deviation values The instrument holds the trailing delay setting in seconds constant as the period is varied Minimum width and edge time restrictions apply 457 458 Example amp i The PULS HOLD 1 2 command does not limit period settings The physical limits of the width are not exceeded PULS HOLD2 TDEL Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PULS PER 1I2 SOURCe PULSe PERi1od 1 2 lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the period for pulses The PULS PER 1 2 query returns the period of the pulse waveform in seconds The specified period must be greater than the sum of the pulse width and the edge time This command affects the period and frequency for all waveform functions not just pulse For example if you select a period using the PULS PER 1 2 command and then change the function to sine wave the specified period will be used for the new function MIN selects the lowest actual possible period allowed for the selected function MAX selects the highest actual possible period allowed PULS PER2 89NS 459 460 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PULS TDEL 11I2
181. d and then change the function to sine wave the specified period will be used for the new function MIN selects the lowest actual possible period allowed for the selected function MAX selects the highest actual possible period allowed As ER2 555 5NS 451 452 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PULS DCYC 112 SOURce PULSe DCYCle 1 2 NR3 MINimum MAXimum PCT Set the pulse duty cycle in percent The pulse duty cycle is defined as Duty Cycle 100 X Pulse Width Period where the pulse width represents the time from the start of the rising edge of the pulse to the start of the next falling edge The pulse duty cycle range is 0 percent to 100 percent However the pulse duty cycle is limited by minimum pulse width and edge time restrictions which prevent you from setting exactly 0 percent or 100 percent amp This command is affected by the PULS HOLD 1 2 command which determines the value to be held constant as the period is adjusted the specified pulse width value or the specified pulse duty cycle value or the specifies trailing delay See the PULS HOLD 1 2 command for further information PULS DCYC2 12 25 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PULS DEL 1 2 SOURCe PULSe DELay 112 lt NR3 gt MINimu
182. d by dashes Agilent Technologies NxxxxA serial number x x x x h X X X X Firmware revision number h Hardware revision number 575 Command LRN OPC OPC OPT PSC 011 PSC RCE RST SAV 576 Description Query the instrument and return a binary block of data containing the current settings learn string You can then send the string back to the instrument to restore this state at a later time For proper operation do not modify the returned string before sending it to the instrument The returned string will contain about 32K characters Use SYST SET to send down the learn string See SYST SET Set the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register after the previous commands have been completed Return 1 to the output buffer after the previous commands have been completed Other commands cannot be executed until this command completes Read the installed options The response consists of any number of fields separated by commas Clear the Standard Event enable register and Status Byte condition register at power on PSC 1 When PSC 0 is in effect these two registers are not cleared at power on The default is PSC 1 The PSC query returns the power on status clear setting Returns 0 do not clear at power on or 1 clear at power on Recall the instrument state stored in the specified non volatile storage location You cannot recall an i
183. d constant as the period is adjusted the specified pulse width value or the specified pulse duty cycle value or the specifies trailing delay See the FUNC 1 2 PULS HOLD command for further information FUNC2 PULS WIDT 21 5NS Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FUNC 1 2 RAMP SYMM SOURCe FUNCtion 1 2 RAMP SYMMetry NR3 MINimum MAXimum PCT Set the symmetry percentage for ramp waves Symmetry represents the amount of time per cycle that the ramp wave is rising assuming that the waveform polarity is not inverted You can set the symmetry to any value from 0 to 100 The default is 100 MIN 0 MAX 100 The SYMM query returns the current symmetry setting in percent For ramp waveforms the APPLy command overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 10096 The symmetry setting is remembered when you change from ramp wave to another function When you return to the ramp wave function the previous symmetry is used If you select a ramp waveform as the modulating waveform for AM or FM the symmetry setting does not apply FUNC2 RAMP SYMM 23 8PCT 449 450 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FUNC 1 2 SQU DCYC SOURce FUNCtion 1 2 SQUare DCYCle NR3 MINimum MAXimum PCT
184. d the beeper e f more than 30 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue the most recent error is replaced with Queue overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the 81150A 81160A responds with No error e The error queue is cleared by the CLS clear status command or when the power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the error queue The error queue is not cleared by an instrument reset RST command Help Press uc and then the Error Queue softkey to view all errors of the local interface It is not possible to read the errors of the remote programming interfaces from the GUI The list of all active warnings is available with the Warnings softkey same for local and remote Warnings are system wide conditions that apply to the local and remote Interface at the same time Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide SYSTem Features and Functions Reads one error string 113 Unde SYSTem ERROr error from the error queue Errors have the following format the may contain up to 255 characters fined header WARNing BUFFer Returns the number of active warnings SYSTem Returns all WARNing STRing active warning messages 265 266 3 15 4 Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Beeper Con
185. d to operate at a maximum relative humidity of 9596 and at altitudes of up to 2000 meters Refer to the specifications tables for the ac mains voltage requirements and ambient operating temperature range Before Applying Power Verify that all safety precautions are taken The power cable inlet of the instrument serves as a device to disconnect from the mains in case of hazard The instrument must be positioned so that the operator can easily access the power cable inlet When the instrument is rack mounted the rack must be provided with an easily accessible mains switch Ground the Instrument To minimize shock hazard the instrument chassis and cover must be connected to an electrical protective earth ground The instrument must be connected to the ac power mains through a grounded power cable with the ground wire firmly connected to an electrical ground safety ground at the power outlet Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor or disconnection of the protective earth terminal will cause a potential shock hazard that could result in personal injury Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes Do Not Remove the Instrument Cover Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made only by qualified personnel Instruments that appear damaged or defective should be mad
186. de and offset Enable sweep before setting up any of the other sweep parameters The 81150A 81160A will not allow the sweep mode to be enabled at the same time when burst or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable sweep the burst or modulation mode is turned off Front Panel Menu Operation 2 12 Setting the Output Frequency Introduction At power on normally the instrument outputs the same setting as before power down The default frequency is 1 MHz and the default amplitude is 1 Vpp When you change functions the same frequency is used if the present value is valid for the new function The following steps show you how to change the frequency Press the To set the waveform frequency press the Frequency softkey Pressing the Frequency frequency softkey when Frequency is already selected will toggle to Period softkey The current selection is highlighted as shown in the image below Frequency QOOOO 000000 MH 1 Delay 0 000 s Amplitude 1 000 Wp Offset 0 000 V5 Load Imp 50 0 Q Outp Imp Polar ity Continuous Continuous 1500000000000 MHz A Enter the Using the numeric keypad enter the desired value say 1 2 magnitude of the desired frequency 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 43 44 Select the desired Select and press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units Press the units More softkey to view more units available for the current selection When you select the units the 81150A 81160A ou
187. de of operation consists of the following four components e Coupling between Chi amp Ch2 e Trigger Mode e Waveform Type e Advanced Modes These are further explained below There are two output channels available for the Agilent 81150A 81160A The 2 channel version operates in two different modes of operation Coupling off The two channels operate entirely independent Frequency generation for both channels is based on the same clock reference Coupling on The frequency trigger mode waveform type and advanced mode are identical for both channels The delay between the channels is specified Refer to the Appendix for a list of all coupled parameters The Trigger Mode Waveform Type and the Advanced Modes are explained in the following sections Front Panel Menu Operation 2 9 Selecting Trigger Mode and Source Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The source of a trigger event can be Internal External or Manual The default is External The following trigger modes are explained below e Continuous e External Triggered e External Gated e Internal Triggered e Manual The following table explains the functionality of the 81150A 81160A 33 Trigger Mode Continuous Function Pulse Square Sine Ramp Noise Arb DC Arming Source Not Applicable Advanced Mode None Burst Sweep Modulation Trigg
188. des of the instrument More precise use the ARM subsystem to the select the overall triggering mode of the instrument e g Continuous External triggered Gated etc and the trigger subsystem to select for example the number of pulse period The following diagram illustrates the trigger model of 81150A 81160A Do Modulation Modulation ARM SOURce 1 2 IMM INT1 Do Sweep FStart gt Fstop TRIGger 1 2 SOURce IMMediate __ Always triggered Generate period increment counter TRIGger 1 2 COUNt BURSI 1 2 NCYCles BURSI 1 2 STATe ON OFF Counter NCYCles Reset Counter Remote Programming Reference Triggering Commands Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide ARM FREQ 11I2 ARM SEQuence 1 STARt LAYer 1 FREQuency 1 2 CW FIXed lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum HZ Specifies the frequency of the internal trigger period generator of the selected channel To select the internal trigger generator use ARM SOUR 1 J2 INT2 ARM FREO2 10MHz 527 528 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example ARM EFREquency ARM SEQuence STARt LAYer EFR Equency lt NR3 gt Hz Read the detected trigger input frequency at the External In connector A
189. djusted as required for the specific application The Internal trigger generator cannot be used to generate the gate signal The Man key on the front panel may be used to generate the trigger event or gate signal manually When receiving the TRG command the instrument will emulate a press and release event of the Man key 95 Front Panel Operation 96 Trig Gated Press the or E key on the front panel to reach the Trigger Mode screen Choose the appropriate Source as shown below Triggered Sinewave Source Trg d by Rising Edge Trigger Out T Tl Strobe Out TTL External Trigger Continuous External In External In Impedance 25V Gated Sinewave Impedance 50 6 Source External In Gated by i Trigger Out TTL Strobe Out TTL External Gate Continuous High Level The screenshots above are taken from the 81150A The 81160A offers additional functionality described in chapter 3 3 1 External In Parameters Remote Interface Operation e 3 1 2 Introduction Front Panel Operation Features and Functions ARM SOURCe INTernal2 EXTernal MANual Selecting the source of the arming signal is related to setting the triggering mode of the instrument See section 3 1 for more details Arming Slope Trigger events can be generated on the rising edge the falling edge or on both edges of the selected arming signal On the Trigger Mode screen press the Trig d by or Gated by sof
190. do not span the full range of the output DAC The DATA DAC command overwrites the previous waveform in volatile memory and no error will be generated Use the DATA COPY command to copy the waveform to non volatile memory 341 342 Description Example Up to 4 user defined waveforms can be stored in non volatile memory Use the DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in nonvolatile memory Use the DATA CAT command to list all waveforms currently stored in volatile and non volatile memory as well as the seven built in waveforms After downloading the waveform data to memory use the FUNC USER command to choose the active waveform and the FUNC USER command to output it Whenever possible use the binary waveform data download instead of a comma separated specification of the waveform as the binary download is faster than the comma separated one The Example below shows how to use the DATA DAC command to download integer points using the binary block format see also appendix Using the IEEE 488 2 Binary Block Format and a second example shows how to use the DATA DAC command to download integer points in decimal format DATA DAC VOLATILE 1801020304 DATA DAC VOLATILE 8187 4098 0 4096 8187 I pr Remote Programming Reference E E Command DATA 112 DI DATA 1 2 DELete Long Parameters l
191. does not only contain readings at the high and low level but also during the transitions of the output signal Ti Example of user The following example shows a user defined distribution that is a square defined distribution wave with 25 duty cycle Due to the bandwidth limitations the ratio defined by Sqaure between the high and low level peaks in the histogram is not 1 3 but 1 4 waveform And thus the probability to see the programmed high level at the output is less than expected 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 625 626 7 6 Trigger Modes Introduction Continuous Triggered Gated The Agilent 81150A 81160A allows you to control the signal generation in several ways One of the most important selection is the trigger mode being used Basically there are three different trigger modes namely continuous triggered and gated These are explained below The instrument continuously generates the selected waveform sweep or burst The next cycle is started immediately automatically This is the only trigger mode that can be used when modulation is enabled The instrument generates exactly one waveform cycle sweep or burst If a trigger event occurs while a signal is being generated then this trigger event is ignored The instrument is continuously generating the selected waveform sweep or burst while the selected gate signal is active If the gate is getting inactive
192. ds are conform to the IEEE 488 2 SCPI standard The following table presents some of the most common suffix names elements used while referring to some units in the instrument Command Shows the short form of the command Long Shows the long form of the command Parameter The type of parameter if any accepted by the command The minimum and maximum value of numeric parameters can be accessed by the option MINimum or MAXimum Parameter The suffixes that may follow the parameter Suffix Description A detailed description of what the command does Example Example programming statements 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 319 320 4 5 81150A 81160A SCPI Instrument Elements Name Introduction The following table presents some of the most common suffix names elements used while referring to some units in the instrument The following table gives both the short name and its expanded name for the most commonly used units Element Expanded Name DEG Degree HZ Hertz OHM Ohm PCT Percent RAD Radian S Seconds V Volt Remote Programming Reference 4 5 1 APPLy Commands Introduction Output Frequency Output Amplitude DC Offset Voltage 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to program the instrument over the remote interface You can select the function frequency amplitude and offset all in one command as shown in the syntax statement below AP
193. dth all other timing parameters and their uncertainties have to be considered in order to check if the width setting will fits within the pulse period amp The warning limits are therefore not fixed for a particular parameter but vary with the settings of the related parameters It is also possible that the error and warning limits are the same that is a warning does not occur before the error limit is reached If a warning occurs the settings are still implemented in the hardware because the worst case conditions used to evaluate the warning limits are very unlikely to occur in practice A blinking W indicates that one or more warnings have occurred The first 5 warning messages will be displayed on the screen These messages will stay active until the warning condition is changed by changing the settings Help of the respective parameter Press hid to view the warning list 597 598 Error An error is generated when an invalid mode is chosen or the required parameter settings cannot be implemented in the output hardware Multiple errors can occur but only the first b errors detected are displayed An error is indicated by a blinking E These messages will stay active until the error condition is changed by changing the settings of the respective parameter If the instrument has both an error and a warning condition together then the text indicating the error condition will be shown on the display If you Help press the
194. e Volume 1 section 4 2 1 this query and the required IEEE 488 2 common commands and queries might return 13425 SYSTem ERRor qonly SYSTem HELP HEADers qonly SYSTem VERSion qonly STATus OPERation EVENt qonly STATus OPERation CONDition qonly STATus OPERation ENABle STATus QUEStionable EVENt qonly STATus QUEStionable CONDition qonly STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus PRESet nquery IDN qonly RST nquery TST qonly RST shall have no direct effect on the response to this query Es I Example SYST HELP HEAD Response See Description above Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide SYST KLOC SYSTem KLOCk ON OFF Set front panel keybo Remote Programming Reference STATe ard lock OFF the default or ON With SYST KLOC ON the front panel keyboard is locked including the LOCAL key unless it has been excluded T send SYST KLOC o lock the keyboard without locking the LOCAL gt key EXCL LOC first before SYST KLOC ON SYST KLOC ON 509 510 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example SYST KLOC EXCL SYSTem KLOCk EXCLude NONE LOCal Setting SYST KLOC EXCL NONE the default sets no exclusion and SYST KLOC ON
195. e an arbitrary waveform with the name ALL If no such waveform is stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated Use the DATA DEL arb name command to delete stored waveforms one at a time You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being output If you attempt to delete this waveform a Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform error is generated You cannot delete any of the seven built in arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to delete one of these waveforms a Not able to delete a built in arb waveform error is generated DATA2 DEL ALL Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DATA 1 2 MOD DATA 1 2 MODulation VOLATILE value value value Addresses the internal 16K 16384 modulation memory It can be used to download an arbitrary waveform into the modulation memory which can be used as modulating waveform for a signal generated by the instrument It corresponds to the DATA 1 2 commands which loads the VOLATILE memory of the instrument For a more detailed description of the data format refer to DATA VOLATILE SCPI command or Appendix of this document DATA MOD VOLATILE 0 2 1 0 1 0 0 5 0 75 345 346 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example
196. e if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an offset voltage of 500 mV For dc volts the output level is actually controlled by setting the offset voltage You can set the dc level to any value between 5 Vdc into 50 ohms or 10 Vdc into high impedance circuit 1 MQ Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions e To set the dc offset press the Offset softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired offset To set the offset using a high level and low level press the Offset softkey again to toggle to the High and Low softkeys Utility e To select dc volts press a and then select the DC On softkey Press the Offset softkey to set the desired offset voltage level The following function is used to configure the DC Offset Voltage remotely VOLTage 1 2 OFFSet volts MINimum MAXimum Or you can set the offset by specifying a high level and low level using the following commands VOLTage 1 2 HIGH lt volts gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage 1 2 LOW lt volts gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 109 3 2 5 Introduction Output Units Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 110 Output Uni
197. e Range defines the full scale of the pattern signal It can be selected between 2 5V and 5V for the 81150A is fix 2 5V for the 81160A e On the pattern mode screen press the Ext Input Setup softkey e 81150A only Press the Input Range softkey DIGital 1 2 SOURce EXTernal RANGe volts MINimum MAXimum When selecting external pattern source the impedance of the Modulation In connector can be selected between 50 and 10 kO e On the pattern mode screen press the Ext Input Setup softkey e Press the Impedance softkey DIGital 1 2 SOURce EXTernal IMPedance volts MINimum MAXimum Sample Mode Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions The sample mode defines how the 81150A 81160A is sampling the externally provided data stream In fixed sampling mode there is a fix relation between the sampling time and the rising edge of the TRIGGER OUT signal In automatic sampling mode the 81150A 81160A is searching for an initial transition and then samples at the configured data rate Transition search is being restarted after a certain time of inactivity at the input 155 Considerations for In external or pass through pattern mode the following considerations Sampling Mode with respect to sampling mode and frequency should be taken into account and Frequency e fyoucan control the data rate of your external data pattern source use the 81150A
198. e a unique address You can set the 81150A 81160A s address to any value between 0 and 30 The address is set to 10 when the 81150A 81160A is shipped from the factory The address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Your computer s GPIB interface card has its own address Be sure to avoid using the computer s address for any instrument on the interface bus Utility Press wed and then select the GPIB Address softkey from the 1 0 Interfaces menu There is no SCPI command to set the GPIB address 275 216 3 16 2 Introduction Setting up DHCP Auto IP Front Panel Operation DHCP Auto IP On Off LAN DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a protocol for automatically assigning a dynamic IP address to a device on a network DHCP is typically the easiest way to configure your Agilent 81150A 81160A for remote communication using the LAN interface DHCP Auto IP is On by default e Select DHCP Auto IP On to use DHCP to automatically assign an IP address If DHCP is not available then Auto IP will be used to assign the IP address e Select DHCP Auto IP Off if you want to manually assign an IP address using the IP Address softkey e The DHCP Auto IP setting is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Utility e Press and then the I 0 Interfaces softkey e Then sele
199. e inoperative and secured against unintended operation until they can be repaired by qualified service personnel Safety Symbols on Instruments AN Indicates warning or caution If you see this symbol on a product you must refer to the manuals for specific Warning or Caution information to avoid personal injury or damage to the product o Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 1993 UL 3101 3111 First Editions This equipment has also been evaluated to IEC 61010 edition 1 including amendments 1 and 2 Environmental Information General Recycling Mark for plastic parts used in Notice for European Community This product the product complies with the relevant European legal Directives EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC N1049 Conformity Mark of the Australian ACA for EMC compliance This product complies with the WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC marketing requirements The affixed label indicates that you must not discard this electrical electronic product in domestic household waste Product category With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE Directive Annexure this product is classed as a Monitoring and Control instrumentation product Do not dispose in domestic household waste To return unwanted products contact your local Agilent office or see www agilent com environment product
200. e last waveform period in the burst e In sweep mode the strobe output is a square waveform with 50 duty cycle The strobe signal goes high at the beginning of the sweep e In sweep mode with frequency marker ON the Strobe Out Singal goes high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the marker frequency e f modulation is enabled AM FM FSK PM PWM the Strobe Out Singal is the analog modulation waveform The Strobe Out Level can be selected on the Trigger Mode screen To Cont Trig display the Trigger Mode screen press either the mn ae OF Gated key depending on the trigger mode being used Then press the Strobe Out softkey to choose from TTL ECL 2V at Strobe Out Remote Interface Operation Features and Functions OUTPut 1 2 STRobe VOLTage TTL ECL SYM4vpp 3 2 18 Trigger Output Introduction Mode of Operation Front Panel Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 81150A One trigger output for each channel is provided on the front panel 81160A The Logical Trigger Signal is an internally generated signal that can be routed to the BNC connector of Sync Out A or Sync Out B For the two channel instrument the Logical Trigger Signal is generated for both channel 1 and channel 2 See chapter 3 2 19 Sync Output for more details If modulation is enabled AM FM PM PWM the Trigger Output has the frequency of the unmodulated carrier waveform with 50 duty cycle For FSK
201. e memory the load impedance is set to 50 Q default value when power has been off or after a remote interface reset assuming the Power On is set to default e f you specify a 50 Q termination but are actually terminating into an open circuit the actual output will be twice the value specified For example if you set the offset to 100 mVdc and specify a 50 Q load but are terminating the output into an open circuit the actual offset will be 200 mVdc Front Panel Load impedance is available on the function screens Operation Remote Interface The following function is used to configure the Load Impedance remotely Operation OUTPut 1 2 IMPedance EXTernal lt ohms gt MINimum MAX imum 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 111 112 3 2 7 Output Source Impedance Introduction Source Impedance Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A An impedance of 50 Q 5 Q is selectable 81160A The output source impedance is 50 Q fix The source impedance is stored in volatile memory it is set to 50 Q default value when power has been off or after a remote interface reset assuming Power On is set to default Output Impedance can be found on the Pulse Sine Square Ramp Arb Noise DC screens The following function is used to configure the output source impedance remotely 81150A only OUTput 1 2 IMPedance lt ohms gt MINimum MAXimum 3 2 8 Introduction
202. e not cleared when you read the register A query of a condition register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in that register An event register latches the various events from changes in the condition register There is no buffering in this register while an event bit is set subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored This is a read only register Once a bit is set it remains set until cleared by query command such as STAT QUES EVEN or a CLS clear status command A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in that register What is an Enable Register What are Transition Filters 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference An enable register defines which bits in the event register will be reported to the Status Byte register group You can write to or read from an enable register A CLS clear status command will not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register A STAT PRES command clears all bits in the enable register To enable bits in the enable register to be reported to the Status Byte register you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the corresponding bits Transition Filters are used to detect changes of the state in the condition register and set the corresponding bit in the event re
203. e the Trailing Edge remotely PULSe TRANsition 1 2 TRAi l or percentage MINimum MAXimum PULSe TRANsition 1 2 TRAi ing AUTO OFF ON ONC Ling lt seconds LH FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe TRANsition TRAiling AUTO OFF ON ONCE It is used to set the automatic coupling of the pulse trailing edge transition time to the leading edge transition time e ON The trailing edge transition time is automatically set to the same value as the leading edge and is updated automatically each time the leading edge transition time changes e OFF The trailing edge leading edge transition time is independently programmable e ONCE The trailing edge transition time is set ONCE to the same value as the leading edge The following function is used to set the unit for the remote programming of the leading and trailing edge times PULSe TRANsition 1 J2 UN IT S SI EC PCT The following function is used to set the coupling between transition times and the pulse width PULSe TRANsition 1 2 HOLD TIM 81150A and 81160A User s Guide E WRATio 147 148 Pattern cabability is an extension of Pulse functiontionality The standard pulse parameters frequency period leading edge amplitude offset high level low level load impedance output impedance and polarity with the exception of width and trailing edge are valid for pattern mode also This is fur
204. e to find them Gives an overview of the internal operations of the 81150A 81160A Terms and The following table lists the terms and conventions used in this manual conventions used in this manual Conventions o i iem NNNM B m Acronyms used in The following table lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual this manual Acronyms used in this Document DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 15 16 References The Getting Started Guide along with this manual forms a part of the 81150A and 81160A product documentation suite Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 2 Front Panel Menu Operation This section introduces the front panel menu and describes the menu features of the 81150A 81160A Pulse Pattern and Function Arbitrary Noise Generator 17 What s inside this The following topics are discussed in this section Chapter e The Front Panel e Help is Available e The Front Panel Display at a Glance Menu Mode Graph Mode e The Front Panel Number Entry e The Rear Panel e Preparing the 81150A 81160A for Use e Using the Built in Help System e Selecting the Mode of Operation e Selecting Trigger Mode e Selecting the Waveform e Selecting the Advanced Mode e Setting the Output Frequency e Setting the Output Amplitude e Selecting Delay e Selecting DC Volts e Setting a DC Offset Voltage e Setting the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave e Setting the High
205. echnologies
206. ed frequency amplitude and dc offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed This command preserves the current pulse width setting FUNC PULS WIDT command or pulse duty cycle setting FUNC PULS DCYC command depending on which has been selected to hold FUNC PULS HOLD command The edge time setting FUNC PULS TRAN LEAD FUNC PULS TRAN TRA command is also preserved APPL PULS 1MHz 1 0 0 1 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference APPL 1 2 RAMP APPLy 1 2 RAMP lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt Output a ramp wave with the specified frequency amplitude and dc offset This command overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 100 The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed APPL RAMP 4MHz 3 42 0 1 327 328 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example APPL 1 2 SIN APPLy 1 2 SINusoid lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt Output a sine wave with the specified frequency amplitude and dc offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed APPL1 SIN 120MHz 4 2 1 7 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference APPL 1 2 SQU APPL
207. ed with the waveform is not inverted Normal Inverted Normal Inverted Offset cM fo OV No Offset Voltage With Offset Voltage Front Panel Polarity is available on the Function screens Press the Polarity softkey Operation again to toggle between Normal and Inverted Polarity Remote Interface The following function is used to configure the waveform polarity remotely Operation OUTPut 1 2 POLarity NORMal INVerted 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 125 126 3 2 17 Strobe Output Introduction Mode of Operation Front Panel Operation 81150A One strobe output for each channel is provided on the front panel The strobe output signal provides different meanings depending on the mode of operation 81160A The Logical Strobe Signal is an internally generated signal that can be routed to the BNC connector of Sync Out A or Sync Out B For the two channel instrument the Logical Strobe Signal is generated for both channel 1 and channel 2 See chapter 3 2 19 Sync Output for more details f no advanced mode is selected the strobe output is a constant Low Level e f Burst mode is enabled the strobe output provides a signal indicating the duration of a burst The Strobe Out signal marks the start and the end of each burst of waveforms generated The rising edge of the Strobe Out signal is synchronized to the start of the first waveform period in a burst The falling edge is synchronized to the start of th
208. eed not set a subnet mask if DHCP is in use e Contact your network administrator to find out whether subnetting is being used and for the correct subnet mask e Enter the subnet mask using the numeric keypad not the knob e The subnet mask is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Utility e Press and then the I 0 Interfaces softkey e Then select LAN followed by IP Setup e By default DHCP is On Select DHCP Off if necessary Then select Subnet Mask e There is no SCPI command to set a subnet mask Features and Functions 3 16 5 Default Gateway LAN Introduction Setting up a default Gateway Front panel operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide A gateway is a network device that provides a connection between networks The default gateway setting is the IP address of such a device You need not set a gateway address if DHCP is in use Contact your network administrator to find out whether a gateway is being used and for the address Enter the gateway address using the numeric keypad not the knob The gateway address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Utility Press and then the 1 0 Interfaces softkey Then select LAN followed by IP Setup By default DHCP is On Select DHCP Off if necessary Then select Default Gateway There is no SCPI command to set a gateway
209. eform with a 100 Hz sine wave modulating waveform Pulse Press JC and then press the Frequency Delay Ampl Offset Width and Lead Edge and Trail Edge softkeys to configure the carrier waveform For this example select a 1 kHz pulse waveform with an amplitude of 1 Vpp a 0 V offset a pulse width of 500 us and a lead edge of 70 ns and trail edge of 20 ns Mod Press kd PWM is the only modulation type for Pulse Notice that a status message PWM by Sine is shown in the status line PWM by Sine Continuous Continuous PWM PWM Width PWM MORE Source Deviation Frequency 1 of 2 Set the width deviation Set the modulating frequency Select the modulating waveform shape View the waveform 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Front Panel Menu Operation Press the Width Deviation softkey and set the value to 400 us using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys Press the PWM Frequency softkey and then set the value to 5 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys Press the PWM Shape softkey to select the shape of the modulating waveform For this example select a sine wave At this point the 81150A 81160A outputs a PWM waveform with the specified modulation parameters if the output is enabled Graph Press to view the waveform and parameters Graph To turn off the Graph Mode press asc again 5 000 Hz 400 0 i ALUILILLI LIS Tk To really view the PWM wavefor
210. eir RST values Destroys all user defined state information user defined arbitrary waveforms and user defined I O settings such as the IP address The built in arbitrary waveforms are not affected and the VOLATILE waveform persists until the power is turned off This command is typically used to clear all memory before removing the instrument from a secure area This command is not recommended for use in routine applications because of the possibility of unintended loss of data SYST SEC IMM 513 514 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example SYST SET SYSTem SET block data In query form the command reads a block of data containing the instrument s complete set up The set up information includes all parameter and mode settings but does not include the contents of the instrument setting memories the status group registers or the DISPlay WINDow STATe The data is in a binary format not ASCII and cannot be edited In set form the block data must be a complete instrument set up read using the query form of the command This command has the same functionality as the LRN command SYST SET Response 527576 Remote Programming Reference Command SYST TEST Long S5YSTem TEST Parameters PON NORMal ALL Parameter Suffix B Description Execute the selftest and report the result e PON This does not execute any test b
211. emory The default selection is EXP RISE The Example below shows how to use the DATA COPY command to copy the VOLATILE waveform into named storage ARB 1 Lr DATA COPY ARB 1 VOLATILI Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DATA 1 2 DAC DATA 1 2 DAC VOLATILE binary block value value value Download binary or decimal integer values from 8191 to 8191 into volatile memory You can download from 1 to Samplemax points per waveform in IEEE 488 2 binary block format or as a list of values 81150A Samplemax 524288 512 k 81160A 1 channel Samplemax 262144 256 k 81160A 2 channels Samplemax 131072 128 k The range of values corresponds to the values available using internal 14 bit DAC Digital to Analog Converter codes The instrument takes the specified number of points and expands them to fill waveform memory If you download less than 16 384 16K points a waveform with 16 384 points is automatically generated If you download more than 16 384 16 384 points a Samplema point waveform is generated The values 8191 and 8191 correspond to the peak values of the waveform if the offset is 0 volts For example if you set the output amplitude to 10 Vpp 8191 corresponds to 5 V and 8191 corresponds to 5 V The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points
212. equest you must write a decimal value to the register using the SRE command Bit Definitions Status Byte Register Po Wwe Do jWUm RRam d 2 merum a One or more ror are sired m tne Enor Ousus 3 Questionable Data One or more bits are set in the Questionable Data Register bits must be enabled 4 Message Available ies Data is available in the instrument s output buffer 5 Standard Event 32 One or more bits are set in the Standard Event Register 6 Master Summary e One or more bits are set in the Status Byte Register 7 Not Used 128 One or more bits set in the Operation Data Register 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 581 582 4 7 3 Command 4 7 4 Introduction STATus Commands The PRESet command is an event that configures the SCPI and device dependant status data structures The mandatory mechanism is defined in part by the IEEE 488 2 STATus PRESet It clears all status group event registers Presets the status group enables PTR and NTR registers as follows ENABle 0x0000 PTR Oxffff NTR 0x0000 STATus Questionable Data Register command subsystem The Questionable Data register group provides information about the quality or integrity of the instrument Any or all of these conditions can be reported to the Questionable Data summary bit through the enable register The 81150A 81160A has two levels of error reporting mechanism called warnings and errors Checking for warni
213. er Mode Triggered Function Pulse Square Sine Ramp Noise Arb Arming Source MAN Key External In Internal Advanced Mode None Burst Sweep Trigger Mode Gated Function Pulse Square Sine Ramp Noise Arb Arming Source MAN Key External In Advanced Mode None Burst Sweep Continuous 34 Continuous starts the next waveform cycle immediately after the previous one has finished This is used for a continuous waveform burst sweep or modulation The external input is not used in continuous mode External Triggered External Gated Internal Triggered 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Front Panel Menu Operation Triggered generates exactly one signal when the trigger condition is met In the external trigger mode the 81150A 81160A will accept a hardware trigger applied to the front panel External In connector The 81150A 81160A initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time External In receives a pulse with the specified edge To select the external source follow these steps Tri e Press the E key on the front panel e Press Source softkey to select External In as the source Upon pressing the Source softkey while the highlight is on the trigger source the instrument allows you to choose one of the available trigger sources The value can also be changed by turning the Rotary Knob To specify whether the 81150A 81160A triggers on the rising or falling edge follow these steps e Press the nx ke
214. er Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PM 1 2 EXT RANG SOURCI LH PM 1 2 EXTernal RANGe lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Specifies the voltage range of the modulation input If you try to program any other value it will be rounded to one of the specified values either 2 5V or 5V Setting the input voltage range to 2 5 5 selects 2 5V 5V as full range input voltage range PM EXT RANG 5 0 401 402 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PM 1 2 INT FREQ SOURCE PM 1 2 INTernal FREQuency CW FIXed lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PM 1 2 SOUR INT command The PM 1 2 INT FREQ query returns the internal modulating frequency in Hertz It doesn t apply if INT2 is selected PM INT FREQ 1 2 MHZ Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PM 1J2 INT FUNC SOURCI LH PM 1 2 INTernal FUNCtion SHApe SlNusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PM 1 2 SO
215. er the license code using the numerical keypad and confirm the input by pressing the Enter softkey Product No 81150A Serial No O Channels 2 Software Rey 2 0 0 2 Hardware Rey 0 Installed Options none Continuous Continuous 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 289 290 Product No 81150A Serial No O Channels 2 Software Rev 2 0 0 2 Hardware Rev 0 Installed Options none Continuous Continuous 2158 0000 0000 Features and Functions 3 19 Diagnostics Calibration Overview Introduction Self Calibration includes 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The 81150A 81160A provides a self calibration functionality The diagnostics screen allows to review the power on messages to execute the instruments self test standard extended and to perform the self calibration All cables need to be disconnected before executing the extended self test or self calibration e Levels at normal and inverted outputs e 81150A only Levels at Trigger Out e 81150A only Levels at Strobe Out e 81160A only Levels at Sync Out e Sensitivity of External In e Input voltage window and OV level at Modulation In 291 292 Front Panel Operation Power On Results Performing Selftest Performing Extended Selftest Press and then the System softkey and then press the Diagnostics softkey The Diagnostics screen contains the following e Power On Messages e Selftest e Extended Selftest e Calibration
216. eric keypad to enter numbers and the menu softkeys to select units Use the Rotary knob and cursor keys to modify the displayed number 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 21 22 Inputs Outputs Special Function Keys The major inputs and outputs of the instrument are available at the front panel The external input EXTERNAL IN can be used to connect an external arming source triggered or gated modes The trigger signal TRIGGER OUT marks the start of the pulse period or of parts of a pattern see Mode Trigger Screen You can set the output levels according to the used technology TTL and ECL or enter test specific values Trigger Out is available as a physical BNC connector at the 81150A For the 81160A a Logical Trigger Signal is generated for channel 1 and channel 2 internally and is routed to the physical BNC connector Sync Out A and or Sync Out B using a configurable switch matrix The strobe signal STROBE OUT marks beginning and end of a burst in Burst mode Strobe Out is available as a physical BNC connector at the 81150A For the 81160A a Logical Strobe Signal is generated for channel one and channel 2 internally and is routed to the physical BNC connector Sync Out A and or Sync Out B using a configurable switch matrix 81160A only The sync signal SYNC OUT outputs the Logical Trigger Signal and or the Logical Strobe Signal at the front panel BNC connector The instrument offers full flexibility how
217. ern Name softkey If you just change the name you will effectively overwrite whatever has been stored in this location before Store the pattern in VOLATILE memory in one of the internal non volatile storage locations using the given name for the pattern D IGital 1 2 COPY name VOLATILE 167 168 Delete a Stored Pattern Front Panel After selecting the Edit Pattern softkey press the Delete Stored softkey to Operation delete a pattern Press DELETE to delete a stored user defined pattern as shown in the following image Internal Pattern Memory Number of Levels 3 Length 32 PREVIEW o oae noon rn nara USER 1 lt User defined USER 2 Empty USER3 USER4 Continuous Continuous Delete selected pattern nni mun ss mum Remote Interface Delete a pattern from the internal non volatile storage locations Operation DIGital 1 2 DELete lt name gt Features and Functions 3 5 6 Bitshape Selection Introduction If the bit shape parameter on the pattern setup screen is set to Arbitrary it is possible to select a predefined or use a userdefined waveform that defines the shape of a bit The screens operate similar to the standard Arb mode For details on arbitrary bit shapes refer to section Defining the Shape of a Bit Front Panel After selecting the Pattern Setup softkey on the Pulse screen press MORE Operation 1 of 2 and then press the Bit Shape softkey to choose f
218. ers and the period delimiters using the keypad Use the left cursor key as a backspace key 85 86 Set the Subnet Mask Set the Default Gateway Exit the IP Setup menu The subnet mask is required if your network has been divided into subnets Ask your network administrator whether a subnet mask is needed and for the correct mask Press the Subnet Mask softkey and enter the subnet mask in the IP address format using the keypad The gateway address is the address of a gateway which is a device that connects two networks Ask your network administrator whether a gateway is in use and for the correct address Press the Default Gateway softkey and enter the gateway address in the IP address format using the keypad Press Back to return to the LAN menu DHCP Auto IP IP Address Subnet Mask 25 Def Gateway Continuous Continuous Subnet Mask IP Address Front Panel Menu Operation Configure the DNS DNS Domain Name Service is an Internet service that translates domain Setup optional names into IP addresses Ask your network administrator whether DNS is in use and if it is ask for the host name and DNS server address to use Steps e Start at the LAN menu e Press the DNS Setup softkey to display the Host Name field Host Name Domain Name DNS Serveri nie domain com 254 0 254 0 3 t ee WW A Ch 9 wo 3 DNS Server2 WINS Server1 WINS Server2 wO ans O ND
219. es Clearing both filters disables event reporting The contents of transition filters are unchanged by CLS and RST STAT QUES NTR 4 STAT QUES NTR H4 STAT QUES NTR B100 STAT QUES NTR Response 4 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide STAT QUES PTR STATus QUI Remote Programming Reference EStionable PTRansition Set or queries the positive transition register in the questionable status group A positive transition filter allows an event to be reported when a condition changes from false to true Setting both positive negative filters true allows an event to be reported anytime the condition changes Clearing both filters disables event reporting The contents of transition filters are unchanged by CLS and RST STAT QUES PTR 15 STAT QUES PTR HF STAT QUES PTR 4017 STAT QUES PTR B1111 STAT QUES PTR Response 15 489 490 4 5 12 Introduction Sweep Commands In the frequency sweep mode the instrument steps from the start frequency to the stop frequency at a sweep rate which you specify You can sweep up or down in frequency and with either linear or logarithmic spacing You can also configure the instrument to output a single sweep one pass from start frequency to stop frequency by applying an external or manual trigger The instrument can produce a frequency sweep for sine squ
220. es makes this Pulse Function Arbitrary Noise Generator a versatile solution for your testing requirements now and in the future e 81150A 1 uHz 120 MHz pulse generation with variable rise fall time e 81150A 1 iHz 240 MHz sine waveform outputs e 81160A 1 uHz 330 MHz pulse generation with variable rise fall time e 81160A 1 iuHz 500 MHz sine waveform outputs Pulse sine square ramp noise and arbitrary waveforms e FM AM PM FSK PWM modulation capability e One or two channels e 81150A 14 bit 2GSa s 512 KSa deep arbitrary waveform memory per channel e 81160A 14 bit 2 5GSa s up to 256 KSa deep arbitrary waveform memory per channel e USB GPIB and LAN connectivity e Glitch free change of timing parameters delay frequency transition time width duty cycle e LXI class C compliant The 81150A 81160A features a graphic display showing all pulse parameters at a glance The cursor keys and the modify knob allow fast and simple operation The user interface is designed to minimize the time invested in getting familiar with the instrument After familiarization the instrument supports quick setups of signals This leaves you free to concentrate on the measurement task and testing of the DUT 13 What s inside this This manual provides detailed information about the following Manual e Front Panel Menu Operation e Features and Functions e Remote Programming Reference e Error Messages e Application Programs e Tut
221. eshold of each edge The FUNC 1 2 PULS TRAN query returns the edge time in seconds The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width FUNC2 PULS TRAN 6 7NS 443 444 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FUNC 1 2 PULS TRAN HOLD SOURce FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe TRANsition HOLDI TIME WRATio It s used to set the coupling between transition times and the pulse width TIME WRATio FUNC2 PULS TRAN HOLD TIME The absolute transition times are held when the pulse width is varied The ratio of transition time to pulse width is held when the pulse width is varied Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FUNC 1 2 PULS TRAN TRA SOURce FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe TRANsition TRAiling NR3 MINimum MAXimum Set the edge time in seconds for the trailing edges The edge time represents the time from the 90 threshold to the 10 threshold of each edge The FUNC 1 2 PULS TRAN TRA query returns the edge time in seconds FUNC2 PULS TRAN TRA 12 4NS 445 446 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FUNC 1 2 PULS TRAN TRA AUTO SOURCE FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe TRANsition TRAiling AUTO OFF ON ONCE It s used to set the automatic coupling of
222. et service that translates Domain names into IP addresses The DNS server address is the IP address of a server that performs this service Contact your network administrator to find out whether DNS is being used and for the correct DNS server address Enter the address using the numeric keypad not the knob The DNS server address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Utility Press and then the 1 0 Interfaces softkey Then select LAN followed by DNS Setup Then select DNS Server 1 or DNS Server 2 There is no SCPI command to set a DNS server address Features and Functions 3 16 9 WINS Server LAN Introduction Setting up a WNS Server address Set the WINS Server address 81150A and 81160A User s Guide WINS Windows Internet Naming Service is an Internet service that translates Host names to IP addresses The WNS server address is the IP address of a server that performs this service e Contact your network administrator to find out whether WINS is being used and for the correct WINS server address e Enter the address using the numeric keypad not the knob e The WINS server address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Press the WINS Server softkey and enter the address of the WINS server there are two DNS Server addresses in the IP address format using the ke
223. et the number of seconds required to sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency The default is 1 second The SWE 1 2 TIME query returns the sweep time in seconds SWE2 TIME 3 Remote Programming Reference 4 5 13 System Related Commands Introduction System Instrument related commands 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 501 502 System Related Commands Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example SYST BEEP SYSTem BE EPer Issue a single beep immediately SYST BEEP Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference SYST BEEP STAT SYSTem BEEPer STATe ON OFF Disable or enable the tone heard when an error is generated from the front panel or over the remote interface The current selection is stored in non volatile memory The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON SYST BEEP STAT ON 503 504 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example SYST DATE SYSTem DATE lt years gt lt month gt lt day gt Queries or sets the date of the internal clock of the instrument SYST DATE Response 2007 5 14 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example
224. evel 2 Characteristics Channel addition is performed internally in the digital data generation before the DAC and simply adds the two digital values of both channels in order to calculate the digital value which is fed to the DAC of channel 1 Front panel Utility Operation Press the key Output Setup softkey and then Channel Add softkey Choose from Separate Channels or Added at Output 1 Amplifier Type max Bandwidth Amplifier Range Automatic Range Channel Add Voltage Limits Off High Limit 10 00 Y Low Limit 10 00 V Continuous OLIT1 Ch 1 Ch 2 Continuous Added at Output 1 Amplifier Amplifier Ty pe Range Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 115 3 2 11 Introduction Charactersitics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 116 High Volt Low Volt Ex Limit Limit us Voltage Limits The voltage limits limits the range that can be set by software but does not apply some kind of programmable hardware limits in the amplifier Use the voltage limits for the level parameters to prevent accidental damage of the device under test After you switch on the limits the level parameters on the function screens cannot be adjusted outside the range specified as voltage limits if the output is switched on ress the key Output Setup and then Voltage Limits softkey To enable disable the Voltage Limits press the Voltage Limits softkey again High Volt Limit is used to set the m
225. evel signals simulate single and repeated glitches simulate overshoot and undershoot Remote Programming Reference Channel Commands Command CHAN MATH Long CHANnel1 MATH Parameters OFF PLUS Parameter Suffix Description It is used to enable or disable channel addition in an instrument with two channel installed The output signal generated by channel 2 will be added to the signal of channel 1 The corresponding signal will be provided by channel 1 Example CHAN MATH PLUS 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 417 418 4 5 7 Introduction Output Commands The SCPI OUTPut subsystem controls the characteristics of the source s outputs Remote Programming Reference Output Commands Command OUT 1 2 Long 0OUTput 1 2 NORMal STATe Parameters 0 1 OFF ON Parameter Suffix Description Disable or enable the corresponding front panel Output connector The default is OFF When the output is enabled the corresponding key is illuminated on the instrument s front panel The OUTP 1 2 query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The APPLy command overrides the current OUTP command setting and automatically enables the Output connector ON If an excessive external voltage is applied to the front panel Output connector an error message will be displayed and the output will be disabled To re enable the output remove the overload from the Output connector and send the OUTP 1
226. evel specified by the offset parameter You can set the dc voltage to any value between 5 Vdc into 50 ohms or 10 Vdc into an open circuit or depending o voltage is output as soon as the co n the selected amplifier type The dc mmand is executed The frequency and amplitude parameters have no effect for this command but you must specify a value or DI If you specify a frequency and amp EFault litude they have no effect on the dc output but the values are remembered when you change to a different function APPL DC DEF DEF 2 5 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference APPL 1 2 NOIS APPLy 1 2 NOISe frequency DEFault gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt Output Gaussian noise with the specified amplitude and dc offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed The frequency parameter has no effect for this command but you must specify a value or D EFault If you specify a frequency it has no effect on the noise output but the value is remembered when you change to a different function APPL NOIS DEF 5 0 2 0 325 326 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example APPL 1 2 PULS APPLy 1 2 PULSe lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt Output a pulse wave with the specifi
227. f the VISA function calls used in the previous example programs For more detailed explanation of VISA functionality see Agilent IO Libraries Suite Programming with VISA visa h ViSession viOpenDefaultRM viOpen viPrintf viScanf viClose viSerAttribute This file is included at the beginning of the file to provide the function prototypes and constants defined by VISA The ViSession is a VISA type data type Each program that will establish a communication channel must be defined as ViSession You must first open a session with the default resource manager This function establishes a communication channel with the device specified This call must be made for each device you will be using These are the VISA formatted C like 1 0 functions This function must be used to close each session All allocated data structures that had been allocated for the session will be deallocated This function is used to change attributes of an active ViSession Introduction Warning 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 5 Error Messages The 81150A 81160A has two levels of error reporting called warnings and errors Checking for errors and warnings is always enabled unless you switch off the output s A warning is generated when the output signal could be invalid due to a combination of worst case uncertainties at the current settings of all relevant parameters For example when adjusting the pulse wi
228. forming a voltage divider with the load resistance Agilent 81150A 81150A Output Amplitude Control Impedance Load Impedance 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Tutorial As a convenience you can specify the load impedance as seen by the function generator and thereby display the correct load voltage If the actual load impedance is different than the value specified the displayed amplitude offset and high low levels will be incorrect Variations in source resistance are measured and taken into account during an instrument calibration Therefore the accuracy of the load voltage depends primarily on the accuracy of the load resistance as shown below R AV Rp RG L S where Rs is either 50Q or 5O for the 81150A Rs is 50Q for the 81160A 635 636 7 10 Attributes of AC Signals Introduction Peak Voltage The most common ac signal is a sine wave In fact any periodic signal can be represented as the sum of different sine waves The magnitude of a sine wave is usually specified by its peak peak to peak or root mean square RMS value All of these measures assume that the waveform has zero offset voltage Vpeak Vrms 0 707 Vpeak Vpk Pk r 1 Attributes of AC Signals The peak voltage of a waveform is the maximum absolute value of all points in the waveform The peak to peak voltage is the difference between the maximum and minimum The RMS v
229. frequency Set the FSK shift rate Continuous Continuous FSK Press the Hop Freq softkey and then set the value to 500 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and arrow keys Press the FSK Rate softkey and then set the value to 100 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and arrow keys At this point the 81150A 81160A outputs an FSK waveform if the output is enabled Modulation Type FSk Source Internal FSK Rate FSK Internal Continuous Continuous 108 000 Hz Modulation K Type Source Hop Frequency Front Panel Menu Operation View the waveform foran Press nel to view the waveform parameters To turn off the Graph Mode press again 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 69 70 2 26 Outputting a PWM Waveform Introduction Select the carrier waveform parameters Select PWM You can configure the 81150A 81160A to output a pulse width modulated PWM waveform The Agilent 81150A 81160A provides PWM for pulse carrier waveforms and PWM is the only type of modulation supported for pulse waveforms In PWM the pulse width or duty cycle of the carrier waveform is varied according to the modulating waveform You can specify either a pulse width and width deviation or a pulse duty cycle and duty cycle deviation the deviation to be controlled by the modulating waveform For this example you will specify a pulse width and pulse width deviation for a 1 kHz pulse wav
230. frequency amplitude and offset voltage settings The FUNC 1 2 query returns SIN SQU RAMP PULS NOIS DC or USER without If you select USER the instrument outputs the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the FUNC 1 2 USER command SINusoid Output a sine wave sQUare Output a square wave RAMP Output a ramp wave PULSe Output a pulse wave NOISe Output Gaussian noise DC Output a dc voltage USER Output the arbitrary waveform FUNC1 SIN 435 436 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FUNC 1 2 NOIS PDF SOURce FUNCtion 1 2 NOISe PDFunction USER PDF1 PDF2 PDF3 PDF4 Selects a Probability Density Function PDF that specifies a Gaussian distribution of amplitude values in the memory The following table shows how the above mentioned parameters match to the pre defined crest factors of noise Parameter Indicates a crest factor of PDF1 3 1 PDF2 48 PDF3 6 0 PDF4 7 0 FUNC2 NOIS PDF4 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FUNC 1 2 PULS DCYC SOURCe FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe DCYCle NR3 MINimum MAXimum PCT Set the pulse duty cycle in percent The pulse duty cycle is defined as Duty Cycle 100 X Pulse Width Period where the pulse width represent
231. g Reference PWM 1 2 EXT RANG SOURCE PWM 1 2 EXTernal RANGe lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Specifies the input voltage range of the modulation input If you try to program any other value it will be rounded to one of the specified values either 2 5V or 5V Setting the input voltage range to 2 5 5 selects 2 5V 5V as full range input voltage range PWM EXT RANG 10 0V 411 412 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PWM 1 2 INT FREQ SOURCE PHM 1 2 INTernal FREQuency CW FIXed NR3 MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PWM 1 2 SOUR INT command The PWM 1 2 INT FREQ query returns the internal modulating frequency in Hertz It does not apply if INT2 is selected PWM INT FREQ 5 5 MHZ Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PWM 1 2 INT FUNC SOURCE PWM 1 2 INTernal FUNCtion SHAPe SlNusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRlangle NOISe USER Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PWM 1 2 SOUR INT command The carrier must be a pulse waveform for PWM The default is SIN The PWM
232. gilent software components and associated commands but they will not modify these samples to provide added functionality or construct procedures to meet your specific needs Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 7 Tutorial In order to achieve the best performance from the Agilent 81150A 81160A it may be helpful for you to gain a better understanding of the internal operations of the instrument This chapter describes basic signal generation concepts and gives specific details on the internal operations of the 81150A 81160A This chapter explains the following e Direct Digital Synthesis e Creating Arbitrary Waveforms e Pulse Waveform Generation e Pattern Generation e Trigger Modes e External In to Trigger Out Timing e Signal Imperfections e Output Amplitude Control e Attributes of AC Signals e Modulation e Frequency Sweep e Burst e Channel Addition e Coupling between Channels You can use an arbitrary waveform generator in a variety of applications where it might be otherwise difficult or impossible to generate complex output waveforms With an arbitrary waveform generator signal imperfections such as rise time ringing glitches noise and random timing variations can be easily simulated in a controlled manner Physics chemistry biomedicine electronics mechanics and other fields can benefit from the versatility of an arbitrary waveform generator Wherever things vibrate pump pulse bubble
233. gister You can set transition filter bits to detect positive transitions PTR negative transitions NTR or both Transition filters are read write registers They are not affected by CLS 579 4 7 1 Status register structure Introduction The 81150A 81160A has a status reporting system conforming to IEEE 488 2 and SCPI The figure below shows the status group available in the instrument QUEStionable Status Register Voltage Warning Current Warning Timing Warning Error Queue Frequency Warning OMONDORWNM O PLL Unlocked Warning Not Used Status Byte Register OPERation Status Register 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 9 Not Used Standard Event Status Register Operation Complete Query Error Device Depending Error Execution Error Command Error Power ON NOoORWM O 580 Remote Programming Reference 4 7 2 Status Byte Register Introduction The Status Byte summary register reports conditions from the other status registers Data that is waiting in the instrument s output buffer is immediately reported on the Message Available bit bit 4 for example Clearing an event register from one of the other register groups will clear the corresponding bits in the Status Byte condition register Reading all messages from the output buffer including any pending queries will clear the Message Available bit To set the enable register mask and generate an SRO service r
234. gt MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the FSK alternate or hop frequency The FSK 1 2 FREQ Query returns the hop frequency in Hertz FSK1 FREO 5MHZ Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FSKey 1 2 INT RATE SOURCE FSKey 1 2 INTernal RATE NR3 MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier and hop frequency The FSK 1 2 RATE query returns the FSK rate in Hertz The FSK rate is only used when the Internal source is selected FSK 1 2 SOUR INT command and is ignored when the external source is selected FSK SOUR 1 2 EXT command FSK1 INT RATE 10HZ 395 396 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FSKey 1 2 SOURCe SOURCE FSKey 1 2 SOURce INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal Select an INTernal or EXTernal FSK source The default is INT 1 The FSK 1 2 SOUR query returns INT INT2 or EXT When the INTernall source is selected the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and hop frequency is determined by the FSK rate specified FSK INT RATE command INT2 selects the other channel of the instrument if available When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signa
235. guage Version Query sse 273 Remote Interface Configuration tentent tenentes 274 3161 GPIB AdUIeSS oorr nere nter et men 275 3 16 2 DHCP Auto IP On Off LAN tette 216 3 16 3 IP Address LAN ccccscsscssssssssessesssssssesssssssssssssessessesseeseessasssesseeseessessanssteseesseneeneenss 271 3 16 4 Subnet Mask LAN sse tenete tenente tenentes 278 3 16 5 Default Gateway LAN sse tnter 279 316 6 Host N mie a555as565ds3569d2ondesodassdodedaendadadosodadagogodad 280 3 16 7 Domain Name LAN tenente tnnt 281 3 16 8 DNS Server LAN tentent tenete tenente tenen 282 3 16 9 WINS Server LAN tenete tnnt 283 3 16 10 Current Configuration LAN sssssseseennenntntnn tnn 285 Software Update oou iE nain nn Erbe e E ane RE ER 287 Installing Licenses tette tnter tenens 289 Contents 3 19 Diagnostics Calibration Overview ssssssssssseeeenenrete tenente nennen 291 3 207 SECU nostetiethenate nitate S 294 3 21 Factory Default Settings sss nnne tentent nettes 295 4 Remote Programming RefereliGe sisse cono eic e c cn circ iav nr crei 301 4 1 Agilent 81150A 81160A Remote Control sse 301 4 1 1 Programming RecommMendationS cccccccssescsescsescssescsssssssssssssscssssessseseeesseesesees 302 4 2 81150A 81160A SCPI Command Summary essent 304 4 3 Common Command Summary sese tette tnter tn
236. he parameters 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 149 150 3 5 1 Pattern Mode Introduction This parameter enables the pattern mode The Pattern Mode can be set to On Off Front Panel After selecting the Pattern Setup softkey press the Pattern Mode softkey to Operation enable or disable pattern mode Pattern Setup Pattern Mode Pattern Source Internal Pattern Name PRBS 11 Bit Shape Arbitr Bit Waveform CAP 2 Continuous Continuous Pattern Remote Interface DIGital 1 2 ON OFF Operation Features and Functions 3 5 2 Pattern Source Introduction The pattern source can be Internal External When selecting the internal pattern source the 81150A 81160A does generate the pattern internally either algorithmically or from memory Additionally it is possible to provide an externally generated data stream at MOD IN for re shaping by the 81150A 81160A To do this select the external pattern source For details on external pattern refer to the External Patterns section Front Panel After selecting the Pattern Setup softkey press the Pattern Source softkey Operation e The Pattern Source can be Internal or External e fthe Pattern Source is Internal one of the built in or user defined patterns or a PRBS can be selected e Ifthe Pattern Source is External the pattern data is supplied on the MOD IN connector on the rear panel of the 81150A 81160A Pattern Setup Pattern Mode Off Pattern Source
237. her value it will be rounded to one of the specified values either 2 5V or DV Setting the input voltage range to 2 5 5 selects 2 5V 5V as full range input voltage range FM2 EXT RANG 5 0 385 386 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FM 1 2 INT FREO SOURCE FM 1 2 INTernal FREQuency CW FIXed NR3 MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected FM 1 2 SOUR INT command The FM 1 2 INT FREQ query returns the internal modulating frequency in Hertz It doesn t apply if INT2 is selected FM2 INT FREQ 20KHZ Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FM 1 I2 INT FUNC SOURCI LH FM 1 2 INTernal FUNCtion SlNusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PM 1 2 SOUR INT command You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform The default is SIN The FM 1J2 INT FUNC Query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRI NOIS or USER e Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty cyc
238. his allows the 81150A 81160A to adjust its sampling point Sequences of identical bits might be stretched or shortened depending on the relationship of pattern frequency and 81150A 81160A frequency but bit sequences in between idles are passed through correctly This mode is intended for packet oriented serial data transmissions such as FlexRay or CAN You can use NRZ or arbitrary bitshapes as well as AM or PM modulation in this case but you have to be aware that there is no fixed delay through the 81150A 81160A in Automatic sampling mode e Depending on your application you can choose the 81150A 81160A frequency to be significantly higher e g 10 times the data rate of your external pattern signal In this case you have a sampling uncertainty e g 1 10 of a unit interval but you have a reduced delay and you can still adjust amplitude offset of the re generated signal Transition time adjustment or arbitrary bitshapes are limited to one period of the 81150A 81160A frequency e g 1 10 of a unit interval Features and Functions Front Panel e On the pattern mode screen press the Ext Input Setup softkey Operation e Press the Sample Mode softkey Remote Interface DIGital 1 2 SOURce EXTernal SAMPling Operation AUTO FIXed Number of Levels Introduction Defines the number of levels that have to be detected in the provided external pattern signal Allowed values are 2 and 3 levels Front Panel e On
239. ignificant bit LSB the equivalent noise level is 86 dBc for a sine wave that uses the full DAC range 16 384 levels Similarly finite length waveform memory leads to phase quantization errors Treating these errors as low level phase modulation and assuming a uniform distribution over a range of 0 5 LSB the equivalent noise level is 76 dBc for a sine wave that is 16K samples long All of the 81150A 81160A s standard waveforms use the entire DAC range and are 16K samples in length Any arbitrary waveforms that use less than the entire DAC range or that are specified with fewer than 16 384 points will exhibit proportionally higher relative quantization errors Tutorial 1 9 Output Amplitude Control Introduction The Agilent 81150A and 81160A uses a variable reference voltage to control the signal amplitude over a 1dB range As shown in the simplified block diagram below the output of the waveform DAC goes through an anti aliasing filter An adjustable alternator dB to 62dB is used to control the output amplitude in 1dB steps over a wide range of amplitude values 10 mVpp to 10 Vpp Variable Waveform Anti Aliasing High Bandwidth Low Bandwidth Vret DAC Filter Attenuator Amplifier Amplifier 0 to 60 dB e Switching Main gt ER in 1 dB Steps EN Circuitry Output AN 9 DC Offset DAC Output Amplitude Control of 81150A The 81160A has one amplifier
240. il cleared by this command or CLS command A query of the register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register STATus QUEStionable CONDition Reads the condition register in the questionable status group It s a read only register and bits are not cleared when you read the register A query of the register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register STATus QUEStionable ENABle Sets or queries the enable register in the questionable status group The selected bits are then reported to the Status Byte A CLS will not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register To enable bits in the enable register you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits you wish to enable in the register STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Sets or queries the negative transition register in the questionable status group A negative transition filter allows an event to be reported when a condition changes from true to false Setting both positive negative filters true allows an event to be reported anytime the condition changes Clearing both filters disable event reporting The contents of transition filters are unchanged by CLS and RST STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Set or queries the positive transition register in the questionable status
241. iled update from such memory devices e USB memory devices that are formatted as a super floppy are not supported and hence will not be recognized by the instrument 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 287 Front Panel Operation 288 e Press E and then the System softkey Then press the Configuration softkey to reach the Software Update screen e Press the Software Update softkey for instructions on how to update the instrument with the latest software This is shown below in the second screen Product No 81150A Serial No DE1234567 Channels 2 Software Rev 0 22 2623 14561 Hardware Rey 0 Continuous Continuous Software Update Current Sw Rev 0 22 2623 14561 Continuous Continuous Features and Functions 3 18 Installing Licenses Introduction Some of the features of the 81150A 81160A are enabled by additional software licenses Installed licenses are being displayed on the system configuration screen Additional licenses can be installed by entering the license code that is provided by Agilent Technologies when ordering a specific license Licenses are not transferable from one instrument to another one For pattern Generation of 81150A 81160A a software license is available Front Panel Utility i e Press ERE and then the System softkey Then press the Operation Configuration softkey to reach the Software License screen e Press the Software License softkey for entering the license code Ent
242. imum 205 206 3 9 6 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Phase Deviation The phase deviation setting represents the peak variation in phase of the modulated waveform from the carrier waveform The phase deviation can be set from 0 to 360 degrees The default is 180 degrees Since a 360 degree phase deviation is equivalent to 0 degrees the maximum effective deviation setting is 180 degrees After enabling PM press the Phase Deviation softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation PM 1 2 DEViation lt deviation in degrees gt MINimum MAXimum Features and Functions 3 9 7 Modulating Source Introduction Modulating Source Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel Internal or External The default is Internal If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The phase deviation is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the deviation to 180 degrees then a 2 5V 5V signal level corresponds to a 180 degree phase shift Lower external signal levels produce
243. ines the repetition rate and randomness of the output signal Due to the huge virtual address range the generated noise signal repeats after approximately 26 days Triggered Noise Gated Noise Mode PDF User defined Noise distribution Tutorial In triggered mode the random address generation will be reset to its start condition whenever the trigger event occurs This allows to generate the same random noise sequence again without the need to wait for the repetition time to elapse In gated mode the output signal will be blanked when the gate signal is inactive The noise source will continue generating random addresses while the output signal is blanked Address generation will not be reset on the inactive to active transition of the gate signal The Agilent 81150A 81160A has four built in probability density functions PDF to generate noise signals with a crest factor of 3 1 4 8 6 0 and 7 0 When generating one of the built in distributions the noise generation uses a virtual address that is 46 bit wide and that is mapped to the 19 bit values of the 81150A address bus of the sample memory When generating noise with a user defined distribution the random address generation is connected directly to the sample memory as shown below Address Data 19 bits Waveform DAC Random Sample Digital Address Memory Filter Generation FIR 81150A and 8
244. is used for amplitude offset and high low level settings You can set the load to any value from 0 3Q to 1MQ MIN selects from 0 30 MAX selects 1MQ The default is 50Q OUTP1 LOAD 50 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference OUTP 1 2 POL OUTPut 1 2 NORMal POLarity NORMal INVerted Invert the waveform relative to the offset voltage In the normal mode default the waveform goes positive during the first part of the cycle In the inverted mode the waveform goes negative during the first part of the cycle The OUP 1 2 POL query returns NORM or INV The waveform is inverted relative to the offset voltage Any offset voltage present will remain unchanged when the waveform is inverted 0UTP2 POL Response INV 423 424 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example OUTP 1 2 ROUT OUTPut 1 2 ROUTe SELect HlVoltage HIBandwith Choose from the two available amplifier types e First type HlVoltage runs 0 MHz 50 MHz 10V e The second type HIBandwidth runs 0 MHz 240 MHz 5V 0UP2 ROUT HIB Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference OUTP 1 2 STR VOLT OUTPut 1 2 STRobe VOLTage TTL ECL SYM4
245. isable the voltage autoranging feature as described in the Voltage Autoranging section e You can also set the amplitude with an associated offset voltage by specifying a high level and low level For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an offset voltage of 500 mV e For dc volts the output level is actually controlled by setting the offset voltage You can set the dc level to any value between 5 Vdc into 50 ohms or 10 Vdc into a high impedance circuit See DC Offset Voltage on the following page for more information amp The available Range for 81150A is e tbVinto 50 10V into 1 MQ for the max bandwidth amplifier e 10V into 50Q 20V into 1 MQ for the max amplitude amplifier amp The available Range for 81160A is e 5V into 50O 10V into 1 MQ e To set the output amplitude press the Ampl softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired amplitude To set the amplitude using a high level and low level press the Ampl softkey again to toggle to the High and Low softkeys Utili e To select dc volts press 2 and then select the DC Mode softkey Press the Offset softkey to set the desired offset voltage level Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions The following function is used to configure the output amplitude remotely VOLTage 1 2
246. it does apply the waveform to the hardware and exits the editor In waveform in this case the changes are only done on the volatile memory of the memory waveform STORE in NON VOL does open the waveform browser to store the waveform in non volatile memory Internal Memory Points MIRAMP 1 User defined USER2 gt USER4 Name RAMP_i Waveform Name DELETE 252 Assigning a Name 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions You can assign a custom name to the four non volatile memory locations The custom name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character To add additional characters press the right cursor key until the cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob j To delete all characters to the right of the cursor press the zr key For this example assign the name RAMP NEW to memory location 1 and then press the STORE softkey to store the waveform The waveform is now stored in non volatile memory and is currently being output from the 81150A 81160A The name that you used to store the waveform should now appear in the list of stored waveforms under the Select Waveform softkey 253 3 14 2 Introduction 254 Managing Stored Waveforms e There are four built in storage locations for arbitrary waveforms e You can store arbitrary wavefo
247. itrary waveforms You can generate a burst waveform using any of the standard or arbitrary waveforms but not dc and noise The default function is sine wave Table Description Features and Functions The table below shows which output functions are allowed with modulation sweep and burst Each indicates a valid combination If you change to a function that is not allowed with modulation sweep or burst then the modulation or mode is turned off Sine Square Ramp Pulse Pattern Noise DC Arb AM FM PM Carrier FSK Carrier PWM Carrier Sweep Mode Burst Mode I Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Arb Press E to output the arbitrary waveform currently selected To view the other arbitrary waveform choices press the Select Waveform softkey To select dc volts from the front panel press Utility and then select the DC Mode and then the DC softkey to enable disable DC Press the Offset softkey to enter the desired offset voltage level The following function is used to configure the output remotely SINusoid SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe FUNCtion 1 2 DC USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 101 102 3 2 2 Introduction Burst Limitations Output Frequency The ou
248. its amp e The voltage is not limited by the output hardware it s a software limit e The limits relate to the HIGH and LOW parameters of the instrument VOLT LIM 2 00 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference VOLTage 1 2 LIM LOW SOURCE VOLTage 1 2 LIMit LOW lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum It S used to set read the low level voltage limit If you switch on voltage limiting the low level voltage cannot be set below the programmed limit D e The voltage is not limited by the output hardware it s a software limit e The limits relate to the HIGH and LOW parameters of the instrument VOLT2 LIM LOW 2 4 369 370 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example VOLT 1 2 LIM STAT SOURCE VOLTage 1 2 LIMit STATe OFF ON This command switches the output limits on or off When you switch on the output levels cannot be programmed beyond the programmed limits until you switch off the voltage limits The limits apply whether you program high low levels or amplitude offset levels VOLT2 LIMit STAT ON Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference VOLT 1 2 OFFS SOURCe VOLTage 142 LEVel IMMediate OFFSet
249. ity Function PDF The probability of seeing a specific output level can be defined by the PDF e Gaussian distribution with a crest factor of 3 1 e Gaussian distribution with a crest factor of 4 8 e Gaussian distribution with a crest factor of 6 0 e Gaussian distribution with a crest factor of 7 0 User defined distribution by the ARB waveform In this case the waveform defines how often a level will occur relative to all the others The more often a specific level appears in the waveform memory the higher the probability to see it in the generated noise signal Noise does not have the following parameters e Period e Frequency Therefore it has the following restrictions e No modulation at all e No frequency sweep e No burst 179 180 Front Panel Operation Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Noise Press the Ww screen PDF Gauss CF 3 1 Offset Load Imp Outp Imp Continuous Continuous Amplitude key to enable Noise This brings you to the following e 0 000 Y 50 0 Q o0 2 6 1 008 v LH Press the PDF softkey and choose from the available noise characteristic options as shown below Amplitude Offset Load Imp Outp Imp Continuous Continuous Gauss CF 4 8 1 000 Vop 50 0 Q 4 ECC 5L 62 FUNCtion 1 2 NOISe PDFunction PDF1 PDF2 PDF3 PDF4 USER Features and Functions 3 7 Amplitude Modulation AM Introduction AM Characte
250. kes a straight line connection between points With interpolation disabled the waveform editor maintains a constant voltage level between points and creates a step like waveform DIG TRAN INT ON OFF 0 1 Press the Hw Update On Off softkey to select whether changes in the bit shape waveform shall be immediately programmed into the hardware or if the hardware update shall be suppressed until editing of the waveform is finished 175 176 End Edit Store the arbitrary bit waveform in memory When the editing is finished the resulting waveform will look similar to the following screenshot Transitior 1 Continuous Continuous MORE CORRER ES END Edit does apply the waveform to the hardware and exits the editor In this case the changes are only done on the volatile memory of the waveform STORE in NON VOL does open the waveform browser to store the waveform in non volatile memory Internal Bitshape Memory USER2 USER3 USER4 Name USERI Memory int isis Features and Functions 3 5 8 Triggered and Gated Patterns Introduction Front Panel Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide In contrast to other functions like pulse sinewave or square triggering or gating patterns does not always refer to exactly one unit interval or one burst of the selected function In pattern mode it is possible to select whether a trigger event will cause the generation of the complete pat
251. l RANGe lt volts gt MINimum MAXimum PWM 1 2 EXTernal RANGe volts MINimum MAXimum FSK 1 2 EXTernal RANGe lt volts gt MINimum MAXimum Input Impedance Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Features and Functions When selecting external modulation source impedance of the Modulation In connector can be selected between 50 Q and 10 kQ Press the MOD IN softkey to go to the Modulation In screen Press the Impedance softkey MOD IN Input Range 5 Input Impedance 5 Threshold 2 5 V FSK External Continuous Continuous 50 Q Input Range FSKey 1 MAXimum AM 1 2 EXTernal I1MPedance lt ohms gt MINimum MAX imum FM 1 2 EXTernal IMPedance ohms MINimum MAXimum PM 1 2 EXTernal IMPedance ohms MINimum MAXimum PWM 1 2 EXTernal IMPedance lt ohms gt MINimum MAX imum FSK 1 2 EXTernal IMPedance lt ohms gt MINimum MAX imum E anu aum 2 EXTernal IMPedance lt ohms gt MINimum Threshol 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 137 FSK Threshold Voltage Introduction Front Panel Operation 138 The Modulation In Threshold defines the signal level at which the FSK will shift to the hop frequency e If the signal levels are less than the Modulation In Threshold then the output signal will have the Carrier Freque
252. l level on the rear panel Modulation In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output If you select the other channel as the modulation waveshape INT2 the SCPI command FSK 1 2 INT RATE doesn t apply FSK1 SOUR EXT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FSK 1 2 STAT SOURCE FSKey 1 2 STATe ON OFF Disable or enable FSK modulation To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable FSK after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The FSK1 STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The instrument will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FSK and AM at the same time When you enable FSK the previous modulation mode is turned off The instrument will not allow FSK to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable FSK the sweep or burst mode is turned off FSK1 STAT ON 397 398 Phase Modulation PM Commands Introduction A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform PM is very similar to FM but in PM the phase of the modulated waveform is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform Command
253. lation type is AM AM can be performed with or without carrier suppression DSSC OFF 1 ModulationDepth th 1 t QUAE u 2 100 U nod U ow DSSC ON u t U mod f P U carrier f After enabling AM press the DSSC softkey to enable or disable DSSC AM 1 2 DSSC lt Boolean gt ON OFF 189 190 max Modulation Signal min Trigger Out Strobe Out Continuous AM with DSSC Carrier Sinewave with 15 MHz Modulated by Sinewave with 1 MHz Features and Functions 3 7 8 Modulating Source Introduction The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel Modulating Source If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The modulation depth is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 10096 then when the modulating signal is at 2 5V 5V the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 2 5 5V then the output will be at the minimum amplitude D e The 81160A offers a fix 2 5V input range The 81150A offers a selectable 2 5V or 5V input range Modulation In 1 2
254. le e Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry e Select TRI for a ramp waveform with 5096 symmetry e Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform with 0 symmetry If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 16K 16384 points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation FM2 INT FUNC TRI 387 388 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example gt FM 1 2 SOUR SOURCE FM 1 2 SOURce INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal Select the source of the modulating signal The instrument will accept an INTernal or EXTernal modulation source The default is INT 1 The FM 1 2 SOUR query returns INT or INT2 or EXT INT 1 selects an internal modulation signal and INT2 selects the other channel of the instrument if available If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The frequency deviation is controlled by the 2 5 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the deviation to 100 kHz using the FM 1 2 DEV command then a 2 5 5V signal level corresponds to a 100 kHz increase in frequency Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the frequency below the carrier frequency If you select the
255. lected arming source e Man key on front panel gated while pressed or released or both e External Input External signal gated while high or low or both You can select the number of cycles per burst in the range 2 to 1 000 000 Trigger Out marks each cycle Strobe Out rises at the start of the first cycle in a burst and falls at the start of the last cycle Gated Burst of 4 External In L Trigger Out Strobe Out L 4 243 244 3 13 5 Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Burst Count The burst count defines the number of cycles to be output per burst Burst count 2 to 1 000 000 cycles in 1 cycle increments The default is 2 cycles When the nternal trigger source is selected the specified number of cycles is output continuously at a rate determined by the Internal trigger frequency setting The Internal trigger frequency defines the interval between bursts When the nternal trigger source is selected the burst count must be less than the product of the Internal trigger frequency and the waveform frequency as shown below Burst Count lt Internal trigger period x Output frequency To set the burst count press the Cycles softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the count TR BURSt 1 2 NCYCles lt cycles gt MINimum MAXimum IGger 1 2 COUNt lt cycles gt MINimum MAXimum 3 13 6 Introducti
256. ll automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the deviation will be adjusted as described If you select the External modulating source FM 1 2 SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the frequency deviation to 100 kHz then a 2 5V 5V signal level corresponds to a 100 kHz increase in frequency Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the frequency below the carrier frequency FM2 DEV 1111HZ 383 384 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FM 1 2 EXT IMP SOURCE FM 1 2 EXTernal IMPedance lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum OHM Specifies the impedance of the modulation input If you try to program any other value it will be rounded to one of the specified values either 50Q or 10kQ FM2 EXT IMP 500HM Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FM 1 2 EXT RANG SOURCI LH FM 1 2 EXTernal RANGe lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Specifies the voltage range of the modulation input If you try to program any ot
257. locks the entire keyboard including the LOCAL key Setting SYST KLOC EXCL excludes the LOCAL key and SYST KLOC ON locks the keyboard except the LOCAL key SYST KLOC EXCL NONE Remote Programming Reference Command SYST PRES Long SYSTem PRESet Parameters Parameter Suffix B Description The PRESet command is an event that configures the SCPI device dependant status data structure to its preset value e g NTR to 0x00 PTR to OxFF Example SYST PRES 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 511 512 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example tSYST SEC SYSTem SECurity STATe ON OFF Use this command to switch on system security mode Switch on system security if you need to make sure that all instrument settings stored in the instrument are erased automatically when the instrument is switched off or when the security mode is switched off The instrument s settings are erased by overwriting them with the default setting System security mode is not available via the front panel SYST SEC ON Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference SYST SEC IMM SYSTem SECurity IMMediate Clears all instrument memory except for the boot parameters and calibration constants Initializes all instrument settings to th
258. m MAXimum Set the pulse delay in second Delay is the time between the start of the pulse period and the start of the leading edge of the pulse If you want the pulse delay to remain constant when the pulse period is varied see PULS DEL HOLD 142 PULS DEL2 4 2NS 453 Command PULS DEL 1 2 HOLD Long SOURCe PULSe DELay 1 2 HOLD Parameters TIME PRATio DEGree Parameter Suffix Description Set the coupling between the pulse period and the pulse delay TIME The absolute pulse delay is held fixed when the pulse period is varied PRATio The pulse delay delay as ratio of period is held fixed when the pulse period is varied DEGree Holds the delay in degrees fixed Example PULS DEL2 HOLD PRAT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PULS DEL 1 2 UNIT SOURCe PULSe DELay 1 2 UNIT S SEC PCT DEG RAD It S used to set the default unit for the pulse delay parameter The default unit of a parameter is the unit used when the parameter is programmed to a value without a unit suffix PULS DEL2 WIDT PCT 455 456 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PULS FRI LH OTL izes SOURCe PULSe FREQuency 1 2 CW FIXed NR3 MINi
259. m you would need to output it to an oscilloscope If you do this you will see how the pulse width varies in this case from 100 to 900 us At a modulation frequency of 5 Hz the deviation is quite visible 71 72 2 27 Outputting a Frequency Sweep Introduction Select the function and amplitude for the sweep Select the sweep mode In the frequency sweep mode the 81150A 81160A steps from the start frequency to the stop frequency at a sweep rate which you specify You can sweep up or down in frequency and with either linear or logarithmic spacing For this example you will output a swept sine wave from 50 Hz to 5 kHz You will not change the other parameters from their default settings internal sweep trigger linear spacing and 1 second sweep time WEE TT JUL M WM LU SL I For sweeps you can select sine square ramp or arbitrary waveforms pulse noise and dc are not allowed For this example select a sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp ee Press Mail and then verify that the linear sweep mode is currently selected Notice that a status message Linear Sweep is shown in the status line Front Panel Menu Operation Set the start Press the Start Frequency softkey and then set the value to 50 Hz using the frequency numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys Sweep Type Linear Start Freq 50 000000 iz Stop Freg 1 0 Linear Sweep Continuous Continuous
260. m the instrument the low level commands give you more flexibility to change individual parameters Based on the characteristics of the instrument i e combining the two instruments pulse generator and function generator into one some parameters can be changed in two different ways One command set based on the function generator concept and the other command set based on the pulse generator concept to change electrical parameters of signals To minimize the effort for test program designer the instrument accepts both command types for the same parameters wherever applicable 433 434 Output Function Commands Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FREQ 1I21 SOURCe FREQuency 1 2 CW FIXed lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the output frequency The FREQ 1 2 query returns the frequency setting in Hertz for the function currently selected MIN selects the lowest actual possible frequency allowed for the selected function MAX selects the highest actual possible frequency allowed FREO 1 234MHZ Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FUNC 1 2 SOURce FUNCtion 1 2 SHAPe SlNusoid SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe DC USER Select the output function The selected waveform is output using the previously selected
261. mand E g If this parameter is set to 3 then a pattern with 2 levels is selected the query will return 2 In external pattern mode DIG SOUR EXT the value of this parameter is used to distinguish between a binary level or 3 levels of external input signal The query returns the previously programmed value Depending on the value of this parameter the external thresholds have to be programmed accordingly see DIG EXT THRE J G NLEV 3 IG DATA 2162222201010102222 O Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide DIG LOFF DIGital 1 lt n gt Remote Programming Reference 2 STIMulus PATTern LOFFset Use this command to define the offset within the data block where the loop occurs E g If the data pattern is defined as 11101010 and loop offset is defined as 5 then the following output will be generated 11101010010010 010010010 amp The query form always returns the loop offset of the currently selected pattern which set with the DJ is not necessarily identical with the loop offset previously G LOFF command This parameter will automatically be updated when loading a data pattern from non volatile storage or when defining a new pattern using the local user interface DIG LOFF 5 555 556 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Descri
262. ming Reference FREQ 1 2 STAR SOURce FREQuency 1 2 CW FIXed STARC lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the start frequency used in conjunction with the stop frequency The FREQ 1 2 STAR query returns the start frequency in Hertz To sweep up in frequency set the start frequency stop frequency To sweep down in frequency set the start frequency gt stop frequency FREQ2 STAR 10 1MHZ 493 494 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FREQ 1I2 STOP SOURCe FREQuency 1 2 CW FIXed STOP lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the stop frequency used in conjunction with the start frequency The FREQ 1 2 STOP query returns the stop frequency in Hertz FREQ2 STOP 15 1MHZ Remote Programming Reference Command MARK 1 I2 Long MARKer 1 2 STATe Parameters OFF ON Parameter Suffix B Description Disable or enable the frequency marker The default is OFF The MARK Query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON Example MARK ON 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 495 496 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example MARK 1 2 FREO MARKer 1 2 FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum HZ Set the marker frequency This is the frequency at which the signal on the front panel Strobe Out connector goes to a logic low du
263. mmand to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 3 9 3 Carrier Frequency Features and Functions Introduction The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 MHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 uHz 81150A 240 MHz 81160A 500 MHz Square 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz Ramp 1 uHz 81150A 5 MHz 81160A 20 MHz Arbs 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz Pattern 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 330 MHz 81160A 660 660 MHz 81150A and 81160A 10 MHz for external patterns Front Panel To set the carrier frequency press the Frequency softkey for the selected Operation function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Remote Interface FREQuency 1 2 lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Operation You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 203 3 9 4 Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 204 Modulating Waveform Shape The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel e M
264. mmetry setting is remembered when you change from ramp wave to another function When you return to the ramp function the previous symmetry is used e Ifyou select a ramp waveform as the modulating waveform for AM FM PM or PWM the symmetry setting does not apply After selecting the ramp function press the Symmetry softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired symmetry The following function is used to configure the symmetry remotely FUNCtion 1 2 RAMP SYMMetry lt percentage gt MINimum MAXimum The APPLy command automatically sets the symmetry to 100 119 3 2 14 Introduction Output Control characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 120 Output Control You can disable or enable the front panel Output connector By default the output is disabled at power on to protect other equipment When enabled the Output key is illuminated If an excessive external voltage is applied to the front panel Output connector an error message will be displayed and the output will be disabled To re enable the output remove the overload from the Output connector and press both the Output keys for normal and inverted output for the respective channel to enable the output Press both the normal and the inverted Output keys to enable or disable the output The following function is used to configure the output control remotely 0UTput 1 2 0 1 OFF ON OUTPut
265. mode bursts will be generated as long as the gate signal is active A burst will always be finished before another one can be started So the trigger rate and gate timing is limited by the product of the number of cycles and the cycle period For bursts the trigger source can be an external signal an internal timer the Man key or a command received from the remote interface 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 649 650 The input for external trigger signals is the front panel External In connector This connector accepts levels in the range of 10 V for the 81150A 5 V for the 81160A and is referenced to chassis ground A burst always begins and ends at the same point in the waveform This is called the start phase A starting phase of 0 corresponds to the beginning of the waveform record and 360 corresponds to the end of the waveform record The starting phase can be adjusted in the range from 0 to 360 for sine and arb waveforms and will be 0 for pulse square and ramp waveforms The Noise waveform cannot be bursted Tutorial 7 14 Channel Addition Introduction The Agilent 81150A 81160A allows you to add the output signal of both channels internally The added signal will always be routed to the output connectors of channel 1 The addition of the two signals is done before the waveform DAC while still working with digital data Channel 1 Scaling Channel 1 Waveform Anti Aliasing DAC
266. modulation the Trigger Output outputs the same frequency as the data output it alternates between the two frequencies If noise is selected the Trigger Output is constant Low if the trigger mode is continuous or gated If the trigger mode is triggered then Trigger Out will generate a 4 16 ns for 81150A 1 5 ns for 81160A pulse when the noise generation is being reset to the start of the noise sequence For all other modes of operation the trigger signal Trigger Out marks the start of each waveform period The Trigger Out Level can e selected on the Trigger Mode screen Cont Trig To display the Trigger Mode screen press either the an Saml OF Gated t key depending on the trigger mode being used Then press the Trigger Out softkey to choose from TTL ECL at Trigger Out 127 Remote Interface Operation OUTPut 1 2 TRIGger VOLTage TTL ECL 3 2 19 Sync Output Introduction Mode of Operation The Sync Outputs exist on the 81160A only The 81150A has one Trigger Output per channel and one Strobe Outputs per channel For the one channel instrument as well as the two channel instrument of 81160A two high speed Sync Out A and Sync Out B outputs are provided at the front panel The Sync Output signals can be configured very flexible by an internal switch matrix to output the Logical Trigger Signal functionality or Logical Strobe Signal functionality according to the following switch matrix 81160A
267. mory and opens the waveform editor to edit the volatile memory Only waveforms of upto 16K points can be created edited using the Front Panel interface Larger waveforms must be edited using an external application such as Agilent BenchLink Waveform Builder and then downloaded into the 81150A 81160A 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 255 256 LOAD SELECT STORE This softkey is only available when selecting a waveform from USB memory This softkey loads the currently highlighted waveform from the USB memory into the volatile memory If the size of this waveform is bigger than the maximum size of the destination memory the waveform will be adjusted to fit into the destination memory This softkey selects the currently highlighted waveform This softkey stores the content of the volatile memory to one of the four user defined waveform storage locations or to the USB memory Features and Functions 3 14 3 Additional Information on Arbitrary Waveforms Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The currently selected waveform is displayed on the Arb screen In addition to creating a new arbitrary waveform from the front panel you can also edit any existing user defined waveforms You can edit waveforms that were created either from the front panel or from the remote interface However you cannot edit any of the seven built in arbitrary waveforms And only waveforms with a maximum number of 16384 points e Press the Edit
268. ms The burst phase is also used in the gated burst mode When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the instrument stops The output will remain at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase BURS PHAS 211 2 359 360 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example BURS 1 2 STAT BURSt 1 2 STATe ON OFF T Jj IGger 1 2 COUNt and BURSt 1 2 NCYCles set the number of triggered periods to be generated per arm event TRIGger COUNt gt 1 is the short form of BURSt NCYCles and BURST STATe In other words for example TRIGger COUNt 3 set the BURSt STATe to ON and BURTs NCYCles to 3 BURS2 STAT ON Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference TRIG 1 2 COUN TRIGger 1 2 COUNCt lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Jj TRIGger 1 2 COUNt and BURSt 1 2 NCYCles set the number of triggered periods to be generated per arm event TRIGger COUNt gt 1 is the short form of BURSt NCYCles and BURST STATe In other words for example TRIGger COUNt 3 set the BURSt STATe to ON and BURTs NCYCles to 3 TRIG COUN 17 361 362 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example UNIT 1 2
269. ms and edge times of 50 ns Pulses do not have period frequency when being triggered and burst is off In all other cases a pulse does have a period frequency like other waveforms Pulse Press the Sues key to select the pulse function and output a pulse waveform with the default parameters This is only true if the instrument is currently using the default setting Press the Frequency softkey to toggle to Period Set the Pulse period to 500 ms Period Delay 500 0 ms Amplitude 1 000 Yp Width 10 00 ms Offset 0 000 V5 Lead Edge 2 5ns Load Imp 50 0 Q Trail Edge 2 5ns Outp Imp Polarity Continuous Continuous 500 00000000 ms t EAE 55 56 Set the pulse width Press the Width softkey and then set the pulse width to 10 ms The pulse width represents the start of leading edge to start of trailing edge Continuous Continuous 10 00000foms fN Lead Edge MORE Set the edge time Press the Lead Edge and Trail Edge softkeys and then set the edge time for for both edges both the rising and falling edges to 50 ns The edge time represents the time from the 10 threshold to the 90 threshold of each edge Front Panel Menu Operation 2 20 Setting up a Pattern Introduction The pattern functionality can be accessed on the local user interface through the Pattern Setup key on the pulse screen Press the Pattern Pulse Setup key Press the s key to select the Pulse function e Press the Pattern
270. mum MAXimum HZ Set the output frequency The PULS FREQ 1 2 query returns the frequency setting in hertz for the function currently selected MIN selects the lowest actual possible frequency allowed for the selected function MAX selects the highest actual possible frequency allowed PULS FREQ2 222 22KHZ Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PULSe HOLD 112 SOURce PULSe HOLD 1 2 WIDTh DCYCle TDELay Set instrument to hold either pulse width or pulse duty cycle or trailing delay WIDTh DCYCle TDEL The instrument holds the pulse width setting in seconds constant as the period is varied Minimum width and edge time restrictions apply If a command to set a duty cycle value is received the duty cycle is converted to the equivalent pulse width in seconds If Pulse Width Modulation PWM is turned on the pulse width is held and the width deviation also is held as the period is varied Duty cycle deviation commands are converted to width deviation values The instrument holds the pulse duty cycle setting in percent constant as the period is varied Minimum width and edge time restrictions apply If a command to set a pulse width value is received the width is converted to the equivalent duty cycle in percent If Pulse Width Modulation PWM is turned on the pulse duty
271. n 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel e Internal External or other channel The default is Internal e fyou select the External source the pulse waveform is modulated with an external waveform The width deviation or duty cycle deviation is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the duty cycle to 10 and the duty cycle deviation to 5 then when the modulating signal is at 2 5 V 5 V the output will be at the maximum duty cycle 1596 When the modulating signal is at 2 5 V 5 V the output will be at the minimum duty cycle 5 e The 81160A offers a fix 2 5V input range The 81150A offers a selectable 2 5V or 5V input range Modulation In 1 10V 2 5 V 5 V OV 2 5 V 5 V 10V L After enabling PWM press the PWM source softkey and select from Internal Channel or External PWM 1 2 SOURce INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal 225 226 3 12 Frequency Sweep Introduction In the frequency sweep mode the 81150A 81160A steps from the start frequency to the stop frequency at a sweep rate which you specify You can sweep up or down in freque
272. n Example 2 EM STAT REC AUTO EMory STATe RECall AUTO OFF ON Disable or enable the automatic recall of the power down state when power is turned on Select ON default to automatically recall the power down state when power is turned on Select OFF to issue a reset RST command when power is turned on The MEM STAT REC AUTO Query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON 2 EM STAT REC AUTO ON Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference 2 EM STAT VAL 2 EMory STATe VALid 1121314 Query the specified storage location to determine if a valid state is currently stored in that location You can use this command before sending the RCL command to determine if a state has been previously stored in this location Returns 0 if no state has been stored or if it has been deleted Returns 1 if a valid state is stored in the specified location MEM STAT VAL 2 Response 0 415 476 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example MMEM COPY MMEMory COPY file name copy name gt A command to copy an existing file file name in the current directory to a new file copy name gt If copy name gt is the name of a subdirectory in the current directory a copy is made in the subdirectory
273. n must be less than 64 xbit 1 With bit being the zero based index of the transition that contains the current point The X value cannot be changed for the first point of each transition definition These points are marked by the vertical dashed white lines To insert additional points after the current waveform point press the Insert Point softkey The new point is inserted with the same DAC value as the current point To remove the current waveform point press the Remove Point softkey The remaining points are joined using the interpolation method currently selected If Point 1 is removed then Point 2 will be placed to address 0 Remove Point is not possible if the waveform has 2 points since this is the minimum waveform length Point o c C A Co N co 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 X 0t 32 64t 96 128t 160 192t 224 256t 288 320t 352 384t 416 448t 480 512t 544 8191 8191 8191 8191 8191 8191 8191 8191 8191 8191 8191 8191 Features and Functions Transition 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 t These X positions cannot be changed since the point is the first point in the transition Interpol On Off Remote Interface Operation Hw Upd On Off 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Press the Interpolation softkey to enable or disable linear interpolation between waveform points With interpolation enabled default the waveform editor ma
274. n a given screen e When setting the cursor to the exponent field the exponent can be changed via the Rotary Knob only if the resulting number does fall within the allowed range e The cursor position is remembered when the cursor is placed on the leftmost digit and the value is decreased from 1 to 0 In this case the cursor changes it s color to green for some seconds and the cursor position will be set back to the previous one when incrementing the value again For example select the frequency to be edited and set the cursor to the leftmost digit and then decrement the value by turning the Rotary Knob counter clockwise The cursor will move one digit to the right when the digit would go from 1 to 0 and changes it s color to green When incrementing while the cursor is green it will jump back to the initial digit when crossing the 0 to 1 border e The left arrow key can be used to delete the digit left to the input cursor when entering values with the numeric keypad 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 21 2 5 The Rear Panel Introduction The rear panel contains e GP IB connector e USB device connector AN connector These three are used for remote control of the instrument e Channel 1 Modulation In e Channel 2 Modulation In e 10 MHz Clock Ref In e 10 MHz Clock Ref Out A USB Host Connector is used to connect external USB storage device for storing instrument settings or software updates
275. nan natans 212 3 10 5 ESICRate 5t tetro te iet tree rt iietot erede tertia dont 213 3 10 6 FSK SOUIGCE iium itn n inb ib si t HOT EL Er ER OR 214 Pulse Width Modulation PWM sse tnter 215 3 11 1 Selecting PWM Modulation sssssssssssennennnetnnne tete 216 3 11 2 Pulse Waveform sesenta tite tte ttes tts 217 3 11 3 Pulse Period sess ttt tette tetas aes 218 3 11 4 Modulating Waveform Shape sse 219 3 11 5 Modulating Waveform Frequency ccccccssssesessssssessssesssssssssssssssssssesssssessssesssees 220 Gs Width DeviatiOnis ueterem erento terere reete enn en 221 311 7 Duty Cycle Deviation p tiet enter ttg 222 3 11 8 Modulating Source tenente tenente 225 Frequency SWeBD iui anos shsaniei ati daadisnad Sad duod ugnquangaedian ad dmndins 226 3 12 1 Selecting a Sweep tenete tenente 228 3 12 2 Start Frequency and Stop Frequency c csccssssssssseessssesssssssesessssessssesesesessesesees 229 3 123 Center Frequency and Frequency Span essent 230 3 124 Idle Frequency nnne tnnt nnns 232 3125 J SWBeDNILVDG ister eee uere Senden eee LUTTE 233 3 120 SWED MME cener 235 3 12 7 Marker Frequency ccccccscsessssssssesscssssseseessssscsesscsssssensessssscsenssisassenseasansenenssansssensees 236 10 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 128 Triggered Gated Sweep tete teens 237 B rst WAGs cosas Fosse fasts Sees cas ient
276. ncy and with either linear or logarithmic spacing You can also configure the 81150A 81160A to output a single sweep one pass from start frequency to stop frequency by applying an external or manual trigger The 81150A 81160A can produce a frequency sweep for sine square ramp or arbitrary waveforms pulse noise and dc are not allowed For more information on the fundamentals of a sweep refer to the Tutorial chapter Continuous Linear Sweep Start Frequency 0 001MHz Stop Frequency 0 007 MHz Sweep Time 0 00145714285714286s max Modulation Signal internal gt min 4 Trigger Out MA MAI LUI Strobe Out 4 Features and Functions Triggered Linear Sweep Start Frequency 0 001MHz Stop Frequency 0 007 MHz Sweep Time 0 00145714285714286s External In J max Modulation Signal internal min Trigger Out LUUD 4 Strobe Out 4 Gated Linear Sweep Start Frequency 0 001MHz Stop Frequency 0 007 MHz Sweep Time 0 00145714285714286s External In max Modulation Signal internal L Ps ps 4 min Trigger Out WA WA Strobe Out 4 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 227 228 3 12 1 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Selecting a Sweep The 81150A 81160A will not allow the sweep mode to be enabled at the same time that burst or any m
277. ncy e If the signal levels are more than the Modulation In Threshold then the output signal will have the Hop Frequency e The allowed range is 5V for the 81150A 2 5V for the 81160A and is limited by Modulation In Input Range After selecting the modulation function press the Modulation Type softkey to select FSK Then press the MOD IN softkey Press Threshold softkey Select from TTL ECL or Variable MOD IN Input Range c5 Input Impedance 50 Threshold 2 5 V FSK External Continuous Continuous 2Bv Input a Ve ncm qe Features and Functions MOD IN Input Range c5 Input Impedance 50 Threshold 25 S FSK External Continuous Continuous TUE Remote Interface FSKey 1 2 EXTernal LEVel volts MINimum Operation MAXimum 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 139 140 3 3 3 Reference Clock Introduction The Reference Clock defines the time base from which all other timing parameters are derived There are two modes available e Manual mode In this mode you can select the Reference Clock yourself e Automatic Mode In this mode the instrument will select the External Clock Reference whenever it detects one The source for the Reference Clock can be e Internal Selects the Internal 10 MHz clock e Ext 10 MHz Ref In Selects the 70 MHz Ref In at the Rear Panel Characteristics e The 70 MHz Ref Out connector at the rear Panel provides the reference clock signal that is
278. ncy must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency You can use the Marker function to identify a notable frequency in the response of a device under test DUT for example you may want to identify a resonance To do this connect the Strobe output to one channel of your oscilloscope and connect the DUT output to another channel Then trigger the oscilloscope with the rising edge of the Strobe signal to position the start frequency on the left side of the screen Adjust the marker frequency until the falling edge of the Strobe Out signal lines up with the interesting feature in the device s response You can then read the frequency from the front panel display of the 81150A 81160A Sweep with Marker at DUT Resonance Tutorial 7 13 Burst Introduction You can configure the function generator to output a waveform with a specified number of cycles 2 to 1 000 000 called a burst Three Cycle Burst Waveform The Strobe Out connector generates a rising edge at the first cycle of the burst and a falling edge on the last cycle Bursts can be combined with all trigger modes In continuous mode the difference between having a burst mode enabled or disabled is in the presence or absence of the burst framing signal provided at Strobe Out The main and trigger output generate the same signals in both cases In triggered burst mode the function generator initiates one burst per trigger event In gated burst
279. nd places the instrument in the continuous waveform mode Turns on the Output connector OUTP ON command but does not change the output termination setting OUTP LOAD command Overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging VOLT RANG AUTO command For square waveforms overrides the current duty cycle setting and automatically selects 50 FUNC SQU DCYC command For ramp waveforms overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 100 FUNC RAMP SYMM command Remote Programming Reference APPLy Commands Command APPL 1 2 Long APPLy 1 2 Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Query the instrument s current configuration and return a quoted string The purpose of this command is to allow you to append this query response to an APPL command in your programming application and use the result to place the instrument in the specified state The function frequency amplitude and offset are returned as shown in the sample string below the quotation marks are returned as part of the string Example APPL1 Response SIN 5 0000000000000E 03 3 0000000000000E 00 2 5000000000000E 00 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 323 324 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example APPL 1 2 DC APPLy 1 2 DC lt frequency DEFault gt lt amplitude gt DEFault gt lt offset gt Output a dc voltage with the l
280. nd press enter 9 Type create partition primary and press enter This creates the partition on the flash drive 10 Type active and press enter 11 Type exit and press enter This exits the disk partition utility 12 Now the flash drive needs to be formatted Click on the Windows logo and then click on Computer 13 Find the drive letter of the removable disk drive that needs to be formatted 14 In the command prompt window type format fs fat32 q where is the removable drive letter that needs to be formatted Press enter 15 Enter a volume label of your choice and press enter 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 671 For recovering the If you need to recover the 81150A 81160A from an interrupted software 81150A 81160A update you need to do the following in addition 1 Copy the software update zip file on the USB flash drive s root directory Extract the content of the software update zip file to the root directory of the USB flash drive Remember to maintain the folder structure in the zip file when doing this Connect the USB flash drive to the 81150A 81160A and switch the instrument on The 81150A 81160A will now boot the recovery image from the USB flash drive and continue to update the instrument firmware Windows and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation 672 Copyright Agilent Technologies 2011 First Edition March 2011 Printed in Germany 81160 91020 E Agilent T
281. nds available to program the 81150A 81160A over the remote interface see chapter 4 The Agilent 81150A 81160A supports remote interface communication using a choice of three interfaces GPIB USB and LAN All three interfaces are live at power up This section describes some interface configuration parameters that you may need to set on your 81150A 81160A amp The CD ROM provided with your instrument contains connectivity software to enable communications over these interfaces Refer to the instructions provided on the CD ROM to install this software on your PC e GPIB Interface You need to set only the GPIB address for the 81150A 81160A and connect it to your PC using a GPIB cable e USB Interface There is nothing to configure on your 81150A 81160A Just connect the 81150A 81160A to the PC with a USB cable LAN Interface By default DHCP is On which may enable network communication over the LAN interface You may need to set several configuration parameters as described in the LAN configuration sections that follow For detailed background information refer to the Agilent Technologies USB LAN GPIB Connectivity Guide which you can download from the Agilent web site at the following URL www agilent com find connectivity Features and Functions 3 16 1 GPIB Address Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Each device on the GPIB IEEE 488 interface must hav
282. nds to a 50 us width increase Lower external signal levels produce less deviation If you select the other channel as the modulation waveshape INT2 the SCPI command PWM 1 2 INT FREQ doesn t apply PWM SOUR EXT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PWM 1 2 STAT SOURCE PWM 1 2 STATe ON OFF Disable or enable PWM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable PWM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The PWM 1 2 STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The instrument will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable PWM and AM at the same time When you enable PWM the previous modulation mode is turned off The instrument will not allow PWM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable PWM the sweep or burst mode is turned off PWM is allowed only when pulse is the selected function PWM STAT OFF 415 416 4 5 6 Introduction Channel Command The channel command is used to enable or disable channel addition in an instrument with two channel installed With the CHAN MATH PLUS command the signals from both channels are added at Output 1 Output 2 provides its signal further on This allows you to for example generate 3 or 4 l
283. ndwidth For wideband FM In the United States commercial FM stations usually have a modulation bandwidth of 15 kHz and deviation of 75 kHz making them wideband Therefore the modulated bandwidth is 2 x 75 kHz 15 kHz 180 kHz Channel spacing is 200 kHz irre jaa jeaeree aaa dare rne ee bres e baee ara Modulating Signal I Modulated Carrier Frequency Modulation Tutorial Phase Modulation PM Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide PM is very similar to FM but for PM the phase of the carrier waveform is varied rather than the frequency The variation in phase of the modulated waveform from the carrier waveform is called the phase deviation which can vary from 0 to 360 degrees amp Since 360 degrees of deviation is equivalent to 0 degrees the maximum effective deviation is at 180 degrees the default 643 Frequency Shift Keying Modulation FSK Introduction FSK is similar to FM except the frequency alternates between two preset values The rate at which the output shifts between the two frequencies called the carrier frequency and the hop frequency is determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Modulation In connector Frequency changes are instantaneous and phase continuous Internal The internal modulating signal is a square waveform with 5096 duty cycle Modulating Signal You can set the internal FSK rate from 1 mHz to 10 MH
284. nel 2 or from channel 2 to channel 1 depending on where the change was done A 1 Coupled Parameters when channel coupling is on Introduction The following parameters will be updated from Channel 1 to Channel 2 and vice versa if Channel Coupling is enabled 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 655 656 Coupled Parameters when channel coupling is on Trigger Mode Trigger Source Internal Trigger Period Frequency Triggered Gated by Period Frequency Frequency Period Mode Function DC State Noise Type Modulation State Modulation Type Modulation AM Depth Modulation AM Frequency Modulation AM Shape Modulation AM Source Modulation AM DSSC Modulation FM Source Modulation FM Frequency Deviation Modulation FM Frequency Modulation FM Shape Modulation PM Source Modulation PM Phase Deviation Modulation PM Frequency Modulation PM Shape Modulation FSK Source Modulation FSK Rate Modulation FSK Hop Frequency Modulation PWM Source Modulation PWM Duty Cycle Deviation Modulation PWM Width Deviation Modulation PWM Frequency Modulation PWM Shape Burst State Burst Length Cycles Burst Start Phase Sweep State Sweep Time Coupled Parameters when channel coupling is on 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Sweep Mode Sweep Hold Mode Sweep Center Frequency Sweep Frequency Span Sweep Start Frequency Sweep Stop Frequency Sweep Idle Frequency Sweep Marker State Sweep Marker Frequency Appendix 657 658 A 2
285. ngs and errors is always enabled by switching on the output s A warning is generated when due to a combination of worst case uncertainties at the current settings of all relevant parameters an invalid signal is output A warning will be reflected in the QUEStionable data register structure See the following table for definitions Remote Programming Reference Bit Definitions Questionable Data Register Bit Number Decimal Value Definition 0 Voltage warning 1 Output signal could be invalid 1 Current warning 2 Output signal could be invalid 2 Time warning 4 Output signal could be invalid 3 Not used 8 Returns 0 4 Not used 16 Returns 0 5 Frequency warning 32 Output signal could be invalid 6 Not used 64 Returns 0 7 Not used 128 Returns 0 8 Not used 256 Returns 0 9 PLL unlocked warning 512 PLL is currently unlocked the output signal is invalid 10 Not used 1024 Returns 0 11 Not used 2048 Returns 0 12 Not used 4096 Returns 0 13 Not used 8192 Returns 0 14 Not used 16384 Returns 0 15 Not used 32768 Returns 0 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 583 584 Commands accessing the questionable status group The following commands access the questionable status group STATus QUEStionable EVENt Reads the event register in the questionable status group It s a read only register Once a bit is set it remains set unt
286. nly In PWM the pulse width or duty cycle of the pulse waveform is varied according to the modulating signal The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source If you select the internal source the modulated waveform is generated by a secondary DDS synthesizer Alternatively the samples that are generated on the other channel can be selected as the modulating signal 2 channel version only This allows even more detailed control over the modulation signal as provided by the secondary DDS synthesizer If you select the external source the modulated waveform is controlled by the signal level present on the function generator s rear panel Modulation In connector The external signal is sampled and digitized by an analog to digital converter ADC With either modulation source the result is a stream of digital samples representing the modulating waveform 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 639 Amplitude Modulation AM Introduction The function generator implements two forms of AM called double sideband transmitted carrier and double sideband suppressed carrier The double sideband transmitted carrier is the type of modulation used by most AM radio stations Modulating Signal ana daaane paene aeeee bae eere penne been rere rere Modulated Carrier 100 depth shown eee ET oop Amplitude Modulation double sideband transmitted carrier Continuous AM with DSSC Carrier Sinewave with 15
287. nnot enable AM and FM at the same time When you enable AM the previous modulation mode is turned off AM is enabled by default To avoid multiple waveform changes enable AM after you have set up the other modulation parameters AM 1 2 STATe ON OFF Features and Functions 3 7 2 Carrier Waveform Shape Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide AM carrier shape Sine Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform The default is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or dc as the carrier waveform Pulse Noise Press any of the front panel function keys except JC or M For Arb arbitrary waveforms press Aw and then choose the Select Waveform softkey to select the active waveform FUNCtion 1 2 SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 183 3 7 3 Carrier Frequency Introduction The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 MHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 uHz 81150A 240 MHz 81160A 500 MHz Square 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz Ramp 1 Hz 81150A 5 MHz 81160A 20 MHz Arbs 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz Pattern 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 330 MHz 81160A 660 660 MHz 81150A and 81160A 10 MHz for external pa
288. nstrument state from a storage location that is empty RCL 1 to 4 recalls a stored instrument setting RCL 0 recalls the default setting Reset instrument to its factory default state refer to Agilent 81150A 81160A Factory Default Settings in section 3 21 This command will abort a sweep or burst in progress and will re enable the front panel display if it was previously disabled DISP OFF command Store save the current instrument state in the specified non volatile storage location Any state previously stored in the same location will be overwritten and no error will be generated There are four locations 1 2 3 4 available Command SRE STB TRG TST WAI 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference Description Enable bits in the Status Byte to generate a Service Request To enable specific bits you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits in the register The selected bits are summarized in the Master Summary bit bit 6 of the Status Byte Register If any of the selected bits change from 0 to 1 a Service Request signal is generated The SRE query returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits enabled by the SRE command Query the summary status byte condition register in this register group This command is similar to a Serial Poll but it is processed like any other instrument
289. nt argc TCHAR argv ViStatus errorStatus 0 ViSession viRm 0 vi 0 Open session to GP B device at address 10 errorStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp viRm viOpen viRm GPIBO 10 INSTR VI NULL 10000 errorStatus amp vi Reset the function generator viPrintf vi RST n Clear error and status register viPrintf vi CLS n Select waveshape viPrintf vi FUNCtion2 SINusoid n Load impedance to 500hm viPrintf vi OUTput2 LOAD 50 n i t Amplitude to 1 0 Vpp Sweep viPrin stop freq is 20kHz viPrintf vi VOLTage2 1 00 n Set LINEar LOG spacing viPrintf vi SWEep2 SPACing LiINear n Sweep time is 1 second viPrintf vi SWEep2 TIME 1 n Sweep start freq is 123Hz viPrintf vi FREQuency2 STARt 123 n e T f vi FREQuency2 STOP 20e3 n Remote Programming Reference Turn on output channel 2 viPrintf vi OUTPut2 onn Turn sweep on viPrintf vi SWEep2 STATe ON n ViChar err msg 256 ViInt32 err num Check for first error viQueryf vi SYSTem ERRor n d t amp err num err msg printf Error Number d Error Message s n err num err msg Close session viClose vi viClose viRm return 0 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 595 596 The following is a summary o
290. o voltage dBm RMS Voltage Peak to Peak Voltage 23 98 dBm 3 54 Vrms 10 00 Vpp 13 01 dBm 1 00 Vrms 2 828 Vpp 10 00 dBm 707 mVrms 2 000 Vpp 6 99 dBm 500 mVrms 1 414 Vpp 0 00 dBm 224 mVrms 632 mVpp 6 99 dBm 100 mVrms 283 mVpp 10 00 dBm 70 7 mVrms 200 mVpp 36 02 dBm 3 54 mVrms 10 0 mVpp Conversions For 75 or 600 loads use the following conversions dBm 75Q dBm 50Q 1 76 dBm 600Q dBm 50Q 10 79 Tutorial 7 11 Modulation Introduction Modulation is the process of modifying a high frequency signal called the carrier signal with low frequency information called the modulating signal The carrier and modulating signals can have any waveshape but the carrier is usually a sine waveform Common Types of The two most common types of modulation are amplitude modulation AM Modulation and frequency modulation FM These two forms of modulation modify the carrier s amplitude or frequency respectively according to the instantaneous value of the modulating signal A third type of modulation is phase modulation PM which is similar to FM except that the phase of the carrier waveform is varied rather than its frequency Another type of modulation is frequency shift keying FSK where the output frequency shifts between two frequencies depending on the state of a digital modulating signal Finally pulse width modulation PWM is provided for pulse waveforms o
291. odulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine e Square has 50 duty cycle ru e Ramp has 100 symmetry e Triangle has 50 symmetry e Negative ramp has 0 symmetry P e You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform e f you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 16K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation After enabling PM press the PM Shape softkey and select the desired shape PM 1 2 INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Features and Functions 3 9 5 Modulating Waveform Frequency Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel Modulating frequency internal source 81150A 1 mHz to 10 MHz 81160A 1 mHz to 50 MHz The default is 10 Hz After enabling PM press the PM Frequency softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired PM Frequency PM 1 2 INTernal FREQuency frequency MINimum MAX
292. odulation mode is enabled When you enable sweep the burst or modulation mode is turned off You must enable sweep before setting up any of the other sweep Sweep parameters Press on to output a sweep using the present settings for frequency output amplitude and offset To avoid multiple waveform changes enable the sweep mode after you have set up the other modulation parameters SWEep 1 2 STATe ON OFF 3 12 2 Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Features and Functions Start Frequency and Stop Frequency The start frequency and stop frequency set the upper and lower frequency bounds for the sweep The 81150A 81160A begins at the start frequency sweeps to the stop frequency and then resets back to the start frequency Start and Stop frequencies 81150A 1 uHz to 240 MHz 81160A 1 uHz to 500 MHz The sweep is phase continuous over the full frequency range The default start frequency is 100 Hz The default stop frequency is 1 kHz To sweep up in frequency set the start frequency stop frequency To sweep down in frequency set the start frequency gt stop frequency For sweeps with Marker Off the Strobe Out signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Strobe Out signal is a high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the midpoint of the sweep The frequency of the Strobe Out waveform is equal to the specified sweep time The signal is
293. of the transition definition But the transition time does vary with changing frequency in this case The benefit of describing the transition from one bit value to the following one is that the value of the previous bit does have influence the current bit This allows the emulation of various real world effects and distortions like capacitive loads asymmetric delay or crossing point deviations as well as duty cycle distortions or arbitrary transition times The use cases are almost unlimited as long as the required signal transitions can be expressed by an arbitrary waveform and do not depend on anything else than the value of the previous and current bit Max DAC NRZ mode with minimum transition times Bit shape waveforms user defined Output waveform 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 619 620 1 4 5 Introduction Number of Levels 2 External Patterns In some applications a memory or algorithm PRBS based pattern generation cannot cover all the required test patterns For such applications i e a protocol exerciser the 81150A 81160A can be used to re time and re shape an externally provided data stream Externally provided patterns are being input at the MOD IN input on the rear panel of the instrument The available data rate is limited to 10Mbit s in this case The externally provided signal is being evaluated against either 1 or 2 adjustable threshold voltages Threshold comparison Symbol
294. offset 1 0 corresponds to 5 0 V and 1 0 corresponds to 5 0 V The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter Downloading floating point values using DATA VOLATILE is slower than downloading binary values using DATA DAC VOLATILE but is more convenient when using trigonometric functions which return values from 1 0 to 1 0 Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference The DATA command overwrites the previous waveform in volatile memory and no error will be generated Use the DATA COPY command to copy the waveform to non volatile memory Up to 4 user defined waveforms can be stored in non volatile memory Use the DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the 4 user defined waveforms in nonvolatile memory Use the DATA CAT command to list all waveforms currently stored in volatile and non volatile memory as well as the seven built in waveforms After downloading the waveform data to memory use the FUNC USER command to choose the active waveform and the FUNC USER command to output it The Example below shows how to use the DATA command to download seven points to volatile memory amp Whenever possible use the binary waveform data download refer to DATA 1 2 DAC on page 341 instead of a comma separated specification of the w
295. oltage is found by summing the squares of the voltages of every point in the waveform dividing the sum by the number of points and then taking the square root of that quotient The RMS value of a waveform also represents the one cycle average power in the signal Power Vs P Crest factor is the ratio of a signal s peak value to its RMS value and will differ according to waveshape The table below shows several common waveforms with their respective crest factors and RMS values Tutorial Waveform Crest Factor Shape C F AC RMS AC DC RMS y V V ES AU Nose 1 414 1 414 V y V V REN b tree 1732 1 732 E Van V Y V Attributes of AC Signals Crest Factor e If an average reading voltmeter is used to measure the DC voltage of a waveform the reading may not agree with the DC Offset setting of the function generator This is because the waveform may have a non zero average value that would be added to the DC Offset You may occasionally see ac levels specified in decibels relative to 1 milliwatt dBm Since dBm represents a power level you will need to know the signal s RMS voltage and the load resistance in order to make the calculation dBm 10 x logio P 0 001 where P V2 R For a sine wave into a 50Q load the following table relates dBm to voltage 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 637 For a sine wave into a 50Q load the following table relates dBm t
296. on Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions Burst Phase The burst phase defines the starting phase of the burst Burst phase 360 degrees to 360 degrees The default is 0 degrees From the remote interface you can set the starting phase in degrees or radians using the UNIT ANGL command From the front panel the starting phase is always displayed in degrees radians are not available If you set the starting phase in radians from the remote interface and then return to front panel operation you will see that the 81150A 81160A converts the phase to degrees For sine and arb waveforms 0 degrees is the point at which the waveform crosses zero volts or the dc offset value in a positive going direction For arbitrary waveforms 0 degrees is the first waveform point downloaded to memory The burst phase has no effect on pulse ramp square or noise waveforms The burst phase is also used in the gated burst mode When the gate signal goes inactive the current waveform cycle is completed and then the 81150A 81160A stops The output will remain at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase To set the burst phase press the Start Phase softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired phase in degrees BURSt 1 2 PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum 245 246 3 14 Arbitrary Waveforms In
297. on The External In Threshold Voltage defines the threshold voltage that is used to detect signals at the External In Connector The Threshold can be set to any voltage in the range of 10 V to 10 V for the 81150A 5 V to 5 V for the 81160A Features and Functions Front Panel Press the External In Threshold softkey to select from the pre defined Operation threshold settings TTL or ECL Use the numeric keypad or the rotary knob to select any other threshold voltage Remote Interface ARM LEVel threshold vol tage Operation Input Impedance Introduction 81150A The Input Impedance of the External In connector can be set to 50 Q or 10 kQ 81160A The Input Impedance of the External In connector can be set to 50 Q or 1 kQ Front Panel Press the External In Impedance softkey to select the Input Impedance Operation Remote Interface ARM IMPedance input impedance Operation The value will be rounded to the allowed settings Hysteresis Introduction 81160A only The Hysteresis of the External In connector can be set to High or Low Select High for Input signals that have slow transition times and that may be noisy Select Low for input signals with fast transitions Front Panel Press the Hysteresis softkey to select the Hysteresis Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 133 134 Remote Interface Operation Frequency Introduction Remote Interface Operation ARM SI EQuence STAR
298. on command ATS Te e fitis important to know whether the last command is completed then send the common command OPC 303 4 2 81150A 81160A SCPI Command Summary Apply Commands Command APPLy 1 2 DC 304 NOISe PULSe RAMP SI SQUare USER Nusoid Parameter frequency DEFault amplitude DEFault gt offset frequency DEFault amplitude lt offset gt lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt See Page 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 Arbitrary Commands Command DATA 1 2 ATTRibute AVERage CFACtor POINts PTPeak CATalog COPY DAC DELete ALL MODulation DAC COPY NVOLatile CATalog FREE QUANtity FORMAT BORDer FUNCCtion 1 J2 MODulation USER USER 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference Parameter VOLATILE value value lt arb name gt lt arb name gt lt arb name gt lt arb name gt destination arb name gt VOLATILE VOLATILE binary block value value lt arb name gt VOLATILE value
299. onds by 4 ns SOURce PULSe TRANsition 1 2 LEADING Sufficient to use PULS TRAN sets the leading edge in seconds output 1 e The commands to set the timing and level parameters 81150A 81160A is a real 2 channel instrument have to be specified for output 1 and output 2 If there is no output specified the command will set the default output 1 So for setting a high level of 3 Volts for output 1 and output 2 the commands are VOLT HIGH 3V sets high level of 3 V at out 1 VOLTI HIGH 3V sets high level of 3 V at out 1 VOLT2 HIGH 3V sets high level of 3 V at out 2 Recommendations for programming the 81150A 81160A 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference e tis recommended to test the new setting which will be programmed on the instrument by setting it up manually Enable the outputs so that the instruments error check system is on and possible parameter conflicts are immediately displayed When you have found the correct setting then use this to create the program In the program it is recommended to send the command for enabling outputs for example OUTPut1 ON as the last command With this procedure itis possible to increase programming speed RST DISP OFF OUTP1 ON set default settings switch off display update other commands to set modes and parameters enable the output 1 e Selftest of the instrument can be invoked by the comm
300. one unit to another 47 2414 Selecting Dela zenenan ore necem retinet OE amend aera anes 48 2 15 Selecting DG Volts rinisur ordei t ues it eta eut sd 50 2 16 Setting a DC Offset Voltage tenente nette nennen 51 2 47 Setting the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave sse netten 53 2 18 Setting the High Level and Low Level Values sss 54 2 449 Configuring a Pulse Waveform ccccessessessesessessessessesscsessessessesseeaceessesseesteaeeaseessnseneateateateess 55 2 20 Setting up a Pattern tenete tenete tenete tnt tenente 57 Contents 2 21 Viewing a Waveform Graph tenete tenete tenente 59 2 22 Outputting a Stored Arbitrary Waveform esses netten tnnnnnnns 60 2 23 Selecting the Output Termination sse tenentes 62 2 24 Outputting a Modulated Waveform c cccccccecsccsessessessesessessesseesessssessesseestesteassnssesseeateateateess 64 2 5 Outputting an FSK Waveform sse tenente tenent 67 2 20 Outputting a PWM Waveform sssssssssssssseee nennen tenente tete tenen 70 2 27 Outputting a Frequency Sweep tette tenet tn tenta tenta tantas 72 2 28 Outputting a Burst Waveform ccceccessessesecsessessessessesscsessessessessesassseessesstesteaseeseesseeatenteateess 75 2 20 Triggering a Sweep or Burst tenente tenete 78 2 30 Storing the Instrument State tentent tenens 79 2 31 Configuring the Remote
301. or complete instructions on how to establish connections to the instrument refer to the user documentation delivered with the Agilent IO Libraries Suite Remote Host LAH GPIB USB M C0M SCPI A Instruments 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference The instrument supports the following possibilities for remotely connecting LAN The instrument s network settings are managed by the internal instrument software and the connected network environment You can press the Utility key at the front panel select 1 0 interface gt LAN using the instrument s softkeys to get the network setting The default setting for DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is ON Contact you network administrator if you need help in defining your own instrument s IP address GPIB To connect to the generator via GPIB you have to have the instrument s GPIB address To see the address on the display press the Utility key at the front panel select I O Interface using the instrument s softkeys The default address is 10 When setting the GPIB address it is recommended that you do not use the GPIB address 21 This address is reserved for a GPIB controller USB The generator has a device type USB port on the rear panel for remote programming This is the non flat USB port close to the LAN connector To connect to the instrument via USB you need the instrument s USB ID If the instrument s USB port is connected to a compu
302. or sweeps with Marker Off the Strobe Out signal is a square waveform with a 5096 duty cycle The Strobe Out signal is a TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the midpoint of the sweep The frequency of the Strobe Out waveform is equal to the specified sweep time The signal is output from the front panel Strobe Out connector e For sweeps with Marker On the Strobe Out signal is a TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the marker frequency The signal is output from the front panel Strobe Out connector e Voltage level at Strobe Out can be configured at TTL ECL or 2V levels e Start and Stop Frequency are limited by the output function and amplifier type e Center Frequency and Frequency Span are limited by the output function and amplifier range Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions Sweep After enabling dpa press the Start Frequency or Stop Frequency softkey again to toggle to the Center Freq or Freq Span softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired values FREQuency MAXimum FREQuency 1 2 SPAN lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 2 CENTer lt frequency gt MINimum 231 232 3 12 4 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Idle Frequency Whenever the istrument is waiting for an active trigger edge or an active gate signal it
303. orial Purpose of this The purpose of this manual is to enable you to install initialize and start the Manual 81150A 81160A and to understand the front panel menu features of the 81150A 81160A Who should read This manual is intended for testers and Engineers who will be using the this Manual 81150A 81160A to test other devices How this document This section provides information on the chapters and their content is organized Navigating this manual What information does it contain Introduction Introduces the 81150A 81160A defines the purpose and intended audience of this manual explains how information is organized in this manual Front Panel Menu Operation Introduces you to the Front Panel Menu and describes some of the menu features of the 81150A 81160A Pulse Pattern and Function Arbitrary Noise Generator Features and Functions Gives a detailed description of the 81150A 81160A s capabilities and operation You will find this section useful when you are operating the 81150A 81160A from the front panel or over the remote interface Introduction What information does it contain Remote Programming Reference Contains reference information to help you program the 81150A 81160A over the remote interface Error Messages Describes the error reporting model that is used by the 81150A 81160A Application Programs Describes the various types of programming examples available for the 81150A 81160A and wher
304. orm points Select the arbitrary waveform function Arb Press E to select the arbitrary function crime 1000000000000 MHz 1 Delay 0 000 s Amplitude 1 000 Wp Offset 0 000 Load Imp 50 0 Q Outp Imp Polarity Continuous Continuous 1800000000000 MHz M tise Waveform EH Start the arbitrary Press the Edit Waveform softkey and then the Create New softkey to create waveform editor a new waveform the previous waveform in volatile memory will be over written 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 247 248 Frequency iQO000000000 V 1 Delay 0 000 s Amplitude 1 000 V5 Offset 0 000 V5 Load Imp 50 0 Q Outp Imp 50 Arb Wfm X RISE Polar ity Normal Continuous Continuous Delete Stored Configure the new Configure the new waveform by providing all the information shown in the waveform following screen Create new waveform Initial Points 4 Interpolation On Auto Update Off Continuous Continuous Set the initial number of waveform points Select the interpolation method Auto Update Start the point by point editing process 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions You can create an arbitrary waveform with up to 16384 16K points The waveform editor initially builds a waveform with two points and automatically connects the last point of the waveform to the voltage level of the first point to create a continuous waveform Press the Initial Points softkey to s
305. output from the front panel Strobe Out connector For sweeps with Marker On the Strobe Out signal is a high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the marker frequency The signal is output from the front panel Strobe Out connector Voltage level at Strobe Out can be configured at TTL ECL or 2V levels Start and Stop Frequency are limited by the output function and amplifier type After enabling sweeps press the Start Frequency or Stop Frequency softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency FREQuency 1 2 STARt lt frequency gt MINimum FRI 81150A and 81160A User s Guide fAXimum EQuency 1 2 STOP lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 229 230 3 12 3 Introduction Characteristics Center Frequency and Frequency Span If desired you can set the frequency boundaries of the sweep using a center frequency and frequency span These parameters are similar to the start frequency and stop frequency see the previous page and are included to give you added flexibility e 81150A Center frequency 1 uHz to 240 MHz The default is 550 Hz e 81160A Center frequency 1 uHz to 500 MHz The default is 550 Hz e 81150A Frequency span 0 Hz to 240 MHz The default is 900 Hz e 81160A Frequency span 0 Hz to 500 MHz The default is 900 Hz e To sweep up in frequency set a positive frequency span e To sweep down in frequency set a negative frequency span e F
306. pattern sequence being used or to trigger gate each bit in the pattern sequence individually Note that in burst mode a triggered gated burst of bits does generate as many bits as defined by the burst length while a burst of blocks does generate as many repetitions of the pattern as the burst length defines In gated mode the bit or block is always completed when the gate signal is getting deasserted After stopping the output level will be held constant at the last bits value The selection whether the pattern is being bit or block triggered is done on the trigger mode screen 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 615 616 7 4 4 Defining the Shape of a Bit Introduction The NRZ signals and the Arbitrary Bit Shapes are explained in this section NRZ Signals Introduction In NRZ mode the transition times can be adjusted using the leading edge parameter The transition time defines the time it takes to move from one signal level to the next one Transition times in NRZ mode are configured on the Pulse Screen using the Leading Edge Parameter The transition time is specified from 10 to 90 of Amplitude Refer to the Pulse Parameter Definitions for more details NRZ mode with minimum dil d LI MaxDAC transition times H lt Min DAC NRZ mode with transition time 2 1 3 period Data Pattern 0 1001 101 transition time gt gt period Tutorial Arbitrary Bit Shapes Introduction 81150A and 81
307. pecify the initial number of waveform points you can add or remove points later if necessary For this example set the initial number of points to 4 Press the Interpolation softkey to enable or disable linear interpolation between waveform points this feature is available from the front panel only With interpolation enabled default the waveform editor makes a straight line connection between points With interpolation disabled the waveform editor maintains a constant voltage level between points and creates a step like waveform For this example turn on linear interpolation On Changes of the waveform will be applied immediately to the output The editor is slower Off The waveform will be applied to output when editing is finished The editor is faster due to missing hardware update Press the Edit softkey to accept the initial waveform settings and begin point by point editing 249 250 Define the first Press Y softkey to set the voltage level for Point 1 this point is fixed at waveform point address 0 By default all points are set to 0 For this example set the value of Point 1 to 8191 Point 1 Number of Points 4 Continuous Continuous 3191 Define the next Press the Point softkey and then turn the knob to move to Point 2 or waveform point press the Next Point softkey Press the X softkey to set the address for the current point this softkey is not available for Point 1 Press the
308. peration Remote Interface Operation The gated mode is very closely related to the Triggered mode The instrument continuously generates the selected waveform sweep or burst while the selected gate is still active If the gate is getting inactive the current cycle will be finished If the gate is getting active again while the previous cycle is being finished then there will be no discontinuity at the outputs Cont Trig Gated Press the aan E S or the key to select the desired trigger mode Pressing the illuminated key on the Front Panel will show the Trigger Mode screen To select continuous mode ARM SOURC IMMediate To select triggered mode ARM SOURCe INTernal2 EXTernal MANual ARM SOURce EDGE To select gated mode ARM SOURCe EXTernal MANual ARM SENSe LEVel Features and Functions 3 1 1 Arming Source Introduction External In Internal 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The following sources are available e External In e nternal e Man This input allows to define the decision in a 10 V for 81150A 5 V for 81160A voltage window The input signal is referenced to chassis ground 81150A The input impedance may be set to either 50 Q or 10 kQ 81160A The input impedance may be set to either 50 Q or 1 kQ Each channel of the Agilent 81150A 81160A contains it s own internal trigger event generator The frequency of the trigger event may be a
309. play Returning to Local Mode To return to local mode press the front panel Graph Local key When you power cycle the instrument it will also start in local mode Overheat Protection The generator protects itself from damage by overheating by shutting down itself in such cases If the temperature exceeds a certain threshold the instrument will immediately shut down itself as mentioned and a self test error will be stored in the instrument s error queue when the instrument is switched on again Remote Programming Reference 4 8 2 Application Programs Introduction This chapter contains several remote interface example programs to help you develop programs for your own application Chapter 4 Remote Programming Reference lists the syntax for the SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands available to program the generator These example programs are included in this chapter to demonstrate controlling the instrument using SCPI commands All of these programs are created by means of Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 and use the Agilent IO Library Suite features Visual Studio 2005 C Unmanaged IDN Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide This example program queries via the GPIB interface the instrument for an identification string and prints the result L e You must change the address accordingly Here 10 is used as the default address of the instrument e Your application must link to VISA import librarie
310. ple which shows you how to create edit and store an arbitrary bit waveform from the front panel Front Panel After selecting the Pattern Setup softkey press MORE and then press the Operation Edit Bit Waveform softkey Create New Bitshape Front Panel After selecting Edit Bit Waveform softkey press the Create New softkey Operation This screen is shown in the following image To Edit Stored Edit VOLATILE and Delete Stored bit waveforms refer to section Creating Editing and Storing a Pattern Pattern Setup Pattern Mode Off Pattern Source Internal Pattern Name VOLATILE Bit Shape A irar i Bit Waveform VOLATILE Continuous Continuous Edit bit waveform Edit Edit Delete Stored VOLATILE Stored Configure the new Configure the new waveform by providing all the information shown in the waveform following screen 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 171 172 Set the initial number of waveform points Select the interpolation method Create new waveform Initial Points Interpolation On Auto Update Off Continuous Continuous ee eee Initial Inter Auto Points polation EDIT y EJ You can create an arbitrary bit waveform with up to 64 points per bit Depending on the number of levels of the pattern being used there are 4 9 or 16 different bit shapes to be defined in one bit shape waveform Keep in mind that the waveform is not being played back in sequential order but instead the samples of one bi
311. plitude of the modulating waveform For this example you will output an AM waveform with 80 modulation depth The carrier will be a 5 kHz sine wave and the modulating waveform will be a 200 Hz sine wave AIT e Mee du pereje Sine Press AX and then press the Frequency Ampl and Offset softkeys to configure the carrier waveform For this example select a 5 kHz sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp Cod Press and then select AM using the Type softkey Notice that a status message AM by Sine is shown in the status line The status line is located between the parameters section of the screen and the input field AM by Sine Continuous Continuous AM Source Set the modulation depth Set the modulating frequency Select the modulating waveform shape 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Front Panel Menu Operation Press the AM Depth softkey and then set the value to 8096 using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys Press the AM Frequency softkey and then set the value to 200 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys Press More and then press the AM Shape softkey to select the shape of the modulating waveform For this example select a sine wave At this point the 81150A 81160A outputs an AM waveform with the specified modulation parameters if the output is enabled AM Internal Modulation Type Source AM Depth 20 0 95 AM Frequency
312. points Pressing this softkey will toggle between Frequency and Period representation Output Pressing this softkey will open the output aep configuration screen Pressing the MORE key switches to the next layer of softkeys on the current screen Front Panel Menu Operation ancel Pressing the Cancel key cancels the selection input and helps you exit out of a screen But the functionality of exiting out of a screen is limited to a few screens like selecting an Arbitrary waveform H Ch 1 The 81150A 81160A consists of two channels and operates in two different modes of operation Coupling Coupling off The two channels operate entirely independent Frequency generation for both channels is based on same clock reference ch 2 Coupling on The frequency trigger mode waveform type and advanced mode are identical for both channels The delay between the channels is specified A modulation input for AM FM PM FSK PWM for each channel is provided on the back panel In the two channel version each channel can modulate the other channel Refer to the Appendix for a list of all coupled parameters Press the Graph key to view a graphical representation of the waveform Press it again to exit from that mode Not every screen has a graphical representation e g like the Trigger Mode Screen Numeric Keypad These keys are used to select and modify parameters when operating the Cursor Keys instrument Rotary Knob Use the num
313. ption DIG TRAN DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern TRANsition list of values Use this command to download user defined bitshape waveforms Bitshape waveforms describe the transition between MLbit levels Each transition is defined with up to 64 waveform points Depending on the current number of levels a certain minimum and maximum number of waveform points is required to describe all transitions of of minimum of maximum of levels transitions waveform points waveform points 2 4 2 2 4 256 24 64 3 9 23 3 9 576 9 64 4 16 4 4 16 1024 16 64 All 4 9 or 16 transitions are downloaded as a single waveform The order of transitions is as follows For 2 levels 030 021 10 121 For 3 levels 030 021 022 120 121 122 230 231 232 For 4 levels 020 021 022 023 190 3293 Each waveform point is specified as a floating point value between 1 minimum DAC value to 1 maximum DAC value The number of downloaded values must be between the minimum and maximum number of waveform points and it must be a multiple of the number of transitions The downloaded points are evenly distributed across the transitions and DAC values will be linearly interpolated E g if you download 8 points for a 2 level bitshape each transition will be defined by 2 points with linear interpolation in between amp The number of levels DIG NLEV must be set before using this command because
314. r defined waveforms Returns 4 DATA2 NVOL QUAN Response 4 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FORM BORD FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped Used for binary block transfers only Select the byte order for binary transfers in the block mode using the DATA DAC command The default is NORM The FORM BORD query returns NORM or SWAP In NORM byte order default the most significant byte MSB of each data point is assumed first In SWAP byte order the least significant byte LSB of each data point is assumed first Most computers use the swapped byte order The instrument represents binary data as signed 16 bit integers which are sent as two bytes Therefore each waveform data point requires 16 bits which must be transferred as two bytes on the instrument s interfaces FORM BOARD NORM 351 352 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FUNC 1 2 MOD USER FUNCtion 1 2 MODulation USER arb name gt VOLATILE Select one of the seven built in arbitrary waveforms one of four user defined waveforms or the waveform currently downloaded to volatile memory The FUNC USER query returns either EXP RISE EXP FALL HAVERSINE SINC CARDIAC VOLATILE GAUSSIAN NEG RAMP or the name of any user defined wavefo
315. r External INTernal2 Features and Functions 3 11 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide In Pulse Width Modulation PWM the width of a pulse waveform is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform The width of the pulse can be expressed either as a pulse width expressed in time units like the period or a duty cycle expressed as a percentage of the period The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel For more information on the fundamentals of Pulse Width Modulation refer the Tutorial chapter amp e PWM is not available in pattern mode Continuous PWM Duty Cycle 50 Duty Cycle Deviation 40 max Modulation Signal min Trigger Out 4 Strobe Out Out J 215 216 3 11 1 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Selecting PWM Modulation The 81150A 81160A only allows PWM to be selected for a pulse waveform and PWM is the only modulation type supported for pulse The 81150A 81160A will not allow PWM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled You must enable PWM before setting up any of the other modulation parameters Pulse Mod Press usd to select pulse and
316. ra waveform points are removed using decimation AMI INT FUNC USER 379 380 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example AM 1 2 SOUR SOURCE AM 1 2 SOURce INTernal 1 INTernal2 EXTernal Select the source of the modulating signal The instrument will accept an internal or external modulation source The default is INT 1 The AM 1 2 SOUR query returns INT or INT2 or EXT INT selects an internal modulation signal and INT2 selects the other channel of the instrument if available If you select the EXTernal source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The modulation depth is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 100 using the AM 1 2 DEPT command then when the modulating signal is at 2 5 5 Volts the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 2 5 5 Volts then the output will be at the minimum amplitude If you select the other channel as the modulation waveshape INT2 the SCPI command AM 1 2 INT FREQ doesn t apply AM1 SOUR EXT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference AM 1 2 STAT SOURCE AM 1 2 STATe ON OFF Disable or enable
317. racters can be numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ Blank spaces are not allowed If you specify a name with more than 12 characters a Program mnemonic too long error is generated The VOLATILE parameter is optional and can be omitted amp The keyword VOLATILE does not have a short form The following built in waveform names are reserved and cannot be used with the DATA COPY command EXP RISE EXP FALL HAVERSINE SINC GAUSSIAN CARDIAC and NEG_RAMP If you specify one of the built in waveforms a Cannot overwrite a built in waveform error is generated The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Therefore ARB 1 and arb 1 are the same name All characters are converted to upper case 339 340 Description Example If you copy to a waveform name that already exists the previous waveform is overwritten and no error will be generated However you cannot overwrite any of the seven built in waveforms Up to four user defined waveforms can be stored in non volatile memory If memory is full and you try to copy a new waveform to nonvolatile memory a Not enough memory error is generated Use the DATA DET command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory Use the DATA CAT command to list all waveforms currently stored in volatile and non volatile m
318. rameter Suffix Description Example DATA 1 2 ATTR POIN DATA 1 2 ATTRibute POINts lt arb name gt Query the number of points in the specified arbitrary waveform Returns a value from 1 to Samplemax points 81150A Samplemax 524288 512 k 81160A 1 channel Samplemax 262144 256 k 81160A 2 channels Samplemax 131072 128 k The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently active selected with FUNC USER command If you query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated DATA ATTR POIN EXP RISE Response 1 63840E 04 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DATA 1 2 ATTR PTP DATA 1 2 ATTRibute PTPeak lt arb name gt Query the peak to peak value of all data points for the specified arbitrary waveform The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently active selected with FUNC USER command This command returns a value from 0 to 1 0 with 1 0 indicating full amplitude available The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of binary values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is lower into 5
319. red units DC Off Offset o Load Imp 50 Q Outp Imp 50 Q Continuous Continuous 1 5 b uw Select and press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units You can choose from mVdc or Vdc When you select the units the 81150A 81160A outputs the waveform with the displayed offset if the output is enabled For this example press Vdc Front Panel Menu Operation 2 17 Setting the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave Introduction Select the square wave function Press the Duty Cycle softkey Enter the desired duty cycle 81150A and 81160A User s Guide At power on normally the instrument outputs the same setting as before power down The duty cycle is limited by the minimum pulse width of Wmin This means the duty cycle can get as low as 10096 Wmin period and as high as 10096 1 Wmin period 81150A Where Wmin is either 4 1ns or 10ns depending on the selected amplifier See section Amplifier Type Selection 81160A Where Wmin is 1 5ns The following steps show you how to change the duty cycle to 3096 Square Press the isl key and then set the desired output frequency to any value up to 120 MHz for the 81150A 330 MHz for the 81160A The duty cycle represents the amount of time per cycle that the square wave is at a high level Using the numeric keypad or the knob select a duty cycle value of 30 The 81150A 81160A adjusts the duty cycle immediately and outputs a square wave with the spe
320. rent output levels The number of levels that are used during the pattern generation is being defined when creating a new pattern and cannot be changed afterwards The definition of the output level that is being used by one bit is as follows Logical Bit Value Symbol 0 1 Logical Bit Value Symbol 0 electrical idle bit 1 Logical Bit Value Symbol 0 1 Output Level Low Level High Level Output Level Low Level Offset Level High Level Output Level Low Level Low Level 1 3 Amplitude Voltage Low Level 2 3 Amplitude Voltage High Level 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Tutorial The definition of the output levels above is only valid for NRZ formatted patterns When using arbitrary bitshapes the number of levels basically only defines how many different level transitions can be defined It is up to the user how the output level is being defined for the arbitrary bitshapes The High and Low Level that is configured on the outputs will only define the levels that will be achieved for minimum and maximum DAC settings 8191 The paticular output level is defined by the used DAC value s in the arb bitshape and can be distributed between High and Low Level as required by the application 613 7 4 2 Pattern Types and Sequencing Capabilities Introduction Internally 2 types of patterns can be generated e 81150A Memory based patterns with a length of up to 16 Mbit for 2 level patterns and up to 8 MS
321. requency Sine 1 uHz 81150A 240 MHz 81160A 500 MHz Square 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz Ramp 1 Hz 81150A 5 MHz 81160A 20 MHz Arbs 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz The internal modulating waveform is a square wave with a 50 duty cycle When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the Modulation In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output When other channel is selected as a modulation source then a DAC value below 0 will output the carrier frequency a DAC value gt 0 will output the hop frequency To set the hop frequency do the following Mod Press banged and then press the Modulation Type softkey to select FSK Press the Hop Frequency softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Features and Functions Remote Interface FSKey 1 2 FREQuency frequency MINimum Operation MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 3 10 5 FSK Rate Introduction The FSK rate is the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and the hop frequency when you select the internal FSK source FSK Hop e FSK rate internal source Frequency 81150A 1 mHz to 10 MHz Characteristics 811
322. ring for the alternative format list of values it is just a comma separated list of integer values You have to specify a timeout value using the viSetAttribute function if a large block of data has to be transferred to the instrument The transfer of a data block as a comma separated value list is also time consuming E g viSetAttribute vi V ATTR TMO VALUE VI TMO INFINITE Do not forget to reset the timeout to the previous setting after the waveform data transfer has finished 591 592 include visa stda include int tmain int h fx h argc TCHAR argv ViStatus errorStatus 0 ViSession viRm 0 vi 0 Open session to GPIB device at address 10 errorStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp viRm errorStatus viOpen viRm GPIBO 10 INSTR VI NULL 10000 amp vi double pi temp waveform n cycles damp factor data size short waveform 16000 long qus char cmd str 50 Setup the waveform pi 3 14159 The approximate value of PI n cycles 16 Toyal number of cycles damp factor 5 Damping factor data size 16000 Generate the waveform for i 1 i lt long data size i temp_wavef waveform i Set byte order dep NORMal SWAPped viPrintf vi Setup cmd cmd str s DATA DAC orm 1 sin 2 pi n_cycles 1 date Sige 5191 short temp_waveform exp damp factor i
323. ring the sweep The Strobe signal always goes from low to high at the beginning of the sweep Select from 1 uHz to 240 MHz limited to 5 MHz for ramps and 80 MHz for arbitrary and square waveforms The default is 500 Hz MIN the start or stop frequency whichever is lower MAX the start frequency or stop frequency whichever is higher The MARKer 1 2 FREQ query returns the marker frequency in Hertz When sweep is enabled the marker frequency must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency If you attempt to set the marker frequency to a frequency not in this range the instrument will automatically set the marker frequency equal to the start frequency or stop frequency whichever is closer MARK2 FREO 12 4MHZ Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference SWE 1 2 IDLE SOURCe SWEep 1 2 IDLE SFRequency EFRequency DC Specifies the so called sweep idle frequency while waiting for a new trigger event to start a new sweep cycle If the swe idle efr issent to the instrument the frequency of the output signal will stay on the stop end frequency of the sweep until a new trigger event occurs SFRequency The idle frequency is the Start FRequency EFRequency The idle frequency is the End FRequency stop frequency DC The idle frequency is a DC level
324. ristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide A modulated waveform consists of e Carrier Waveform Shape e Modulating Waveform Shape In AM the amplitude of the carrier is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform The 81150A 81160A will accept an internal or external modulation source For more information on the fundamentals of Amplitude Modulation refer to the Tutorial chapter e The 81150A 81160A will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable AM and FM at the same time When you enable AM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The 81150A 81160A will not allow AM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable AM the sweep or burst mode is turned off You must enable AM before setting up any of the other modulation Mod parameters Press lasal and then select AM using the Modulation Type softkey The AM waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency modulating frequency output amplitude and offset voltage To avoid multiple waveform changes enable AM after you have set up the other modulation parameters AM 1 2 STATe ON OFF 181 182 3 7 1 Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Selecting AM Modulation The 81150A 81160A will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you ca
325. rms in non volatile memory amp This command does not activate the selected arbitrary waveform Use the e g FM INT FUNC USER command to activate the usage of the modulation memory 16k The names of the seven built in arbitrary waveforms are EXP RISE EXP FALL HAVERSINE SINC GAUSSIAN CARDIAC and NEG RAMP To select the waveform currently stored in volatile modulation memory specify the VOLATILE parameter The keyword VOLATILE does not have a short form If you select a waveform name that is not currently downloaded a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Therefore ARB 1 and arb 1 are the same name All characters are converted to upper case FUNC2 MOD USER exp rise Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FUNC 1 2 USER FUNCtion 1 2 USER arb name gt VOLATILE Select one of the seven built in arbitrary waveforms one of the four user defined waveforms or the waveform currently downloaded to volatile memory The USER query returns EXP RISE EXP FALL HAVERSINE SINC CARDIAC VOLATILE GAUSSIAN NEG RAMP or the name of any user defined waveforms in non volatile memory
326. rms on a USB mass memory device e You can load arbitrary waveforms from the USB mass memory device into the volatile memory Points IM USER WEM wfm 6 28 2007 3 22 48 PM Continuous Continuous Internal Memory 4 Points IN VOLATILE lt Edit Memory gt al jS Bult In2M lt Built In gt lt Built I Continuous Continuous Features and Functions Memory Int USB This softkey toggles between the Internal storage locations and the USB mass memory Change Directory This softkey is only available when you are working with USB memory Press the Change Directory softkey to navigate to the selected directory Waveform Name This softkey is only available when storing a waveform You can assign a custom name to the four non volatile memory locations The custom name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character To add additional characters press the right cursor key until the cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob j To delete all characters to the right of the cursor press the 25 key DELETE This softkey deletes the currently highlighted waveform You cannot delete the built in waveforms and the waveform in the Volatile memory EDIT This softkey is only available when selecting stored waveforms for editing Pressing this softkey loads the selected wavform into volatile me
327. rom Arbitrary or NRZ Pattern Setup Pattern Mode Off Pattern Source Internal Pattern Name VOLATILE Bit Shape A DItT Bit Waveform CAP 2 Continuous Continuous Arbitrary E t iila Select Bit t Waveform Waveform E Operation Select Bit After selecting the Bit Shape softkey press the Select Bit Waveform Waveform softkey This brings you to the following screen 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 169 170 Internal Bitshape Memory Points PEN kc c a al C ontinuous ontinuous lt Built In gt a lt Built In gt I lt Built In gt lt Built In gt Edit Bit Waveform Press the Edit Bit Waveform softkey to go back to the Creating Editing and Storing a Bitshape screen as explained in section 3 5 7 D IGital 1 2 S1 GNal FORMat NRZ USER Remote Interface Select a bit shape that is stored in internal non volatile memory O Operation IGital 1 2 TRANsition SELect lt name gt Load a bit shape from external USB memory to VOLATILE memory MM Define the bit shape programmatically IGital IGital D iD 1 1 2 ET EMory LOAD TRANsition VOLATILE filename RANsition lt value gt lt value gt 2 TI RANsition DAC blockdata Features and Functions 3 5 7 Creating Editing and Storing a Bitshape Introduction This section gives an exam
328. rror queue the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue is cleared by the CLS command or when the power is cycled The error queue is not cleared by a reset RST command The error messages have the following format the error string may contain up to 255 characters 113 Undefined header SYST ERR Response 0 No error Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference SYST HELP HEAD SYSTem HELP HEADers The HEADers query shall return all SCPI commands and queries and IEEE 488 2 common commands and common queries implemented by the instrument The response shall be a DEFINITE LENGTH ARBITRARY BLOCK RESPONSE DATA element The full path for every command and query shall be returned separated by linefeeds The syntax of the response is defined as The nonzero digit and sequence of digit follow the rules in IEEE 488 2 Section 8 7 9 An SCPI header is defined as It shall contain all the nodes from the root The SCPI program mnemonic gt contains the node in standard SCPI format The short form shall use uppercase characters while the additional characters for the long form shall be in lowercase characters Default nodes shall be surrounded by square brackets 507 508 Description For example an instrument which implemented the required commands listed in Syntax amp Styl
329. s To keep this example simple configuring the Visual Studio 2005 is not described 589 590 include lt visa h gt include stdafx h int _tmain int argc TCHAR argv ViStatus errorStatus ViSession viRm 0 vi char buf Oxffff 0 J Open session to GP B device at address 10 errorStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp viRm errorStatus viOpen viRm GPIBO 10 INSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp vi Send an IDN string to the device viPrintf vi IDN n Read results viScanf vi t amp buf printf IDN response Close session viClose vi viClose viRm return 0 Ss n buf Example output of the short C Unmanaged program above IDN response Agilent 81160A DE1234567 0 22 104 12 0 Technologies 81150A Remote Programming Reference Visual Studio 2005 C Unmanaged Block Transfer Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Download binary or decimal integer values from 8191 to 8191 into volatile memory of the instrument You can download from 1 to Samplemax points per waveform in IEEE 488 2 binary block format or as a list of values 81150A Samplemax 524288 512 k 81160A 1 channel Samplemax 262144 256 k 81160A 2 channels Samplemax 131072 128 k The following small example downloads a created waveform in binary format and shows the formatting st
330. s generated DATA MOD COPY ARB 1 VOLATILE 347 348 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DATA 1 2 NVOL CAT DATA 1 2 NVOLatile CATalog Lists the names of all user defined arbitrary waveforms downloaded to non volatile memory Returns the names of up to four waveforms A series of quoted strings separated with commas is returned as shown in the example below If no user defined waveforms are currently downloaded the command returns a null string Use the DATA DEL command to delete any of the user defined waveforms in non volatile memory DATA2 NVOL CAT Response TEST1 ARB TEST2 ARB TEST3 ARB TEST4 ARB Remote Programming Reference Command DATA 1 2 NVOL FREE Long DATA 1 2 NVOLatile FREE Parameters m Parameter Suffix Description Query the number of free non volatile memory slots available to store user defined waveforms Returns the number of memory slots available to store user defined waveforms Returns 0 memory is full 1 2 3 or 4 Example DATA2 NVOL FREE Response 2 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 349 350 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DATA 1 2 NVOL QUAN DATA 1 2 NVOLatile QUANtity Query the number of total non volatile memory slots available to store use
331. s measured from 90 point on leading edge 90 Amplitude Settling Time 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 663 664 Repeatability When an instrument operates under the same environmental conditions and with the same settings the value of a parameter will lie within a band inside the accuracy window Repeatability defines the width of this band Accuracy Window iim Repeatability Band Appendix A 3 Agilent 81150A 81160A in comparison with other Agilent instruments A 3 1 Agilent 81110A 81104A 81101A instrument family Introduction The implemented SCPI command set is based on Agilent s 81110A 81104A 81101A Pulse Data Generator product family Most of the SCPI commands available for that instrument family are also available in the Agilent 81150A 81160A instrument The following table lists the SCPI commands which are not available in 81150A 81160A as compared to the above mentioned instruments Pattern Data SCPI subsystem Set read pattern data DIGital STIMulus PATTern DATA 1 2 3 start data Set PRBS 2n 1 data DIGital STIMulus PATTern PRBS 1 2 3 lt n gt length Set present pattern with clock divided by n DIGital STIMulus PATTern PRESet 1 2 3 lt n length Switch pattern mode on off DIGital STIMulus PATTern STATe ON OFF Update the hardware with pattern DIGital STIMulus PA
332. s are limited to user defined patterns and PRBS sequences The preview consists of the first bits of the data block The preview usually doesn t show the complete pattern After selecting the Pattern Setup softkey press the Select Pattern softkey Use the Rotary Knob or Arrow Keys to select the desired Pattern Internal Pattern Memory Number of Levels 2 Length 2047 lt Built In gt a lt Built In gt i lt Built In gt lt Built Continuous Continuous Internal Pattern Memory Number of Levels 2 Length 2047 PRBS 11 lt Built In gt a lt Built In gt I lt Built In gt lt Built 1 Continuous Continuous Select highlighted pattern Features and Functions Select Highlighted Click Yes to confirm and No to reject the selected pattern Pattern Remote Interface DIGital 1 2 SELect lt name gt Operation Or MMEMory LOAD PATTern VOLATILE filename 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 161 3 5 5 Creating Editing and Storing a Pattern Introduction This section gives an example which shows you how to create edit and store a pattern from the front panel Create a New Pattern Front Panel After selecting the Edit Pattern softkey press the Create New softkey Operation Use this screen to modify the attributes of the new pattern and finally press the EDIT softkey to reach the Pattern Editor screen as shown below Create new pattern Number of Bits Number of Levels
333. s at the bottom of the parameter display For example to select delay press the Delay softkey e As inthe normal display mode you can edit numbers using either the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys e The parameter which is selected using the softkey highlights the same value in the graph diagram also For e g if you select Period then the value of Period will be highlighted in the graph Graph e To exit the Graph Mode press sali again TRG QUT I ae l ET M 10 00 ms 1 000 V 0 000 V x E 25 nS Ww M 10 00 ms e Graph B The key also serves as a Local key to restore front panel control after remote interface operations 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 59 60 2 22 Outputting a Stored Arbitrary Waveform Introduction Select the arbitrary waveform function Select the active waveform There are seven built in arbitrary waveforms stored in the non volatile memory The following steps show you how to output the built in exponential fall waveform from the front panel Arb When you press the E key to select the arbitrary waveform function the 81150A 81160A displays the currently used waveform in the textual screens indicating which waveform is currently selected the default is exponential rise Steps e Press the MORE softkey twice e This brings you to a screen which has Select Waveform softkey on it e Press the Select Waveform softkey and select from the given options Choose
334. s sweeps will be generated while the gate signal is active A sweep will always be finished before starting a new one This does limit the maximum trigger rate or the gate timing to the sweep time or multiple in case of a gated sweep Tutorial A sweep consists of a finite number of small frequency steps Since each step takes the same amount of time longer sweep times result in smaller steps and therefore better resolution The number of discrete frequency points in the sweep is automatically calculated by the function generator and is based on the sweep time you select asre aneee eene Oo rerepecre errebrerejania Tp ESEEES ES ERE ES Frequency Sweep For triggered sweeps the trigger source can be an external signal an internal timer the Man key or a command received from the remote interface The input for external trigger signals is the front panel External In connector This connector accepts levels in the range of 10 V for the 81150A 5 V for the 81160A and is referenced to chassis ground 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 647 648 Strobe Out and Marker Signals The output from the front panel Strobe connector goes high at the beginning of each sweep If you have disabled the Marker function the Strobe signal goes low at the midpoint of the sweep However if you have enabled the Marker function the Strobe Out signal goes low when the output frequency reaches the specified marker frequency The marker freque
335. s the time from the start of the rising edge of the pulse to the start of the next falling edge The pulse duty cycle range is 0 percent to 100 percent However the pulse duty cycle is limited by the minimum pulse width and edge time restrictions which prevent you from setting exactly 0 percent or 100 percent amp This command is affected by the PULS HOLD 1 2 command which determines the value to be held constant as the period is adjusted the specified pulse width value or the specified pulse duty cycle value or the specifies trailing delay See the PULS HOLD 1 2 command for further information FUNC2 PULS DCYC 10PCT 437 438 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FUNC 1 2 PULS DEL HOLD SOURce FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe DELay HOLD TIME PRATio DEGree Set the coupling between the pulse period and the pulse delay T ME PRATio FUNCI PULS DEL HOLD TIME EGree The absolute pulse delay is held fixed when the pulse period is varied The pulse delay delay as ratio of period is held fixed when the pulse period is varied Holds the delay in degrees fixed Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FUNC 1 2 PULS DEL UNIT SOURce FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe DELay UNIT S SEC
336. s the instrument to perform an internal self calibration and generates a response that indicates whether or not the device completed the self calibration without error Additional information about any calibration errors may be contained in the error queue The instrument must be completely disconnected from all external equipment before executing CAL Clear the event register in all register groups This command also clears the error queue and cancels a OPC operation amp t doesn t clear the enable register Enable bits in the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in the Status Byte The selected bits are summarized in the Standard Event bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register The ESE query returns a value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits enabled decimal by the ESE command These bits are not cleared by a CLS command Value Range 0 255 Query the Standard Event Status Register Once a bit is set it remains set until cleared by a CLS clear status command or queried by this command A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register Read the instrument s identification string which contains four fields separated by commas The first field is the manufacturer s name the second field is the model number the third field is the serial number and the fourth field is a revision code which contains four numbers separate
337. se width is varied The ratio of transition time to pulse width is held when the pulse width is varied Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PULS TRAN 1 2 TRA SOURce PULSe TRANsition 1 2 TRAiling lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the edge time in seconds for the trailing edges The edge time represents the time from the 9096 threshold to the 10 threshold of each edge The PULS TRAN 1 2 TRA query returns the edge time in seconds PULS TRAN1 TRA 89 9NS 463 464 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example PULS TRAN 1 2 TRA AUTO SOURCe PULSe TRANsition 1 2 TRAiling AUTO OFF ON ONCE It s used to set the automatic coupling of the pulse trailing edge transition time to the leading edge transition time ON The trailing edge transition time is automatically set to the same value as the leading edge and is updated automatically each time the leading edge transition time changes OFF The trailing edge leading edge transition time is independently programmable ONCE The trailing edge transition time is set ONCE to the same value as the leading edge PULS TRAN1 TRA AUTO OFF Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference
338. ssed either as a pulse width expressed in time units like the period or a duty cycle expressed as a percentage of the period The instrument will accept an internal or external modulation source Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference PWM 1 2 DEV SOURCE PWM 1 2 DEViation lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Set the pulse width deviation in seconds This value represents the variation in width in seconds from the pulse width of the carrier pulse waveform The PWM 1 2 DEV query returns the pulse width deviation in seconds e The pulse width deviation cannot exceed the current pulse width e The pulse width deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width If you select the External modulating source PWM 1 2 SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the width deviation to 10 us then a 2 5V 5V signal level corresponds to a 10 us deviation Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels produce negative deviation amp The operation of the PWM 1 2 DEV command is affected by the FUNC 1 2 PULS HOLD The FUNC PULS HOLD command determines whether pulse width the default or pulse duty cycle values are to be held constant as the period is varied
339. t LAYer HYSTeresis LOW 81160A only The frequency applied to External In is measured ARM SI NR3 EQuence STARt LAYer EFR Equency qonly Features and Functions 3 3 2 Modulation In Parameters Introduction Modulation In Parameters The Modulation In Parameters are all located on the MOD IN screen To show the MOD IN screen press the MOD IN softkey on any of the modulation screens The Modulation In connector has the following parameters e 81150A only Input Voltage Range e 81150A and 81160A Input Impedance e 81150A and 81160A FSK Threshold Voltage These are explained below Input Voltage Range Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 81150A only When selecting external modulation source the Input Voltage Range defines the full scale of the modulation signal It can be selected between 2 5V and 5V 81160A The input voltage range is 2 5V fix 135 136 Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation e Press the MOD IN softkey to go to the Modulation In screen e Press the Input Range softkey Modulation Type j Source External FSK External Continuous Continuous Hop i Frequenc MOD IN Input Range 5y Input Impedance 50 Q Threshold FSK External Continuous Continuous Impedance f Threshold EXTernal RANGe lt volts gt MINimum MAXimum FM 1 2 EXTernal RANGe lt volts gt MINimum MAXimum PM 1 2 EXTerna
340. t E2094 1 0 Libraries software e f you are using GPIB The Agilent E2094 1 0 Libraries software is provided with Agilent GPIB 1 0 products The software should have been loaded when you installed your GPIB interface card in your PC e f you are using USB or LAN If you don t have a copy you can order the Agilent E2094 I O Libraries software on CD ROM You must have version M order Agilent product number E2094M or a later version to support USB and LAN 599 600 You can obtain the Agilent 1 0 Libraries through the Agilent Developer Network Go to www agilent com find adn and purchase an ADN Professional Membership This gives you the right to download the latest version of the Agilent 1 0 Libraries Look for the Agilent I O Libraries link under Downloads on the ADN web site The programs given in the CD are protected by copyright Copyright 2007 Agilent Technologies Inc You have a royalty free right to use modify reproduce and distribute the Sample Application Files and or any modified version in any way you find useful provided that you agree that Agilent has no warranty obligations or liability for any Sample Application Files Agilent Technologies provides programming examples for illustration only All sample programs assume that you are familiar with the programming language being demonstrated and the tools used to create and debug procedures Agilent support engineers can help explain the functionality of A
341. t No 81150A Serial No DE1234567 Channels 2 Software Rey 0 22 80 20 Hardware Rey 0 Continuous Continuous Software Update Use the following command to read the 81150A 81160A s firmware revision numbers be sure to dimension a string variable with at least 80 characters IDN This command returns a string in the form Agilent Technologies 81150A 81160A sssssssss x x x x h sssssssss Serial Number X X X X Software Revision h Hardware Revision Features and Functions 3 15 10 SCPI Language Version Query Introduction Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The 81150A 81160A complies with the rules and conventions of the present version of SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments You can determine the SCPI version with which the instrument is in compliance by sending a query from the remote interface You cannot query the SCPI version from the front panel SYSTem VERSion Returns a string in the form YYYY V where YYYY represents the year of the version and V represents a version number for that year e g 1999 0 213 274 3 16 Remote Interface Configuration Introduction This section gives information on configuring the 81150A 81160A for remote interface communication For information on configuring the instrument from the front panel see Configuring the Remote Interface section For information on the SCPI comma
342. t arb name gt Parameter Suffix B Description Delete the specified arbitrary waveform from memory You can delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being output If you attempt to delete this waveform a Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform error is generated You cannot delete any of the seven built in arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to delete one of these waveforms a Not able to delete a built in arb waveform error is generated Use the DATA DEL ALL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory and all user defined non volatile waveforms all at once If one of the waveforms is currently being output a Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform error is generated DATA DEL ARB 1 Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 343 344 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DATA 1 2 DEL ALL DATA 1 2 DELete ALL Delete all user defined arbitrary waveforms from memory This command deletes the waveform in volatile memory and all user defined waveforms in non volatile memory The seven built in waveforms in non volatile memory are not deleted The colon before the ALL parameter is required DATA DELete ALL If you insert a space instead of a colon the instrument will attempt to delet
343. t are insequence while the bit definition being used depends on the current and previous bit value in the pattern The waveform editor initially builds a waveform with two points For ease of editing this value should be set to the desired number of points per bit when creating the bit shape waveform Press the Initial Points softkey to specify the initial number of waveform points you can add or remove points later if necessary For this example set the initial number of points to 2 Press the Interpolation softkey to enable or disable linear interpolation between waveform points With interpolation enabled default the waveform editor makes a straight line connection between points With interpolation disabled the waveform editor maintains a constant voltage level between points and creates a step like waveform For this example turn on linear interpolation Remote Interface Operation DIG TRAN INT ON OFF 0 1 amp For bitshapes interpolation can be enabled from front panel as well as through SCPI Features and Functions Auto Update On Changes of the waveform will be applied immediately to the output The editor is slower Off The waveform will be applied to output when editing is finished The editor is faster due to missing hardware update EDIT Start the point by Press the EDIT softkey to accept the initial waveform settings and begin point editing point by point editing process The editor is separa
344. t ert ttt te Ge trotn fert teta 195 3 8 4 Modulating Waveform Shape sse 196 3 8 5 Modulating Waveform Frequency sse tette 197 3 8 6 Peak Frequency Deviation cccccssssessssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssessssssssesssssesesees 198 3 8 7 Modulating Source tenente 199 Phase Modulation PM c ccccscsssssssssessssessssssscsessssessssessssesssssssssesscsssscssesssssssssessssensasensaens 200 3 9 1 Selecting PM Modulation sse tentent 201 3 9 2 Carrier Waveform Shape c cccccscsessssssssscsessssssssssssssssssssssssesssseesssessssesssseesssseessess 202 3 93 Carer Ere Ue TIC Vereor mm renim retener t seseeee tennessee 203 3 9 4 Modulating Waveform Shape sssssssssseeeete tenens 204 3 9 5 Modulating Waveform Frequency sese 205 39 6 Phase Deviations t0sictos pads het t it ibat inet tet abd 206 3 9 7 Modulating Source tenete tenete tenentes 207 Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation sss 208 3 10 1 Selecting FSK Modulation sssssssssssseennetntetetetn teens 209 3 10 2 Carrier Waveform Shape c ccccssscsssssesssssssssessssessssssssssssssessssessssessssessssssssssssssssessees 210 3 10 3 FSK Carrier Frequency ccccccsssssesssssscsssscssssssesssssssssssssssssssesssseescseesssssssseessseesesees 211 3 10 4 FSK Hop Frequency essere nnne nennen nnne tana tn tan ra
345. t eter feo ra tmb tee tme rero Pato tra ote 239 3 13 1 Selecting a Burst netten tenente 240 3 13 2 Continuous Burst Mode sse tte nt nen 241 3 13 3 Triggered Burst Mode sse tentent tetti 242 3 13 4 Gated Burst Mode tentent tentent tatit 243 3 13 5 Burst Count sssssssssseeeene nennt tette tite te tates tette stet tasses aad 244 3423 5 Burst Phase sesto ie meee ee 245 Arbitrary Waveforms sse netten tente tenerent tette tenerent 246 3 14 1 Creating and Storing an Arbitrary Waveform sss 247 3 14 2 Managing Stored Waveforms cccccsssessesesecsesseseeesessesseeseestestesenssneatenteaeeess 254 3 14 3 Additional Information on Arbitrary Waveforms sssssesese 257 System Related Operations sesenta titan nt 258 3 15 1 Instrument State Storage tenerte nens 259 3 15 2 Export Import State neret tenente ttes ttn es 262 3 15 3 Eror COIT S crac mereri rernm ee reper ieee tes atresia 264 3 154 Beeper Control ient ttti tea odii dtr d 266 3 15 5 Display Brightness ccccsssssessssssssessssssscsessssessssesssssssssessssessssesssseesssessssessessesesses 267 3 15 6 Display Control tte ti ttt ttt tl etti dd 268 SANE m 210 3 15 8 Date 545653545629 99055d56nda endo endasododedoon danda oda adago denn 271 3 15 9 Firmware Revision Query sse nentes 272 3 15 10 SCPI Lan
346. ta is downloaded properly you must select the order in which the bytes are downloaded using the FORM BORD command The names of the built in arb waveforms are EXP RISE EXP FALL HAVERSINE SINC GAUSSIAN CARDIAC and NEG RAMP The arb name may contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be numbers 0 9 or the underscore character Blank spaces are not allowed If you specify a name with more than 12 characters a Program mnemonic too long error is generated 331 332 Arbitrary Waveform Commands Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description DATA 1 2 DATA 1 2 VOLATILE value value value Download floating point values from 1 0 to 1 0 into volatile memory You can download from 1 to Samplemax points per waveform 81150A Samplemax 524288 512 k 81160A 1 channel Samplemax 262144 256 k 81160A 2 channels Samplemax 131072 128 k The instrument takes the specified number of points and expands them to fill waveform memory If you download less than 16 k points a waveform with 16 k points is automatically generated If you download more than 16 k points a Samplemax points waveform is generated The values 1 0 and 1 0 correspond to the peak values of the waveform if the offset is 0 0 volts For example if you set the amplitude to 10 0 Vpp 0 0 V
347. te Programming Reference FSKey 1 2 EXT IMP SOURCE FSKey 1 2 EXTernal IMPedance NR3 MINimum MAXimum OHM Specifies the impedance of the modulation input If you try to program any other value it will be rounded to one of the specified values either 50Q or 10kQ FSK1 EXT IMP 50 391 392 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FSKey 1 2 EXT LEV SOURCI E FSKey 11 2 1 EXTernal LI EVel NR3 MINimum MAXimum Defines the decision threshold used to select the carrier frequency or the hop frequency FSK1 EXT LEV 1 0 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FSKey 1 2 EXT RANG SOURCE FSKey 1 2 EXTernal RANGe lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum Specifies the voltage range of the modulation input If you try to program any other value it will be rounded to one of the specified values either 2 5V or 5V Setting the input voltage range to 2 5 5 selects 2 5V 5V as full range input voltage range FSK1 EXT RANG 5 0 393 394 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FSKey 1 2 FREQ SOURCE FSKey 1 2 FREQuency CW FIXed lt NR3
348. te tentent 580 47 2 Status Byte Reglster sss nnt teen non edunt t 581 413 STATUS Commards cite tercie ertet ioa ttn 582 47 4 STATus Questionable Data Register command subsystem 582 4 8 Programming Basics sss netten tentent tentent tnter tnn 585 48 1 Before you begin tenete tentent tenete nen 585 4 8 2 Application Programs sesenta tte ntn es 589 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 11 12 Error MeS ADCS a aiio aeisi rio eer bob b daade eaan 597 Anpltcalon Progra Once scii a trap dud C a ne EG E RES ERAS a Eco Fas 599 uu 601 7 1 Direct Digital Synthesis ood oda bea qd E PE ERR 602 7 2 Creating Arbitrary Waveforms c cccccccsessessesessessessessessesessessessteaessssessessteateaseasenssnsaneateaeeess 606 7 3 Pulse Waveform Gehetatlolc sacos pstputba teo eerie teeta 609 74 Patter DBReFatip uso po Up o EPOR REOR URDU Ux 611 7 4 44 Multi Level Pattern Definitions seen 612 7 4 2 Pattern Types and Sequencing Capabilities sse 614 7 43 Trigger Modes sse tenete tenete tenete tenente 615 7 444 Defining the Shape of a Bit 616 TAY External Patterns sssssssessesenee nee ntennnte tette tentent tentent ntn 620 75 Noise Gerneratiorasasasoaonsodacson dns aadanadac mina aud a lab a Le n Laban 622 7 5 1 Limitations of User defined Noise Distributions
349. tel Pattern Name PRBS_11 Bit Shape Arbitrary Bit Waveform CAP 2 Continuous Continuous Internal Pattern l 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 151 152 Remote Interface Operation Pattern Setup Pattern Mode Off f Pattern Source E Bit Shape Arbitrary Bit Waveform CAP 2 Continuous Continuous External Pattern Ext Input Mode Setup DIGital 1 2 SOURce INTernal EXTernal Features and Functions 3 5 3 Configuring the External Pattern Source Introduction External patterns are provided at the MOD IN connector of the rear panel In external or pass through pattern mode the 81150A 81160A can be used to re time and re shape and externally provide data stream according to the configured data rate output levels number of levels and formatting settings like any internal generated pattern Front Panel After selecting External Pattern Source press the Ext Input Setup softkey Operation Ext Pattern Input MOD IN Input Range 4 5 Input Impedance 10 k9 Sample Mode Number of Levels Threshold s 1 0 V 1 6 V Continuous Continuous Number of Levels Input TET Sample MORE Range P Mode lof2 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 153 Input Voltage Range Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Input Impedance Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation When selecting external pattern source the Input Voltag
350. ter via an adequate USB cable a dialog will pop up automatically This dialog generated by the Agilent 10 Library Suite shows the USB ID You can either use the full VISA resource string or assign an alias See the Agilent IO Libraries Suite documentation for details 587 588 Instrument Behavior Introduction The generator behaves as follows when it is turned on Instrument Mode At power on the generator will return to the same mode as it was powered down Normally once it has booted the instrument is ready for either front panel operation of remote operation Registers and Filters At power on the state of the registers and filters is All registers and filters are set to its initial state except the PON bit of the Standard Event Status Register The PON Power ON event bit indicates that an off to on transition has occurred in the device s power supply All bits of Positive Transition Filter will be set and all bits of the Negative Transition Filter will be cleared Local Mode In Local Mode all the front panel controls are responsive and control the instrument Remote Mode In Remote Mode the front panel controls are inoperative and the instrument is controlled by a remote client The front panel display reflects the remote programming commands received The instrument automatically enters remote mode when a command has been received from the remote client This is indicated by a small icon on right hand side of the dis
351. tern or just a single bit The behavior in gated mode is similar as it allows to either generate complete pattern cycles or blocks as long as the gate signal is active with a started block being completed Or to gate the pattern on a per bit basis with the bit being completed when the gate signal is getting inactive e The Pattern Trig Mode is only available when pattern mode is enabled e The meaning of the burst length is different for Bit and Block Pattern Trigger Mode If the Pattern Trigger Mode is set to Bit the burst length defines the number of bits that shall be generated for the burst In Block mode the burst length defines the number of complete pattern repetitions that build up the burst e Press the Trig or Gated key on the front panel to enable triggered or gated mode and to switch to the trigger mode screen e In the trigger mode screen press the Pattern Trig Mode Softkey to select between Bit and Block mode 177 178 Remote Interface Operation External In Thresh TTL 2 5 V Triggered Pulse Impedance 50 2 Source External In Trigger Out TT Strobe Out TTL Patt Trigger Extemal Trigger Continuous Bit Source Trad by MORE 2of2 DIGital 1 2 TRIGger BIT BLOCk 3 6 Noise Introduction Characteristics Restrictions 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions Noise is specified by the following parameters e Amplitude Offset or High Low Level e Probability Dens
352. ternal and Manual e When the nternal immediate or Internal 1 source is selected the 81150A 81160A outputs a continuous sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time specified e When the External source is selected the 81150A 81160A will accept a hardware trigger applied to the Front panel External In connector e The 81150A 81160A initiates one sweep each time External In receives a pulse with the specified polarity e The trigger period must be greater than or equal to the specified sweep time plus 1 ms e When the Manual source is selected the 81150A 81160A outputs Man one sweep each time the front panel iui key is pressed Front Panel Trig Gated Operation Press the m key to enable triggered operation the rood key for Cont gated operation and the key for continuous operation Configure Trigger Source Frequency and active edge level on the Mode Trigger Screen as required 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 237 238 Remote Interface Operation Use the following command to specify whether the 81150A 81160A triggers on the rising or falling edge of the signal on the External In con ARM SOURce IMMediate D n AJ nector INTernal 1 INTernal 2 EXTernal MANual I EVel I RM PERiod 1 2 lt seconds gt MAXimum M RM SLOPe POSitive N EGative EITHer RM FREQuency 1 2 lt frequency gt MAXimum MINimum RM SE
353. ters Parameter Suffix Description Example Pattern Related Commands DIG SIGN FORM DIGital 1 2 STIMulus SIGNal FORMat NRZ USER This command is used to set the bit shape in pattern mode Setting the bitshape to NRZ causes the output signal to be equal to high level for a 1 bit and equal to low level for a 0 bit and equal to offset for a bit In NRZ mode the transition times can be adjusted using the leading edge parameter PULS TRAN If bitshape is set to USER the bit transitions can be defined using the DIG TRAN command DIG SIGN FORM NRZ Remote Programming Reference Command DIG Long DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern STATe Parameters ON OFF 0 1 Parameter Suffix Description Use this command to enable disable pattern mode When pattern mode is enabled the function switches to Pulse 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 539 540 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example DIG PRBS DIGital 1 2 STIMulus PATTern PRBS lt n gt Use this command to generate a PRBS pseudo random bit sequence The parameter n defines the polynomial length of the PRBS i e DIG PRBS 7 generates a PRBS 27 1 Valid values for n are 7 9 11 15 23 and 31 The standard polynomial coefficients are used DIG PRBS 7 Command Long Parameters Par
354. the frequency on channel 2 directly if frequency divider mode is enabled e The frequency coupling settings will be ignored if sweep is enabled e The frequency multiplier and divider settings do not apply to the FSK Hop Frequency e The phase relation between channel 1 and channel 2 is not specified even if the frequency of channel 1 is identical to the frequency of channel 2 This can be found on the Pulse Sine Square Ramp and Arb screens The Frequency Multiplier and Frequency Divider will be enabled only when the Frequency Coupling State is enabled Features and Functions Frequency f Delay 0 000 s Amplitude 1 000 Vos Offset 0 000 WV Load Imp 50 0 Q Outp Imp 90 Q Polarity Normal Continuous Continuous 1 000008000000 MHz f Load Out Fre Tears dum Frequency 1 000000000000 MHz Coupling Multiplier 1 Divider 1 Continuous Continuous ia Freq nim Nd E Remote Interface The following function is used to configure Frequency Coupling remotely Operation TRACk FREQuency ON OFF The following functions are used to configure the frequency of channel 1 and channel 2 TRACk FREQuency DIVider divider TRACk FREQuency lt multiplier gt The allowed range for divider and multiplier are 1 255 But are limited by the currently active frequency limits of channel 2 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 123 124 Channel Coupling Introduction Characteristics
355. the passband of the function generator These spurs are most significant when there is a simple fractional relationship between the signal frequency and the function generator s sampling frequency 81150A 2 GHz 81160A 2 5 GHz For example at 225 MHz the DAC produces harmonics at 450 MHz 675 MHz 1800 MHz 2025 MHz These harmonics which are 200 MHz and 25 MHz from the function generator s 2 GHz sampling frequency will appear as spurs at 200 MHz and 25 MHz Another source of non harmonic spurs is the coupling of unrelated signal sources such as the microprocessor clock into the output signal These spurs usually have a constant amplitude x 75 dBm or 112 uVpp regardless of the signal s amplitude and are most troublesome at signal amplitudes below 100 mVpp To obtain low amplitudes with minimum spurious content keep the function generator s output level relatively high and use an external attenuator if possible Phase noise results from small instantaneous changes in the output frequency jitter It is seen as an elevation of the apparent noise floor near the fundamental frequency and increases at 6 dBc octave with the carrier frequency The 81150A 81160A s phase noise specification represents the amplitude of the noise in a 1 Hz bandwidth 10 kHz away from the carrier Finite DAC resolution 14 bits leads to voltage quantization errors Assuming the errors are uniformly distributed over a range of 0 5 least s
356. the pulse trailing edge transition time to the leading edge transition time ON The trailing edge transition time is automatically set to the same value as the leading edge and is updated automatically each time the leading edge transition time changes OFF The trailing edge leading edge transition time is independently programmable ONCE The trailing edge transition time is set ONCE to the same value as the leading edge FUNC2 PULS TRAN TRA AUTO ON Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference FUNC 1 2 PULS TRAN UNIT SOURCe FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe TRANsition UNIT S SEC PCT Use this command to set the default units for the pulse transition times The default unit is used when the parameter is programmed to a value without a unit suffix FUNC2 PULS TRAN UNIT PCT 447 448 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example FUNC 1 2 PULS WIDT SOURCe FUNCtion 1 2 PULSe WIDTh lt NR3 gt MINimum MAXimum amp Set the pulse width in seconds The pulse width represents the time from the start of rising edge of the pulse to the start of the next falling edge The FUNC 1 2 PULS WIDT query returns the pulse width in seconds amp This command is affected by the FUNC 1 2 PULS HOLD command which determines the value to be hel
357. the web interface enter the IP address of the instrument or its fully qualified host name in the browser address field 4 Follow the directions in the web interface s online help For further information see the Agilent Technologies USB LAN GPIB Connectivity Guide which you can download from the Agilent web site at the following URL www agilent com find connectivity Features and Functions 3 17 Software Update Introduction The Software Update screen gives you prompt information about the 81150A 81160A The software update package contains two firmware images Both will be extracted to the USB memory device during the update process In case of a power loss during the update the instrument will load the recovery image from the USB memory device if the regular firmware image is corrupt This recovery image will continue the update process in case of a completely or partially erased or incomplete not yet updated completely firmware image To ensure that this recovery mechanism is working the USB memory device may not be unplugged until the instrument has booted into the upgraded firmware Requirements e USB Memory device with at least 100 MB of free space e The USB memory device must be formatted as a hard drive with a primary partition The partition has to be formatted using the FAT or FAT32 file system e Do not use USB memory devices that contain extended partition The instrument will not be able to recover from a fa
358. them directly from the numeric keypad Continuous Continuous STATE NEW we Back Press the STORE STATE softkey The softkeys for each of these states i e state 1 to 4 has two meanings Select the state to store to When being selected the text on the softkey changes to STORE STATE x where x is 1 2 3 or 4 Pressing this softkey actually performs the store operation This will be confirmed with a scrolling text in the status line Stored instrument state to location x The instrument stores the selected function frequency amplitude dc offset duty cycle symmetry as well as any modulation parameters in use The instrument does not store volatile waveforms created in the arbitrary waveform function 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Front Panel Menu Operation If you delete an arbitrary waveform from non volatile memory after storing the instrument state the waveform data is lost and the instrument will not output the waveform when the state is recalled The built in exponential rise waveform is output in place of the deleted waveform When power is turned off the instrument automatically stores its power down state You can configure the instrument to automatically recall the power down state when power is restored 81 82 2 31 Configuring the Remote Interface Introduction 2 31 1 Introduction Select the 1 0 menu This section gives information on configuring the 81150A 8
359. then press zd to turn on modulation PWM is selected as the only modulation type supported for pulse The PWM waveform is output using the present settings for the pulse frequency modulating frequency output amplitude offset voltage pulse width and edge times To avoid multiple waveform changes enable PWM after you have set up the other modulation parameters PWM 1 2 STATe ON OFF Features and Functions 3 11 2 Pulse Waveform Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Pulse is the only waveform shape supported for PWM Pulse n Press JL to select pulse FUNCtion PULSe You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 217 218 3 11 3 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Pulse Period 81150A The range for the pulse period is 8 33 ns to 1000000s The default is 1 us Pulse frequency limits 1 Hz to 120 MHz 81160A The range for the pulse period is 3 03 ns to 1000000s The default is 1 us Pulse frequency limits 1 Hz to 330 MHz After selecting the pulse function press the Frequency softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse period PULSe PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum Features and Functions 3 11 4 Modulating Waveform Shape Introduction The 81
360. ther explained in the following sections Features and Functions 3 5 Pattern Capabilities Introduction A Pattern is a digital data stream that is stored in volatile or non volatile memory generated algorithmically or provided by an external data source for re timing and re shaping Multi level patterns using 2 3 or 4 different levels allowing support for serial protocols that require electrical idle signaling in the data streams 81150A Up to 16 Mbit long memory 2 level based patterns Up to 8 Msymbols long memory based 3 and 4 level patterns 81160A 1 channel Up to 4 Mbit long memory 2 level based patterns Up to 2 Msymbols long memory based 3 and 4 level patterns 81160A 2 channels Up to 2 Mbit long memory 2 level based patterns Up to 1 Msymbols long memory based 3 and 4 level patterns Support for algorithmic PRBS patterns Support of one adjustable loop allowing easy integration of initialization sequences into the data stream before the actual test pattern In triggered and gated mode the pattern can be either controlled on a per block or per bit basis NRZ formatting or arbitrary bit shapes User definable bit shapes allow emulation of real world signal shapes that include over and undershoot ringing or distorted level transitions Front Panel After selecting the pulse function press the Pattern Setup softkey This will Operation show the Pattern Setup screen Then press the desirable softkey to change t
361. ting source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The modulation depth is controlled by the 2 5V 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 100 then when the modulating signal is at 2 5V 5V the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 2 5V 5V then the output will be at the minimum amplitude amp e The 81160A offers a fix 2 5V input range The 81150A offers a selectable 2 5V or 5V input range After enabling AM press the AM Depth softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the depth AM 1 2 DEPTh lt depth in percent MINimum MAXimum 187 188 max Modulation Signal min Trigger Out Strobe Out max min Continuous AM Modulation Depth 50 Carrier Sinewave with 15 MHz Modulated by Sinewave with 1 MHz T T T T max Modulation Signal min Trigger Out Strobe Out Continuous AM Modulation Depth 10096 Carrier Sinewave with 15 MHz Modulated by Sinewave with 1 MHz Features and Functions 3 7 7 DSSC Double Sideband Suppressed Carrier Mode Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide If DSSC is enabled then the carrier will no longer be present in the modulated signal DSSC is only available if modulation is enabled modu
362. ting the waveform into sections Each of the sections is separated by a vertical dashed line and corresponds to one of the bit shapes that have to be defined In the upper left corner the editor is displaying which bit value transition in the pattern will result in the sub waveform currently being edited Depending on the number of levels the maximum number of samples in the waveform varies With a maximum of 64 samples being used for one bit Define the first Press Y softkey to set the voltage level for Point 1 this point is fixed at waveform point address 0 By default all points are set to 0 For this example set the value of Point 1 to 8191 ransition 0 0 Point 1 Number of Points 18 8191 Continuous Continuous 3191 s am amm omma 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 173 174 Define the next waveform point Define the remaining waveform points Press the Point softkey and then turn the knob to move to Point 2 or press the Next Point softkey Press the X softkey to set the address for the current point this softkey is not available for Point 1 Press the Y softkey to set the DAC value for the current point For this example Y to 8191 Then press the Next Point softkey to proceed to the next point in the waveform Using the X and Y softkeys define the remaining waveform points using the values shown in the table below The X value of the last point that can be defined in each bit transitio
363. tinuous FM Frequency Deviation 800kHz Carrier Sinewave 1 MHz Modulated by Sinewave 0 05 MHz max Modulation Signal ENAN fo Ny min Trigger Out wm CON fo Nf NA 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 193 194 3 8 2 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Carrier Waveform Shape FM carrier shape Sine Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform The default is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or dc as the carrier waveform Steps Pulse Noise e Press any of the front panel function keys except JC or te Arb For arbitrary waveforms press Ave and then choose the Select Waveform softkey to select the active waveform gt FUNCtion 1 2 SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 3 8 3 Carrier Frequency Features and Functions Introduction The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 MHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 uHz 81150A 240 MHz 81160A 500 MHz Square 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz Ramp 1 uHz 81150A 5 MHz 81160A 20 MHz Arbs 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz Pattern 1 uHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 330 MHz 81160A 660 660 MHz 81150A and 81160A 10 MHz for external patterns Carrier Frequency e The carrier frequency
364. tion AM Commands Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform In AM the amplitude of the carrier is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform The instrument will accept an internal or external modulation source 373 374 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example AM 1 2 DEPT SOURCI LH AM 1 2 DEPTh NR3 MINimum MAXimum PCT Set the internal modulation depth or percent modulation in percent Select from 0 to 120 The default is 100 MIN 096 MAX 120 The AM 1 2 DEPT query returns the modulation depth in percent Note that even at greater than 10096 depth the instrument will not exceed hardware limits on the output into a 50Q load If you select the External modulating source AM SOUR EXT command the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The modulation depth is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 10096 using the AM DEPT command then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 5 volts then the output will be at the minimum amplitude AMI DEPT 10PCT Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example
365. tion occurred the incoming data is sampled at the data rate that is set as frequency value in the instrument If there are no level changes for more than 8 unit intervals the initial transition search is re started This sampling method shall be used for pattern sources that cannot be coupled with the 81150A 81160A based on a clock signal or that send the data in packets separated by a period of inactivity between the data packets 621 7 5 Noise Generation Introduction The Agilent 81150A 81160A generates noise waveforms using a digital noise source This digital noise source consists of the following four major blocks e Address Generation e Sample Memory e Digital Filter e Digital Analog Converter The block diagram is very similar to a traditional memory based noise generation but there is one crucial difference the sample memory holds a sample distribution rather than pre calculated samples The sample memory is read using a random address generator Virtual Address Address Data 46 bits 19 bits Waveform DAC Random Memory Sample Digital Address Address Memory Filter Generation Compression FIR Noise with Memory Address Compression The advantage of this approach is that the voltage domain is separated from the time domain The memory content determines the distribution of the output signal while the address generation determ
366. tkey You can also use the navigation keys to select the Trig d by or Gated by key Choose the appropriate option from the given options as shown below Triggered Sinewave Impedance 50 Source External In Trq d by Fle Trigger Out TT Strobe Out TTL External Trigger Continuous Rising Edge iil Rising Edge fij z S s M NN 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 97 Gated Sinewave Source External In Gated by High Level Trigger Out TTL Strobe Out TTL External Gate Continuous MORE 2of2 Source Gated by e The screenshots above are taken from the 81150A The 81160A offers additional functionality described in chapter 3 3 1 External In Parameters Remote Interface ARM SLOPe POSitive NEGative EITher Operation 3 1 3 Internal Trigger Period Frequency Introduction The internal trigger period frequency defines the time between two trigger events if the trigger source is set to Internal 98 Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions Trigger Frequency 81150A 1 wHz to 120 MHz default 100 kHz Trigger Frequency 81160A 1 uHz to 330 MHz default 100 kHz Trigger Period 81150A 8 3333 ns to 1000000s default 10 us Trigger Period 81160A 3 03 ns to 1000000s default 10 us The trigger period setting is used only when nternal triggering is enabled The trigger period is ignored when manual or extern
367. tored The Utility key enables you to enable disable DC mode change the Output Setup and also contains information about the 1 0 Interfaces and the system settings of the 81150A 81160A The Help key provides access to the instrument s integrated help or in warning or error state access to Warning Error Report screen 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 23 24 22 Help is Available Introduction lil Warnings and Errors Exit Help Whenever you are in doubt or the instrument signals warnings or errors press the Help key Pressing the Help key opens the Main Help Page This main help page is the table of contents of the integrated help system which lists all the help topics You can obtain information by selecting the corresponding link and then by pressing the Follow Link softkey If there are warnings or errors pending indicated by a flushing W or E on the screen pressing the Help key displays a list of the current messages Using the Error Queue and Warning softkeys you can toggle between both lists For more information on warnings and errors see Warnings and Errors To exit Help press the Help key again or press any other parameter screen key e g Pulse Sine etc Front Panel Menu Operation 23 The Front Panel Display at a Glance Introduction This section explains the Menu and the Graph mode as seen on the Front Panel of the 81150A 81160A 2 3 1 Menu Mode Introduction This section explains the
368. tput frequency of channel 2 is derived from the output frequency of channel 1 except for frequency sweeps The frequency of channel 2 is defined as follows Multiplier Frequency Divider Frequency Whenever the frequency of channel 1 is changed the frequency of channel 2 is adjusted automatically according to the above formula All other settings of channel 2 are still independent of the settings on channel 1 653 654 Channel Coupling The channel coupling implements a much tighter coupling of channel 1 and channel 2 When channel coupling is enabled the two channels are not only locked in frequency but also in phase Additionally all timing relevant parameters will be updated between the channels automatically refer to the Appendix for the complete list of coupled parameters to ensure that the frequency and phase remain locked when changing the instrument s state The initial update when enabling channel coupling can be done from channel 1 to channel 2 or from channel 2 to channel 1 depending on which channel is being used to enable the channel coupling All following updates are done from channel 1 to channel 2 or from channel 2 to channel 1 depending on where the change was done A Appendix Introduction This section covers the following e Coupled Parameters when channel coupling is on e Pulse Parameter Definitions e Agilent 81150A 81160A in comparison with other Agilent instruments Channel 1 to chan
369. tput frequency range depends on the function selected as shown in the table below The default frequency is 1 MHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Sine 1 Hz Square 1 uHz Ramp 1 uHz Pulse 1 uHz Pattern 1 uHz Noise DC Not Applicable Arbs 1 Hz Maximum Frequency 81150A 240 MHz 81160A 500 MHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz 81150A 5 MHz 81160A 20 MHz 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz 81150A 120 MHz 10 MHz for external patterns 81160A 660 MHz 10 MHz for external patterns Not Applicable 81150A 120 MHz 81160A 330 MHz The maximum frequency when doing burst is 120 MHz for the 81150A 330 MHz for the 81160A This frequency limit applies additionally to the functions max frequency limit Practically this is only relevant for sine waves since all other waveforms have a maximum frequency of 120 MHz for the 81150A 330 MHz for the 81160A Trigger Limitations 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions When using triggered mode the maximum frequency of the waveform is limited to 120 MHz for the 81150A 330 MHz for the 81160A The trigger events may not occur faster than the duration of the waveform being triggered This limits the maximum trigger rate to 120 MHz for the 81150A 330 MHz for the 81160A 103 104 Duty Cycle Limitations Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation For square and pulse waveforms the 81150A 81160A may not be able to use the full
370. tput termination setting the values do not get adjusted Output Termination and an error message indicates potential problems with level settings But if the new termination does result in voltages that can be done with the 81150A 81160A then the values that are displayed on the front panel will be applied at the output The 81150A 81160A tries to keep the programmed levels when the termination changes If this is not possible then an error message is displayed The load impedance can be set to values 0 3 Q to 1 MQ There is no dedicated high impedance setting Do s and Dont s You can set the output amplitude in Vpp Vrms or dBm For more information see Output Units 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 105 106 Arbitrary Waveform For arbitrary waveforms the maximum amplitude will be limited if the Limitations Front Panel Operation waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is limited to 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms for 81150A e While changing amplitude you may notice a momentary disruption in the output waveform at certain voltages due to switching of the output attenuators The amplitude is controlled however so the output voltage will never exceed the current setting while switching ranges To prevent this disruption in the output you can d
371. tputs a waveform with the displayed frequency if the output is enabled AETA 1 000000000000 MH 1 Delay 0 000 s Amplitude 1 000 M Offset Load Imp Outp Imp Polarity Continuous Continuous ooo i e You can also enter the desired value using the knob and cursor keys e You can also change the exponent by setting the input cursor to the exponent field and turning the Rotary Knob To do this use the left right key to place the cursor on the exponent you wish to change Front Panel Menu Operation 2 13 Setting the Output Amplitude Introduction At power on normally the instrument outputs the same setting as before power down When you change functions the same amplitude is used if the present value is valid for the new function The following steps show you how to change the amplitude Press the Ampl To set the amplitude using a high level and low level press the Ampl softkey softkey e This will offer the level representations and units that can be chosen for the output levels e Choose the appropriate option from the given choices e Press More to go to the units screen Choose from the given units by pressing that unit itself Frequency Delay 0 000 s Amplitude op Offset Load Imp 50 0 Q Outp Imp 90 Q Polarity Normal Continuous Continuous Frequen Delay Offset Ed 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 45 Enter the magnitude of the desired amplitude Select the desired units 46
372. troduction There are seven built in arbitrary waveforms stored in non volatile memory You can also store up to four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory in addition to one in volatile memory 81150A Each waveform can contain between 2 and 524288 data points 81160A 1 channel Each waveform can contain between 2 and 262144 data points 81150A 2 channels Each waveform can contain between 2 and 131072 data points You can create an arbitrary waveform from the front panel as described in the following section or you can use the Agilent BenchLink Waveform Builder software provided on the CD ROM included with the Agilent 81150A or 81160A The Agilent BenckLink Wabeform Builder software allows you to create arbitrary waveforms using a graphical user interface on your PC and then download them into the Agilent 81150A 81160A You can also capture waveforms from your Agilent oscilloscope and import them into BenchLink Refer to the Tutorial chapter for more information on the internal operation of downloading and outputting an arbitrary waveform Features and Functions 3 14 1 Creating and Storing an Arbitrary Waveform Introduction This section gives an example which shows you how to create and store an arbitrary waveform from the front panel To download an arbitrary waveform from the remote interface see Arbitrary Waveform Commands For this example you will create and store the ramp waveform shown below using four wavef
373. trol Normally the 81150A 81160A will emit a tone when an error is generated from the front panel or over the remote interface You may want to disable the front panel beeper for certain applications e The beeper state is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset When shipped from the factory the beeper is enabled e Turning off the beeper does not disable the key click generated when you press a front panel key or turn the knob Utility Press ag and then press the System softkey Use the knob to enable disable the beeper SYSTem BE EPer Issue a single beep immediately SYSTem BE EPer STATe OFF ON Disable enable beeper Features and Functions 3 15 5 Display Brightness Introduction To optimize the readability of the front panel display you can adjust the brightness setting This feature is available from the front panel only Characteristics Display brightness 0 to 7 The default is 0 The brightness setting is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Front Panel Utility Operation Press bid and then select the Display Brightness softkey from the System menu 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 267 268 3 15 6 Introduction Characteristics Display Control For security reasons or to speed up the rate at which the 81150A 81
374. ts Applies to output amplitude only At power on the units for output amplitude are volts peak to peak Vpp Vrms or dBm The default is Vpp The unit setting is stored in volatile memory The units are set to Vpp when power has been off or after a remote interface reset provided the Power On state is set to default The 81150A 81160A uses the current units selection for both front panel and remote interface operations For example if you select VRMS from the remote interface the units are displayed as Vrms on the front panel Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired magnitude and then press the appropriate softkey to select the units You can also convert from one unit to another from the front panel Press the Ampl Softkey Then select the desired unit as described in section 2 13 1 The following function is used to configure the output amplitude remotely VOLTage 1 2 VPP VRMS DBM Features and Functions 3 2 6 Load Impedance Introduction Applies to output amplitude and offset voltage only The Agilent 81150A has a selectable series output impedance of 50 Q or 5 Q to the front panel Output connector The Agilent 81160A has a fix series output impedance of 50 Q If the actual load impedance is different than the value specified the displayed amplitude and offset levels will be incorrect Load Impedance 0 3 Q to 10M The default is 50 Q Characteristics e The load impedance is stored in volatil
375. tterns Front Panel To set the carrier frequency press the Frequency softkey for the selected Operation function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Remote Interface FREQuency 1 2 lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Operation You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 3 7 4 Introduction Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Features and Functions Modulating Waveform Shape The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel Modulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine Square has 50 duty cycle Pu Ramp has 100 symmetry Triangle has 5096 symmetry Negative ramp has 0 symmetry P You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 16K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation After enabling AM press the Shape softkey AM 1 2 INTernal FUNCtion SIN
376. ubsystem Set read frequency of external PLL reference SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FRI EQuency value Mass Memory SCPI subsystem Appendix Read directory of memory card MMEMory CATalog Change directory of memory card MMEMory CDIRectory directory name Initialize memory card to DOS format MMEM INITialize DOS Pulse Configuration SCPI subsystem Trigger Out Strobe Out output level SOURCe PULse TRIGger 1 2 TTL ECL amp The Trigger Out Strobe Out levels can be set on the 81150A 81160A via OUTP 1 2 TRIG VOLT TTL ECL OUTP 1 2 STR VOLT TTL ECL SYM4 Trigger Mode SCPI subsystem This command is implemented but only with the following arguments IMMediate and INTernal The 81150A 81160A does not have different pulse period trigger sources that can be used as a pulse period Set read pulse period trigger source TRIGger 1 2 SEQuence 1 STARC SOURCe IMMediate INTernal 1 A 3 2 Agilent 33220A Introduction The following commands of the 33220A instrument are not available on the 81150A 81160A Output SCPI subsystem Front panel Sync connector on off OUTPut SYNC OFF ON Calibration SCPI subsystem 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 667 668 Unsecure Secure the instrument for calibration CALibration SECure STATe ON OFF
377. user defined patterns NRZ formatting and Arbitrary Bit Waveform Pattern Mode On Off Patterns are also characterized by 2 3 or 4 different levels per bit Adjustable loop offset allowing emulation of initialization preamble and looped test pattern External pattern source allows re timing and re shaping of externally provided data stream A sine wave is defined by the following parameters Amplitude Offset or High Low Level Period or Frequency Delay in seconds Delay in percent of period Delay as phase in degree Polarity Source Impedance Load Impedance A square wave is defined by the following parameters Amplitude Offset or High Level Low Level Period or Frequency Duty Cycle Delay in seconds Delay as percentage of the period Delay as phase in degree Polarity Source Impedance Load Impedance The instrument will always generate the fastest possible transition times when generating square waves Ramp Wave Characteristics Noise Wave Characteristics Arbitrary Wave Characteristics 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Front Panel Menu Operation A ramp is defined by the following parameters e Amplitude Offset or High Low Level e Period or Frequency e Delay in seconds e Delay in percent of period e Delay as phase in degree Symmetry point in percent of period e Polarity e Source Impedance e Load Impedance Noise is defined by the following parameters e Amplitude Offset or High Low Level e Probabilit
378. usoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER 185 186 3 7 5 Introduction Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation Modulating Waveform Frequency The 81150A 81160A will accept modulation from an internal or external modulation source In case of internal modulation the modulation signal can be the other channel 2 channel instrument only or the internal modulation source of the modulated channel Modulating frequency internal source 81150A 1 mHz to 10 MHz 81160A 1 mHz to 50 MHz The default is 100 Hz After enabling AM press the AM Frequency softkey NTernal FRI AM 1 2 MAX imum FQuency lt frequency gt M Nimum Features and Functions 3 7 6 Modulating Depth Introduction Modulating Depth Characteristics Front Panel Operation Remote Interface Operation 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The modulation depth is expressed as a percentage and represents the extent of the amplitude variation At 0 depth the output amplitude is half of the selected value At 10096 depth the output amplitude equals the selected value Modulation depth 0 to 120 The default is 100 amp e Even at greater than 100 depth the 81150A 81160A will not exceed the specified amplifier s output voltage window or specified output amplitude e The modulation depth setting is only used when DSSC is disabled If you select the Externa modula
379. ut simply evaluate the result of the power on selftest e NORMal Execute the normal selftest no need to disconnect DUT and report the result e ALL Execute the extended selftest and report the result The instrument must be completely disconnected from any external setup before the extended selftest may be started The result is 0 if no errors are found and 1 if at least one test failed The error queue will contain the corresponding error messages Example SYST TEST PON Response 0 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 515 516 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example SYST TIME SYSTem TIME lt hours gt lt minutes gt lt seconds gt Queries or sets the time of the internal clock of the instrument SYST TIME 10 0 30 Remote Programming Reference Command SYST VERS Long SYSTem VERSion Parameters Parameter Suffix E Description Returns a string in the form YYYY V where YYYY represents the year of the version and V represents a version number for that year e g 1999 0 Example SYST VERS Response 1999 0 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 517 518 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example SYST WARN SYSTem WARNing COUNt Use this command to read the number of warnings which are currently active amp The warning status of voltage time and frequency are
380. ute a value e Avertical bar separates multiple parameter choices Features and Functions 3 1 Trigger Mode Introduction The Agilent 81150A 81160A allows you to control the signal generation in several ways One of the most important ways is selecting a trigger mode Triggering means start of the signal generation and it does not take place until all ARM conditions are met There are three different trigger modes available e Continuous e Triggered e Gated These are explained in the following sections Continuous Trigger In this mode the instrument continuously generates the output signal The Mode next waveform cycle burst or sweep starts immediately after the previous one is finished There is not gap or distance between two consecutive cycles In this mode no arming triggering is used Triggered In this mode the instrument generates exactly one waveform cycle burst or sweep on the active edge of the trigger signal If a seconds trigger event occurs before the current cycle waveform burst or sweep is finished then the trigger event will be ignored The Triggered mode cannot be used with modulation The cycle to be triggered must have a duration the waveform must have a dedicated beginning and end which is not true for DC Noise has a special characteristic Although it does not have a duration it is still allowed to be triggered 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 93 94 Gated Front Panel O
381. ution is assumed Gaussian six sigma represents 99 7496 of the peak peak jitter The reference edge for period jitter is the previous leading edge That for delay jitter is the leading edge of the trigger output Width jitter is the stability of the trailing edge with regard to the leading edge Long term average instability over a specific time for example hour year Jitter is excluded Pulse output is specified as pulse top and pulse base usually referred to as high level and low level or as peak to peak amplitude and median offset A window specification shows the limits within which the pulse can be positioned Amplitude M we Low Level Offset Median Max High Level Window Min Low Level LM Zero Volts Preshoot Overshoot Ringing Appendix Preshoot and overshoot are peak distortions preceding following an edge Ringing is the positive peak and negative peak distortion excluding overshoot on pulse top or base For example a combined preshoot overshoot and ringing specification of 5 implies e Overshoot undershoot lt 5 e Largest pulse top oscillation lt 5 of pulse amplitude 096 Amplitude 77 Y Preshoot Overshoot eg 5 Ringing POSITIVE Y eg 3 100 mus Amplitude A As Ri nging yest eg 7 A eg 2 96 Settling Time Time taken for pulse levels to settle within level specification
382. viation of 5 the modulated waveform will have a pulse that varies in duty cycle from 5 to 15 under control of the modulating waveform 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 645 646 1 12 Frequency Sweep Introduction Frequency sweeping is similar to FM but no modulating waveform is used Instead the function generator sets the output frequency based on either a linear or logarithmic function In a inear sweep the output frequency changes in a constant hertz per second manner In a ogarithmic sweep the output frequency changes in a constant octaves per second or decades per second manner Logarithmic sweeps are useful for covering wide frequency ranges where resolution at low frequencies could be lost with a linear sweep You can generate a sweep using an internal trigger source or an external hardware trigger source When the internal source is selected the function generator outputs a continuous sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time specified When the external source is selected the function generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the front panel External In connector The function generator initiates one sweep each time External In receives an active edge You can generate a sweep in combination with all trigger modes Therefore itis possible to generate a continuous sweep as well as triggering or gating a sweep In triggered mode one sweep will be generated for each trigger event In Gated mode continuou
383. vpp Specifies the output voltage of the strobe output of the selected channel 0UP2 STR VOLT TTL 425 Command 0UTP 1 2 TRIG VOLT Long OUTPut 1 2 TRIGger VOLTage Parameters TTL ECL Parameter Suffix B Description Specifies the output voltage of the trigger output of the selected channel Example 0UTP2 TRIG VOLT ECL Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference OUTPut 1 2 STRObe ROUTe 0UTPut 1 2 STRoObe ROUTe NONE SYNA SYNB SYNAB This command is routing the strobe functionality from output N to the given sync connector OUTPUT1 STROBE ROUTE SYNB 427 428 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 0UTPut 1 2 TR 0UTPut 1 2 TR IGger ROUTe IGger ROUTe NONE SYNA SYNB SYNAB This command is routing the trigger functionality from output N to the given sync connector OUTPUT1 TRIGG ER ROUTI E SYNA Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference TRAC CHAN 112 SOURce TRACk CHANne1 1 2 ON OFF TRAC CHAN1 ON couples both channels copies all values from channel 1 to channel 2 switches tracking state ON TRAC
384. will be generated if you specify a name with more than 12 characters e The 81150A 81160A will not prevent you from assigning the same custom name to different storage locations For example you can assign the same name to locations 1 and 2 e fyou delete an arbitrary waveform from non volatile memory after storing the instrument state the waveform data is lost and the 81150A 81160A will not output the waveform when the state is recalled The built in exponential rise waveform is output in place of the deleted waveform Aninstrument reset does not affect the configurations stored in memory Once a state is stored it remains until it is overwritten or specifically deleted Store Press and then select the Store State or Recall State softkey To delete a stored state select the Delete State softkey also removes the custom name for this memory location Recall and Delete keys are both disabled if nothing is stored and thus nothing to Recall Delete exists To configure the 81150A 81160A to recall the factory default state at Store power on press LEet ll and then select the Power ON State softkey To configure the 81150A 81160A to recall the power down state when power is restored press the Power ON State softkey and select Last Setting You can assign a custom name to each of the four storage locations e The custom name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining
385. wo font sizes to display the message An example is shown below DISP TEXT Test in Progress While a message is displayed information relating to the output waveform such as frequency and amplitude is not sent to the front panel display DISP TEXT TEST 1 is running Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Remote Programming Reference DISP TEXT CLE DISPlay WINDow TEXT CLEar Clear the text message currently shown on the instrument s front panel display If the display is currently enabled DISP ON command the DISP TEXT CLEAR command will return the normal front panel display mode If the display is currently disabled DISP OFF command the DISP TEXT CLEAR command will clear the message but the display will remain disabled To enable the display send the DISP ON command press the key or send the GTL Go To Local command for GPIB or USB For LAN you can send the SYST COMM RLST LOC command DISP TEXT CLE 525 526 4 5 15 Triggering Commands Introduction The trigger subsystem is used to synchronize device action s with events or in other words you program the comprehensive triggering capabilities of the instrument using the SCPI ARM and TRIGger subsystem Using these two command subsystems you can program the operating mo
386. y 1 2 SQUare lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt Output a square wave with the specified frequency amplitude and dc offset This command overrides the current duty cycle setting and automatically selects 50 The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed APPL1 SQU 110e6 2 4 1 25 329 330 Command Long Parameters Parameter Suffix Description Example APPL 1 2 USI El J APPLy 1 2 USI Ei aZ frequency amplitude offset Output the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the FUNC US command The waveform is output using the specified frequency a ER mplitude and dc offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed APPLI USER 3MHz 1 2 0 1 Remote Programming Reference 4 5 2 Arbitrary Waveform Commands Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide Download the waveform points into volatile memory You can download from 1 point a dc signal to Samplemax points per waveform 81150A Samplemax 524288 512 k 81160A 1 channel Samplemax 262144 256 k 81160A 2 channels Samplemax 131072 128 k You can download the points as floating point values binary integer values or decimal integer values Use the DATA command to download floating point values from 1 0 to 1 0 Use the DATA DAC command to download binary integer or decimal integer values from 8191 to 8191 To ensure that binary da
387. y Density Function PDF e Source Impedance e Load Impedance Arbitrary waveforms are defined by the following parameters e Amplitude Offset or High Low Level e Period or Frequency e Delay in seconds e Delay in percent of period e Delay as phase in degree e Source Impedance e Load Impedance 81150A Arbitrary waveforms can have up to 512k samples The local waveform editor allows to create and edit waveforms with up to 16k samples 81160A Arbitrary waveforms can have up to 256k samples 1 channel 128k samples 2 channels The local waveform editor allows to create and edit waveforms with up to 16k samples 39 40 2 11 Selecting the Advanced Mode Introduction 2 11 1 Introduction To select Modulation e There are three advanced modes of operation available e Modulation e Burst e Sweep These advanced modes are further explained below Modulation The following types of modulation are available AM e FM PM e FSK e PWM Refer to Chapter 3 Features and Functions to understand how to select any of these modulations e The 81150A 81160A will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable AM and FM at the same time When you enable AM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The 81150A 81160A will not allow any advanced mode to be enabled with another advanced mode on the same channel Front Panel Menu Operation 2 11 2 Burst Introduction
388. y on the front panel e Select the desired edge by pressing the Ext In Sense softkey e Change the value either by pressing the softkey or by turning the knob Gated starts the generation of signals as long as the gate is active The active level high or low at External In enables waveforms bursts or sweeps The last waveform burst or sweep is always completed In internal triggered mode the instrument triggers a single waveform cycle sweep or burst at an adjustable trigger rate E g generate a pulse every 250ms Trig This mode is enabled by pressing the E key on the front panel and then setting source to Internal As soon as Source is set to Internal the trigger frequency period can be adjusted by navigating to Int Freq or Int Period depends on which of the two is currently active Switching between Int Freq and Int Period is done by navigating to the internal trigger frequency period and then pressing the corresponding softkey 35 36 Front Panel Operation In the manual trigger mode you can manually trigger the 81150A 81160A Man by pressing the front panel key The 81150A 81160A initiates one waveform cycle sweep or outputs one burst for each time you press or Man release the key The zs key is illuminated while the 81150A 81160A is waiting for a manual trigger To set the Trigger Mode do the following e Press the corresponding key on the Front Panel e For selecting the arming source
389. y the instrument settings from within the web Interface 81150A The default password is AGT81150 81160A The default password is Agilent Features and Functions 3 21 Factory Default Settings Introduction The table on the following page summarizes the factory default settings for the Agilent 81150A 81160A D The power on state will be different than that in the table if you have enabled the power down recall mode See Instrument State Storage Agilent 81150A 81160A Factory Default Settings Output Configuration Function Frequency Amplitude Offset Output Units Output Impedance Output Termination Polarity Autorange Amplifier Type Trigger Out Strobe Out Sync Out A Sync Out B Output State Timing Configuration Delay Width Pulse Lead Edge Pulse Duty Cycle Square Factory Setting Sine wave 1 MHz 1 Vpp 0 000 Vdc Vpp 506 50Q 81150A only Normal On Max Bandwidth 81150A only TTL 81150A only TTL 81150A only TTL 81160A only Logical Trigger Signal 1 TTL 81160A only Logical Strobe Signal 1 Off Factory Setting Os Pulse Sine Square Ramp Arb 50 ns 81150A 2 5 ns 81160A 1 2 ns 50 81150A and 81160A User s Guide 295 296 Trail Edge Pulse Symmetry Ramp 81150A 2 5 ns 81160A 1 2 ns 10096 Features and Functions Noise Configuration PDF Arb Configuration Waveform Pattern Configuration Pattern Mode Pattern
390. ymbols for 3 and 4 level patterns e 81160A 1 channel Memory based patterns with a length of up to 4 Mbit for 2 level patterns and up to 2 MSymbols for 3 and 4 level patterns e 81160A 2 channels Memory based patterns with a length of up to 2 Mbit for 2 level patterns and up to 8 MSymbols for 3 and 4 level patterns e Algorithmically generated PRBS patterns with a polynomial of 7 9 11 15 23 and 31 The 81150A 81160A allows 2 different modes of pattern playback First there is the sequential playback of all bits in the pattern being used In case of continuous trigger mode this will continuously output the pattern at the output In addition to this it is possible to split the pattern into 2 parts with the repetition being only executed on the second part of the pattern This allows to setup preamble and payload definitions where the preamble is initializing the device under test while the test itself is being done with the looped payload part of the pattern amp The preamble payload model is not available when using the predefined PRBS patterns The pattern definition contains the definition of a loop offset This loop offset is controlling at which bit inside the data pattern the pattern generation will continue when the end of the pattern has been reached By setting this value to 0 all bits if the pattern will be looped while for non zero loop offsets only the bits beginning at the loop offset will be generated at the se
391. ypad Set the WINS Server 1 and WINS Server also 283 284 Front P Utility e e Press bagel and then the 1 0 Interfaces softkey 0 ti ce e Then select LAN followed by DNS Setup e Then select WINS Server 1 or WINS Server 2 e There is no SCPI command to set a WINS server address Host Name agile Domain Name lt DNS Serveri DNS Server2 WINS Server1 WINS Server2 Continuous Continuous 169 254 0 4 Features and Functions 3 16 10 Current Configuration LAN Introduction 81150A and 81160A User s Guide The current configuration is displayed on the LAN screen Changes to the LAN settings will be applied immediately It is not required to re boot after changing the LAN settings MAC m ERRETES Status IP ee 169 254 0 6 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Def Gateway 169 254 0 1 Host Name agilent 81150a Domain Name some domain com DNS Server 1 169 254 0 2 Continuous Continuous IP Setup 285 286 Try the Agilent 81150A 81160A Web Interface The Agilent 81150A 81160A provides a web interface resident in the instrument You can use this interface over the LAN to view and modify the instrument s 1 0 configuration Also a remote front panel interface is provided which allows you to control the instrument over the network To access and use the web interface 1 Establish LAN interface connectivity from your PC to the 81150A 81160A 2 Open your PC s web browser 3 To launch
392. z When using the samples of the other channel as modulating signal samples with a value below 0 will select the carrier frequency while samples greater than or equal to 0 will select the hop frequency Modulating Signal Modulated Carrier Frequency Shift Keying Modulation 644 Tutorial Pulse Width Modulation PWM Introduction PWM is used in digital audio applications motor control circuitry switching power supplies and other control applications The Agilent 81150A 81160A provides PWM for pulse waveforms and PWM is the only type of modulation supported for pulse waveforms For PWM the amplitude of the modulating waveform is sampled digitally and used to control the pulse width or duty cycle of the pulse waveform Modulating Signal i errepa anrea jare errare 4 4 Modulated Waveform Pulse Width Modulation Width Deviation The variation of pulse width in the modulated waveform from the pulse width of the pulse waveform is called the width deviation The deviation can also be expressed in terms of duty cycle as a percentage referenced to the period of the pulse waveform which is called the duty cycle deviation In PWM the deviation of width or duty cycle is symmetrical around the pulse width or duty cycle of the original pulse waveform For example if you specify a pulse waveform with a 10 duty cycle and then specify PWM with a duty cycle de

Agilent Pulse Function Arbitrary Noise Generator

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents